bid and contract documents major equipment …

BID AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR

MAJOR EQUIPMENT PROCUREMENT

CITY OF STEVENSON, WASHINGTON WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS – PHASE 1

RELEASED FOR BID SEPTEMBER 2021

PREPARED BY

Esvelt Environmental Engineering, LLC Spokane, Washington (509) 926‐3049

IN ASSOCIATION WITH: Wallis Engineering 215 West 4th Street, Suite 200 Vancouver, WA 98660 (360) 695‐7041

FUNDING: Funded in part by the Washington State Department of Ecology's Centennial Clean Water Fund and

Clean Water State Revolving Fund

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

STV‐00 01 05 Certificate of Engineer for Procurement.doc 00 01 05‐1

SECTION 00 01 05 CERTIFICATE OF ENGINEER

The technical material and specifications listed below were prepared by or prepared under the direct supervision of the undersigned, whose seal, as professional engineer licensed to practice as such, is affixed below.

Specification Sections 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 75 00 Testing and Commissioning Procedures 01 78 00 Close Out Submittals 01 79 00 Training 40 05 93 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment 43 11 33 Rotary Lobe Blowers 43 25 00 Submersible Screw Centrifugal Pumps 46 21 33 In‐Channel Rotary Drum Screen 46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment 46 41 34 Vertical Turbine Mixers 46 51 33 Fine Bubble Diffusers 46 66 56 Ultraviolet Disinfection System

ALLISON M. Z. ESVELT, P.E., BCEE Esvelt Environmental Engineering LLC Spokane, WA 99217 509‐926‐3049 [email protected]

9/10/2021

STV‐00 01 05 Certificate of Engineer for Procurement.doc 00 01 05‐2


STV‐00 01 10 Table of Contents for Procurement.doc 00 01 10‐1

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Section Title VOLUME 1 BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 0 00 01 01 Project Title Page (Cover) 00 01 05 Certificate of Engineer 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 10 00 Advertisement for Bids 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders for Procurement Contracts, EJCDC P‐200 (2019) 00 22 00 State Revolving Fund (SRF) Pre‐Selection Specification Insert (10‐24‐2014) Bid Forms: (To be torn out and submitted with Bid Proposal) 00 40 00 Bid Form for Procurement Contracts EJCDC P‐400 (2019) 00 43 00 Bid Bond Form, EJCDC C‐430 (2018) 00 45 10 Bidder’s Qualification Statement Form Contract Forms: (To be completed after award) 00 51 00 Notice of Award Form, EJCDC C‐510 (2018) 00 52 00 Agreement for Procurement Contracts, EJCDC P‐520 (2019) 00 55 00 Notice to Proceed Form, EJCDC C‐550 (2018) 00 61 00 Performance Bond for Procurement Contracts, EJCDC P‐610 (2019) 00 61 50 Payment Bond for Procurement Contracts, EJCDC P‐615 (2019) 00 62 50 Buyer’s Acknowledgment Receipt of Goods, EJCDC P‐625 (2019) 00 62 60 Buyer’s Notice Regarding Conformity of Goods and Special Services, EJCDC P‐626 (2019) 00 94 00 Work Change Directive Form, EJCDC C‐940 (2018) 00 94 10 Change Order Form, EJCDC C‐941 (2018) General and Supplemental General Conditions: 00 70 00 Standard General Conditions for Procurement Contracts, EJCDC P‐700 (2019) 00 80 00 Supplementary General Conditions for Procurement Contracts, EJCDC P‐800 (2019)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 ‐ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 75 00 Testing and Commissioning Requirements 01 78 00 Close Out Submittals 01 79 00 Training

STV‐00 01 10 Table of Contents for Procurement.doc 00 01 10‐2

Section Title DIVISIONS 2 THROUGH 39 (NOT USED) DIVISION 40 ‐ PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

40 05 93 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment DIVISION 41 (NOT USED) DIVISION 43 ‐ PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING EQUIPMENT 43 11 33 Rotary Lobe Blowers 43 25 00 Submersible Screw Centrifugal Pumps DIVISIONS 44 THROUGH 45 (NOT USED) DIVISION 46 ‐ WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 21 33 In‐Channel Rotary Drum Screen 46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment 46 41 34 Vertical Turbine Mixers 46 51 33 Fine Bubble Diffusers 46 66 56 Ultraviolet Disinfection System

VOLUME 2 City of Stevenson Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements Phase 1, WA Department of Ecology Review Drawings, June 2020

STV‐00 10 00 Advertisement for Bids for Procurement.docx 00 10 00‐1

CITY OF STEVENSON, WA ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Sealed bids for the supply of major equipment for the City of Stevenson WWTP Improvements Phase I – Major Equipment Procurement will be received by the City of Stevenson (City) at the City Hall at 7121 East Loop Road, Stevenson, Washington 98648, until 2:00 P.M. local time on October 13, 2021, at which time the Bids received will be publicly opened and read via Zoom Meeting ID 823 3474 7416. Join Zoom Meeting 1‐253‐215‐8782 Meeting ID: 823 3474 7416 Passcode: 553365 Description of Work: This work includes fabrication and delivery of the following equipment under separate procurement contracts: rotary lobe blowers, submersible screw centrifugal pumps, in‐channel rotary drum screen, grit removal equipment, vertical turbine mixers, fine bubble diffusers, and an ultraviolet disinfection system. The work shall also include furnishing design and operation documentation; on‐site start‐up, testing, and training; and post‐commissioning assistance. The work is to be completed by November 1, 2022. The City will execute multiple equipment procurement contracts. The materials and equipment to be provided through the procurement contracts are to be furnished and delivered to the Site for installation by the City’s Contractor. The City will assign the procurement contracts to the installation Contractor as set forth in the Agreement. Obtaining the Bidding Documents: Information and Bidding Documents for the Project can be found at the following designated website: https://walliseng.net/contact‐us/projects‐out‐to‐bid/ Bidding Documents may be downloaded from the designated website. Prospective Bidders are required to complete the “Plan Holder Registration Form”, even if Bidding Documents are obtained from a plan room or source other than the designated website in either electronic or paper format. The designated website will be updated periodically with addenda. Once a potential bidder or proposer has completed, signed, and returned to the Engineer the “Plan Holder Registration Form”, the Engineer will automatically forward them any and all subsequent addendums, amendments, or other documents relevant to the solicitation. All official notifications, addenda, and other Bidding Documents will be offered through the designated website. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for Bidding Documents, including addenda, if any, obtained from sources other than the designated website. Bid Proposals: Bid Proposals will be received for separate equipment procurement contracts for each type of major equipment. Bid Proposals must be submitted on the forms provided in the Contract Documents. Bid security shall be furnished in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Rejection of Bids: The City shall have the right to reject any or all bids not accompanied by bid security, or data required by the bidding documents, a bid in any way incomplete or irregular, or if the bid amount exceeds the amount of funds available for the project. Funding: It is anticipated that this project will be funded in part by the Washington State Department of Ecology's Centennial Clean Water Fund and Clean Water State Revolving Fund (SRF). Neither the Federal Government, State of Washington, nor any of their departments or employees are, or shall be, a party to any contract or any subcontract resulting from this solicitation for bids. Owner: City of Stevenson By: Leana Kinley Title: City Administrator Date: September 10, 2021

*** END OF SECTION ***

STV‐00 10 00 Advertisement for Bids for Procurement.docx 00 10 00‐2


EJCDC® P‐200, Instructions to Bidder for Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page 1 of 1

STV‐00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders for Procurement 2019.docx 00 20 00‐i

SECTION 00 20 00 ‐ INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1— Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 1

Article 2— Procurement Bidding Documents ............................................................................................... 1

Article 3— Qualifications of Bidders ............................................................................................................. 1

Article 4— Site Visit; Pre‐Bid Conference ..................................................................................................... 1

Article 5— Interpretations and Addenda ..................................................................................................... 2

Article 6— Bid Security ................................................................................................................................. 2

Article 7— Procurement Contract Times ...................................................................................................... 3

Article 8— Liquidated Damages .................................................................................................................... 3

Article 9— Confidentiality of Bid Information .............................................................................................. 3

Article 10— “Or‐Equal” Items ....................................................................................................................... 4

Article 11— Preparation of Bid ..................................................................................................................... 4

Article 12— Basis of Bid; Comparison of Bids ............................................................................................... 5

Article 13— Submittal of Bid ......................................................................................................................... 5

Article 14— Modification or Withdrawal of Bid ........................................................................................... 6

Article 15— Opening of Bids ......................................................................................................................... 6

Article 16— Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ..................................................................................... 6

Article 17— Evaluation of Bids and Award of Procurement Contract .......................................................... 6

Article 18— Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 6

Article 19— Signing of Procurement Agreement ......................................................................................... 7

Article 20— Sales and Use Taxes .................................................................................................................. 7

Article 21— Procurement Contract to be Assigned ...................................................................................... 7

EJCDC® P‐200, Instructions to Bidders for Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 7

STV‐00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders for Procurement 2019.docx 00 20 00‐1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

ARTICLE 1—DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below.

A. Issuing Office—The office from which the Procurement Bidding Documents are to be issued and where the bidding procedures are to be administered.

ARTICLE 2—PROCUREMENT BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Bidder may obtain complete sets of the Procurement Bidding Documents, in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid, from the Issuing Office. The deposit will be refunded to each document holder of record who returns a complete set of Procurement Bidding Documents in good condition within 30 days after opening of Bids. Bidders must obtain a complete set of the Procurement Contract Documents as listed in the Procurement Agreement.

2.02 Bidder must use a complete set of the Procurement Bidding Documents in preparing the Bid; neither Buyer nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Procurement Bidding Documents.

2.03 Buyer and Engineer make copies of Procurement Bidding Documents available on the above terms only for obtaining Bids for furnishing Goods and Special Services, and do not authorize or confer a license for any other use.

ARTICLE 3—QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.01 Buyer may at any time conduct such investigations as Buyer deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidder, and after the opening of Bids may require a Bidder to submit documentation of its qualifications, including but not limited to financial data and documentation of previous experience providing goods and services comparable to the specified Goods and Special Services.

3.02 Bidder is to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s representations and certifications.

3.03 Bidder shall submit a qualifications statement with the Bid, including financial data and documentation of previous experience providing comparable goods and services, to demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to furnish the specified Goods and Special Services.

ARTICLE 4—SITE VISIT; PRE‐BID CONFERENCE

4.01 Buyer recommends that Bidder visit the Point of Destination and the site where the Goods are to be installed and Special Services will be provided, taking into account observable local and site




conditions that may affect the delivery, cost, progress, and furnishing of the Goods and Special Services. Arrangements for such a visit may be made through Engineer.

4.02 A pre‐bid conference will not be held for this procurement.

ARTICLE 5—INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

5.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Procurement Bidding Documents are to be submitted to Engineer in writing at the address in the Bid advertisement.

5.02 Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such written questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded as having received the Procurement Bidding Documents. Questions received less than 10 days prior to the date for opening of Bids will not be answered. Only answers in the Addenda will be binding. Oral statements, interpretations, and clarifications may not be relied upon in the preparation of a Bid, and will not be binding or legally effective.

5.03 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Procurement Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Buyer or Engineer.

ARTICLE 6—BID SECURITY

6.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Buyer in an amount of 5 percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates). If a Bid bond is provided for Bid security, it must be in the form of a Bid bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions. Such Bid bond will be issued in the form included in the Procurement Bidding Documents.

6.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Buyer (Project Owner) awards the Procurement Contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Procurement Contract, furnished the required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Procurement Contract and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Buyer (Project Owner) may consider Bidder to be in default and annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited, in whole in the case of a penal sum bid bond, and to the extent of Buyer’s damages in the case of a damages‐form bond. Such forfeiture will be Buyer’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults.

6.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Buyer believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Buyer until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be released.

6.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Buyer believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within 7 days after the Bid opening.




ARTICLE 7—PROCUREMENT CONTRACT TIMES

7.01 See applicable provisions in the Procurement Agreement.

ARTICLE 8—LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

8.01 Any provisions for liquidated damages, such as those for Seller’s failure to attain a specified Milestone such as the delivery of the Goods, are set forth in the Procurement Agreement.

ARTICLE 9—CONFIDENTIALITY OF BID INFORMATION

9.01 Confidential information is information in the Bid, or in documents submitted by Bidder with the Bid or submitted subsequent to the opening of Bids in support of the Bid, that Bidder clearly and prominently labels in writing to be a trade secret, proprietary, or confidential. Bids will be opened and accompanying documents, if any, will be maintained in a manner that endeavors to avoid disclosing confidential information to third parties, to the extent allowed by Laws and Regulations.

9.02 Bidder shall clearly and prominently mark confidential information with the word “CONFIDENTIAL” on each page or sheet or on the cover of bound documents. Place “CONFIDENTIAL” stamps or watermarks so that they do not obscure any of the required information on the document, either in the original or in a way that would obscure any of the required information in a photocopy of the document.

9.03 If Buyer is requested to disclose confidential information, becomes legally compelled to disclose confidential information, or is required by a regulatory body, governing agency, or controlling authority to disclose confidential information, or make any other disclosure that is prohibited or otherwise constrained by these Procurement Bidding Requirements, Buyer will provide Bidder with prompt notice so Bidder may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy. Bidder will be solely responsible for submitting to the regulatory body, governing agency, or controlling authority any arguments, briefs, memoranda, motions, authorities, or other information in opposition to disclosure.

9.04 Buyer’s obligations with respect to confidential information are nullified by the following exceptions:

A. Confidential information becomes a part of the public domain through publication or otherwise, through no fault of the Buyer;

B. Buyer can demonstrate through suitable documentation that the confidential information was already in the Buyer’s possession, and not previously marked as confidential, or was otherwise publicly available prior to the date of Bid submittal;

C. The confidential information is subsequently and independently disclosed to the Buyer by a third party who has a lawful right to disclose such information;

D. Buyer concludes in good faith that the information is not confidential, or that disclosure is required or justified; or

E. Buyer is required to disclose the confidential information by court order or by applicable Laws and Regulations.




9.05 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Procurement Bidding Documents, it is stipulated and agreed that by accepting a Bid, Buyer has not and does not waive its legal immunity (if any) from suit or liability.

ARTICLE 10—“OR‐EQUAL” ITEMS

10.01 The Procurement Contract, if awarded, will be based on materials and equipment specified or described in the Procurement Bidding Documents. Bidders may propose "or equal" materials and equipment, which if approved by Engineer will be identified by Addendum. The materials and equipment described in the Procurement Bidding Documents establish a standard of required type, function, and quality to be met by any proposed “or‐equal” item. No item of material or equipment will be considered by Engineer as an “or‐equal” unless written request for approval has been submitted by Bidder and has been received by Engineer no later than 15 days after the advertisement or invitation to bid is first issued. Each such request shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 7.04 of the General Conditions. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed item as an equal will be final. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals unless set forth in an Addendum.

ARTICLE 11—PREPARATION OF BID

11.01 The Bid Form is included with the Procurement Bidding Documents. Additional copies of Procurement Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office.

11.02 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed and the Bid Form must be signed by an individual authorized to act on behalf of the Bidder. Alterations must be initialed by an individual authorized to act on behalf of the Bidder. A Bid price must be indicated for each item in the Bid Form. In the case of optional alternates, the words “No Bid” may be entered.

11.03 Bidder must acknowledge all Addenda by filling in the number and date of each Addendum in the Bid Form and sign where indicated to verify that the Addenda were received. A Bid that does not acknowledge receipt of all Addenda may be considered non‐responsive.

11.04 Bidder shall:

A. Sign the Bid Form as indicated in the Bid Form.

B. Include evidence of authority to sign.

C. Provide information on the individual to be contacted for any communications regarding the Bid.

D. Provide evidence of the Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the locality of the Project, to the extent required, or indicate the ability to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Procurement Contract.




11.05 The responsibilities of each Bidder submitting a Bid are described in the Bidder’s representations and certifications set forth in Article 6 of the Bid Form.

ARTICLE 12—BASIS OF BID; COMPARISON OF BIDS

12.01 Lump Sum

A. Bidder shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form.

B. The apparent low Bid will be determined on the basis of the lump sum bid amount.

12.02 Base Bid with Alternates

A. The “Base Bid” is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to furnish the Goods and Special Services described in the Procurement Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added for sums stated in Alternate Bids. An “Alternate Bid” (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Goods and Special Services, as described in the Procurement Bidding Documents, is accepted.

B. As set forth in the Bid Form, Bidder shall enter an amount for the Lump Sum Base Bid, and enter a separate amount for each Alternate Bid described in the Procurement Bidding Documents.

C. The apparent low Bid will be determined on the basis of the total amount of the Base Bid, plus (in the order listed on the Bid Form) the Alternate Bids providing the most features within the funds determined by the Buyer to be available. If the addition of another Alternate Bid item listed in the Bid Form would make the total amount exceed the available funds, it will be skipped and the next subsequent Alternate Bid in a lower amount will be added, provided the total amount does not exceed the available funds.

D. Award will be made to the responsible Bidder that provides the lowest Bid amount for any combination of Base Bid plus selected additive Alternate Bids which Buyer determines provides the most beneficial combination of alternatives within the funds available.

12.03 Buyer’s Contingency Allowance

A. If Buyer has stipulated a Buyer’s Contingency Allowance in the Bid Form, such Buyer’s Contingency Allowance is the same for all Bidders and is not a factor in determining the apparent low Bid.

ARTICLE 13—SUBMITTAL OF BID

13.01 Bidder shall refer to the Advertisement for Bids for specific identification of the date, time, and place where Bids are to be submitted.

13.02 Bidder must submit one separate unbound copy of the completed Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 4 of the Bid Form.

13.03 A Bid must be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid. Submit the Bid in an envelope plainly marked with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is




submitted) and the name and address of Bidder. Enclose the Bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid as listed in the Bid Form. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.”

ARTICLE 14—MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID

14.01 A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by a document duly signed in the same manner that a Bid must be signed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids.

14.02 If, within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Buyer and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Buyer that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned.

ARTICLE 15—OPENING OF BIDS

15.01 Bids will be publicly opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and read aloud, unless obviously non‐responsive. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and Alternate Bids, if any, will be made available to Bidders after Bids have been opened and reviewed by the Buyer.

ARTICLE 16—BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

16.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period stated in the Bid Form, but Buyer may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period.

ARTICLE 17—EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

17.01 Buyer reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Buyer also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Goods and Special Services.

17.02 Buyer will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Buyer finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible.

17.03 In evaluating Bids, Buyer will consider whether the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid Form or may be requested from Bidders prior to a Notice of Award.

17.04 If Buyer awards the Procurement Contract, such award will be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid.

ARTICLE 18—BONDS AND INSURANCE

18.01 Article 5 of the General Conditions and Article 5 of the Supplementary Conditions set forth Buyer’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the Successful Bidder




delivers the signed Procurement Agreement to Buyer, it must be accompanied by such bonds and acceptable evidence of insurance.

ARTICLE 19—SIGNING OF PROCUREMENT AGREEMENT

19.01 When Buyer issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the unsigned counterparts of the Procurement Agreement along with the other Procurement Contract Documents identified in the Procurement Agreement. Within 21 days thereafter, Successful Bidder must execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Procurement Agreement and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Procurement Contract Documents to Buyer. Within 10 days thereafter, Buyer will deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Procurement Agreement to Successful Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Procurement Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 20—SALES AND USE TAXES

20.01 Buyer is NOT exempt from Washington State sales taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Project.

ARTICLE 21—PROCUREMENT CONTRACT TO BE ASSIGNED

21.01 Bidder’s attention is directed to the provisions of Article 5 of the Procurement Agreement which provide for the assignment of the Procurement Contract to a construction contractor designated by the Buyer to construct the Project. Successful Bidder (Seller) will be required to perform the Procurement Contract after it has been assigned to the construction contractor (Contractor Assignee) in accordance with the provisions in the Procurement Contract. Timing of the assignment is addressed in the Procurement Agreement. Forms documenting the assignment of the Procurement Contract and for the agreement of the Seller’s surety to such assignment are included as attachments to the Procurement Agreement.

SRF Specification Insert 1 Revised 10/24/2014

WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY

WATER POLLUTION CONTROL REVOLVING FUND

PRE SELECTION INSERT

Revised 10/24/14

The following clauses will be incorporated into equipment pre-selection contracts receiving financial assistance from the Washington State Department of Ecology Water Pollution Control Revolving Fund. In the event of conflict within the contract these clauses shall take precedence Compliance with State and Local Laws The SELLER shall assure compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, requirements, and ordinances as they pertain to the design, implementation, and administration of the approved project. State Interest Exclusion Partial funding of this project is being provided through the Washington State Department of Ecology Water Pollution Control Revolving Fund. Neither the State of Washington nor any of its departments or employees are, or shall be, a party to this contract or any subcontract. Third Party Beneficiary Partial funding of this project is being provided through the Washington State Department of Ecology Water Pollution Control Revolving Fund. All parties agree that the State of Washington shall be, and is hereby, named as an express third-party beneficiary of this contract, with full rights as such. Protection of the Environment No construction related activity shall contribute to the degradation of the environment, allow material to enter surface or ground waters, or allow particulate emissions to the atmosphere, which exceed state or federal standards. Any actions that potentially allow a discharge to state waters must have prior approval of the Washington State Department of Ecology. Use of American Iron and Steel This provision applies to projects for the construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of a “treatment works” as defined in the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 USC 1381 et seq.). This provision does not apply if the engineering plans and specifications for the project were approved by the Ecology prior to January 17, 2014. The SELLER acknowledges to and for the benefit of the Project Owner and the State of Washington that it understands the goods and services under this Agreement are being funded with monies made available by the Water Pollution Control Revolving Fund which contains provisions commonly known as “American Iron and Steel” that requires all of the iron and steel products used in the project be produced in the United States (“American Iron and Steel


Requirements”). “Iron and Steel products” means the following products made primarily of iron or steel: lined or unlined pipes and fittings, manhole covers and other municipal castings, hydrants, tanks, flanges, pipe clamps and restraints, valves, structural steel, reinforced precast concrete, and construction materials. The SELLER hereby represents and warrants to and for the benefit of the Project Owner and the State that:

(a) the SELLER has reviewed and understands the American Iron and Steel Requirements, (b) all of the iron and steel products used in the project will be and/or have been produced in the United States in a manner that complies with the American Iron and Steel Requirements, unless a waiver of the requirements is approved, and (c) the SELLER will provide any further verified information, certification or assurance of compliance with this paragraph, or information necessary to support a waiver of the American Iron and Steel Requirements, as may be requested by the Project Owner or the State.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, any failure to comply with this paragraph by the SELLER shall permit the Project Owner or State to recover as damages against the SELLER any loss, expense or cost (including, without limitation, attorney’s fees) incurred by the Project Owner or State resulting from any such failure (including, without limitation, any impairment or loss of funding, whether in whole or in part, from the State or any damages owed to the State by the Project Owner). While the SELLER has no direct contractual privity with the State, as a lender to the Project Owner for the funding of its project, the Project Owner and the SELLER agree that the State is a third-party beneficiary and neither this paragraph (nor any other provision of the Agreement necessary to give this paragraph force or effect shall be amended or waived without the prior written consent of the State. Certification Regarding Suspension, Debarment, Ineligibility Or Voluntary Exclusion

1. The SELLER, by signing this agreement, certifies that it is not suspended, debarred, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible or otherwise excluded from contracting with the federal government, or from receiving contracts paid for with federal funds. If the SELLER is unable to certify to the statements contained in the certification, they must provide an explanation as to why they cannot.

2. The SELLER shall provide immediate written notice to the Washington State Department

of Ecology if at any time the SELLER learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or had become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

3. The terms covered transaction, debarred, suspended, ineligible, lower tier covered

transaction, participant, person, primary covered transaction, principal, proposal, and voluntarily excluded, as used in this clause, have the meaning set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the Washington State Department of Ecology for assistance in obtaining a copy of the


regulations.

4. The SELLER agrees it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is proposed for debarment under the applicable Code of Federal Regulations, debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction.

5. The SELLER further agrees by signing this agreement, that it will include this clause

titled “Certification Regarding Suspension, Debarment, Ineligibility Or Voluntary Exclusion” without modification in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions.

6. Pursuant to 2CFR180.330, the SELLER is responsible for ensuring that any lower tier

covered transaction complies with certification of suspension and debarment requirements.

7. The SELLER acknowledges that failing to disclose the information required in the Code

of Federal Regulations may result in the delay or negation of this funding agreement, or pursuance of legal remedies, including suspension and debarment.

8. The SELLER agrees to keep proof in its agreement file that it and all lower tier recipients

or SELLERs are not suspended or debarred and will make this proof available to the Washington State Department of Ecology upon request. The RECIPIENT/SELLER must run a search in http://www.sam.gov/ and print a copy of completed searches to document proof of compliance.

This term and condition supersedes EPA Form 5700-49, “Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters.” Disadvantaged Business Enterprises General Compliance (40 CFR Part 33). The SELLER shall comply with the requirements of the Environmental Protection Agency’s Program for Participation By Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) 40 CFR Part 33. Non-discrimination Provision (40CFR Appendix A to Part 33). The SELLER shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin or sex in the performance of this contract. The SELLER shall carry out applicable requirements of 40 CFR part 33 in the award and administration of contracts awarded under EPA financial assistance agreements. Failure by the SELLER to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract which may result in the termination of this contract or other legally available remedies. The SELLER shall comply with all federal and state nondiscrimination laws, including, but not limited to Title VI and VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, and Chapter 49.60 RCW, Washington’s Law Against Discrimination, and 42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).


Six Good Faith Efforts (40 CFR Part 33 Subpart C). The SELLER agrees to make the following good faith efforts whenever procuring subcontracts, equipment, services and supplies. The SELLER shall retain records documenting compliance with the following six good faith efforts. Ensuring Disadvantaged Business Enterprises are made aware of contracting

opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities. For Indian Tribal, State and Local and Government recipients, this will include placing Disadvantaged Business Enterprises on solicitation lists and soliciting them whenever they are potential sources. Qualified Women and Minority business enterprises may be found on the Internet at www.omwbe.wa.gov or by contacting the Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Enterprises at (866) 208-1064.

Making information on forthcoming opportunities available to Disadvantaged Business Enterprises and arrange time frames for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where the requirements permit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in the competitive process. This includes, whenever possible, posting solicitations for bids or proposals for a minimum of thirty (30) calendar days before the bid or proposal closing date.

Considering in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts could subcontract with Disadvantaged Business Enterprises. For Indian Tribal, State and local Government recipients, this will include dividing total requirements when economically feasible into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in the competitive process.

Encourage contracting with a consortium of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually.

Using services and assistance of the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce.

If the prime SELLER awards subcontracts, requiring the subcontractors to take the six good faith efforts in paragraphs 1 through 5 above.

EJCDC® P-400, Bid Form for Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV-00 40 00 Bid Form for Procurement 2019.docx 00 40 00 - i

SECTION 00 40 00 - BID FORM FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1— Buyer and Bidder ........................................................................................................................ 1

Article 2— Basis of Bid .................................................................................................................................. 1

Article 3— Time of Completion .................................................................................................................... 2

Article 4— Attachments to this Bid .............................................................................................................. 2

Article 5— Bidder’s Acknowledgments......................................................................................................... 2

Article 6— Bidder’s Representations and Certifications............................................................................... 3



STV-00 40 00 Bid Form for Procurement 2019.docx 00 40 00 - 1

SECTION 00 40 00 - BID FORM FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 1—BUYER AND BIDDER

1.01 This Bid is submitted to: City of Stevenson

1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into a Procurement Contract with Buyer in the form included in the Procurement Bidding Documents, and to furnish the Goods and Special Services as specified or indicated in the Procurement Bidding Documents, for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Procurement Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 2—BASIS OF BID

2.01 Bidder will furnish the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents for the following Procurement Contract Price(s) in the Bid Schedule below. Refer to the Specification Sections for descriptions of the Bid Items. Bidder acknowledges that each unit price includes an amount considered by Bidder to be adequate to cover Bidder’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

Major Equipment Bid Item (Enter Bid for One Specification Section Only and Submit a Separate Bid Form and Attachments for each Major Equipment Item to be Bid. A single Bid Form shall be submitted for both Paragraphs 1.05.B and 1.05.C for Section 46 51 33 - Fine Bubble Diffusers. All Bids must include all requirements from Divisions 0 and 1.) Price – Numerals

Section 43 11 33 Rotary Lobe Blowers $

Section 43 25 00 Submersible Screw Centrifugal Pumps $

Section 46 21 33 In-Channel Rotary Drum Screen $

Section 46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment $

Section 46 41 34 Vertical Turbine Mixers $ Section 46 51 33 Fine Bubble Diffusers – Paragraph 1.05.B New Aeration Basin $ Alternate 1: Section 46 51 33 Fine Bubble Diffusers – Paragraph 1.05.C Oxidation Ditch $

Section 46 66 56 Ultraviolet Disinfection System $

PLUS SALES TAX 7.7% $

TOTAL BID PRICE Total Sum $




ARTICLE 3—TIME OF COMPLETION

3.01 Bidder agrees that the furnishing of Goods and Special Services will conform to the schedule of Procurement Contract Times set forth in Article 2 of the Procurement Agreement.

3.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Procurement Agreement as to liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 4—ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID

4.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:

A. Required Bid security in the form prescribed in the Instructions to Bidders.

B. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Bids.

C. Bidder Qualification Statement Form with supporting data.

D. The following information described in Specification Section 01 33 00, Submittals:

1. Paragraph 2.03.B.2: Mechanical drawings including equipment layout drawings and equipment dimensions.

2. Paragraph 2.03.C.1: Manufacturer’s catalog information.

3. Paragraph 2.03.C.2: Manufacturer’s specifications for materials and manufacturing.

4. Paragraph 2.03.C.6: Design calculations and performance curves demonstrating compliance with the performance and design criteria of the specifications.

5. Paragraph 2.03.C.15: List of all variances from the Specifications. (Note: Failure to specifically identify and fully explain all variances will be cause for rejection.)

ARTICLE 5—BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

5.01 Bidder accepts all terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Buyer.

5.02 Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Procurement Bidding Documents, the related data identified in the Procurement Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged:

Addendum No. Addendum Date




5.03 Bidder acknowledges the provisions of the Agreement as to the assignment of the specified contract for procurement of goods and special services.

ARTICLE 6—BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

6.01 Bidder’s Representations

A. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:

1. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Procurement Contract Documents.

2. If required by the Instructions to Bidders to visit the Point of Destination and the site where the Goods are to be installed or Special Services will be provided, or if, in Bidder’s judgment, any observable local or site conditions may affect the delivery, cost, progress, or furnishing of the Goods and Special Services, then Bidder has visited the Point of Destination and site where the Goods are to be installed or Special Services will be provided (as applicable) and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the observable local and site conditions that may affect delivery, cost, progress, and furnishing of the Goods and Special Services.

3. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect the cost, progress, and performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract.

4. Bidder has carefully studied, considered, and correlated the information known to Bidder with respect to the effect of such information on the cost, progress, and performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract.

5. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Procurement Contract Documents, and the written resolution (if any) thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.

6. The Procurement Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract.

7. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of the Bidding Requirements, that without exception the Bid (including all Bid prices) is premised upon furnishing the Goods and Special Services as required by the Procurement Contract Documents.

6.02 Bidder’s Certifications

A. Bidder certifies that:

1. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation;

2. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid;

3. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and




4. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Procurement Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.02.A.4:

a. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;

b. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Buyer, (b) to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Buyer of the benefits of free and open competition;

c. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Buyer, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and

d. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process.




This Bid is offered by:

Bidder:

(typed or printed name of organization)

By: (individual’s signature) Date: (date signed) Name: (typed or printed)

Title: (typed or printed) (If Bidder is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: (individual’s signature)

Title: (typed or printed)

Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative:

Name: (typed or printed)

Title: (typed or printed) Address:

Phone:

Email:

License No.:

Classification:

Limitation:

EJCDC® C‐430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 43 00 Bid Bond Penal Sum Form 2018.docx 00 43 00 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 43 00 ‐ BID BOND FORM

Bidder Surety

Name: Name:

Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):

Buyer Bid

Name: Project (name and location):

Address (principal place of business):

Bid Due Date:

Bond

Penal Sum:

Date of Bond:

Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Bid Bond, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

Bidder Surety

(Full formal name of Bidder) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)

By: By:

(Signature) (Signature) (Attach Power of Attorney)

Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)

Title: Title:

Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature)


Title: Title:

Notes: (1) Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. (2) Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.

EJCDC® C‐430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 43 00 Bid Bond Penal Sum Form 2018.docx 00 43 00 ‐ 2

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond will be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.

2. Default of Bidder occurs upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.

3. This obligation will be null and void if:

3.1. Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or

3.2. All Bids are rejected by Owner, or

3.3. Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions does not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.

6. No suit or action will be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond will be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder must be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Postal Service registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage pre‐paid, and will be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond will be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute governs and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith continues in full force and effect.

11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

EJCDC C‐451, Qualifications Statement. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 45 10 Bidder Qualifications Statement 2018.docx 00 45 10 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 45 10 – BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT

ARTICLE 1—GENERAL INFORMATION

1.01 Provide contact information for the Business:

Legal Name of Business:

Corporate Office

Name: Phone number:

Title: Email address:

Business address of corporate office:

Local Office

Name: Phone number:

Title: Email address:

Business address of local office:

1.02 Provide information on the Business’s organizational structure:

Form of Business: ☐ Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation

☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Joint Venture comprised of the following companies:

1.

2.

3.

Provide a separate Qualification Statement for each Joint Venturer.

Date Business was formed: State in which Business was formed:

Is this Business authorized to operate in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No ☐ Pending

1.03 Identify all businesses that own Business in whole or in part (25% or greater), or that are wholly or partly (25% or greater) owned by Business:

Name of business: Affiliation:

Address:


Address:


Address:




1.04 Provide information regarding the Business’s officers, partners, and limits of authority.

Name: Title:

Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $

Name: Title:


Name: Title:


Name: Title:

ARTICLE 2—LICENSING

2.01 Provide information regarding licensure for Business:

Name of License:

Licensing Agency:

License No: Expiration Date:

Name of License:

Licensing Agency:

License No: Expiration Date:

ARTICLE 3—DIVERSE BUSINESS CERTIFICATIONS

3.01 Provide information regarding Business’s Diverse Business Certification, if any.

Certification Certifying Agency Certification

Date

☐ Disadvantaged Business Enterprise

☐ Minority Business Enterprise

☐ Woman‐Owned Business Enterprise

☐ Small Business Enterprise

☐ Disabled Business Enterprise

☐ Veteran‐Owned Business Enterprise

☐ Service‐Disabled Veteran‐Owned Business

☐ HUBZone Business (Historically Underutilized) Business

☐ Other

☐ None




ARTICLE 4—SURETY INFORMATION

4.01 Provide information regarding the surety company that will issue required bonds on behalf of the Business, including but not limited to performance and payment bonds.

Surety Name:

Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of:

Is surety authorized to provide surety bonds in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Is surety listed in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” published in Department Circular 570 (as amended) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury?

☐ Yes ☐ No

Mailing Address (principal place of business):

Physical Address (principal place of business):

Phone (main): Phone (claims):

ARTICLE 5—INSURANCE

5.01 Provide information regarding Business’s insurance company(s), including but not limited to its Commercial General Liability carrier. Provide information for each provider.

Name of insurance provider, and type of policy (CLE, auto, etc.):

Insurance Provider Type of Policy (Coverage Provided)

Are providers licensed or authorized to issue policies in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Does provider have an A.M. Best Rating of A‐VII or better? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Mailing Address (principal place of business):

Physical Address (principal place of business):

Phone (main): Phone (claims):




ARTICLE 6—CAPACITY, EXPERIENCE, AND PROJECT ORGANIZATION

6.01 Provide information that will identify the overall size and capacity of the Business.

Average number of current full‐time employees:

Estimate of revenue for the previous year:

Existing Production Utilization:

Manufacturing Quality Assurance Program:

6.02 Provide information regarding the Business’s previous contracting experience.

Years of experience with projects like the proposed project:

Has Business, or a predecessor in interest, or an affiliate identified in Paragraph 1.03:

Been disqualified as a bidder by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years?

☐ Yes ☐ No

Been barred from contracting by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years?

☐ Yes ☐ No

Been released from a bid in the past 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Defaulted on a project or failed to complete any contract or purchase order awarded to it?

Refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents or

in a change order? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Been a party to any currently pending litigation or arbitration? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Provide full details in a separate attachment if the response to any of these questions is Yes.

6.03 Provide information on key individuals whom Business intends to assign to the Project.

Team Member Name, Title, Phone Number

Project Manager:

Design/Submittals:

Manufacturing/Delivery:

Field Services:




6.04 List a minimum of 50 projects in Schedule A that are on‐going or have been completed for which the Seller has sold the same or similar make and model equipment proposed in Seller’s Bid and provide indicated information to demonstrate the experience and qualifications with furnishing the proposed equipment.

ARTICLE 7—REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS

7.01 Provide the following information with the Statement of Qualifications:

A. If Business is a Joint Venture, separate Qualifications Statements for each Joint Venturer, as required in Paragraph 1.02.

B. Attachments providing additional information as required by Paragraph 6.02.

C. Schedule A (Qualifying Projects) as required by Paragraph 6.04.




This Statement of Qualifications is offered by:

Business:


By: (individual’s signature)



Date: (date signed)

(If Business is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: (individual’s signature)


Title:

(typed or printed)

Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative:



Address:

Phone:

Email:

EJCDC® C‐451, Qualifications Statement—Schedule A—Current and Previous Contracts. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.


Schedule A ‐ Current and Previous Contracts for Proposed Equipment Make and Model

Project Name Buyer's Contact Person Contract/PO Date and Status

Contract/PO Amount

Equipment Make and Model

Peak Equipment Capacity (MGD, SCFM, or HP)

Name: Address: Telephone:














Contract/PO Amount
















PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

EJCDC® C‐510, Notice of Award. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 51 00 Notice of Award 2018.docx 00 51 00 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 51 00 ‐ NOTICE OF AWARD

Date of Issuance:

Buyer: Buyer’s Project No.:

Engineer: Engineer’s Project No.:

Project:

Contract Name:

Bidder:

Bidder’s Address:

You are notified that Buyer has accepted your Bid dated [ ] for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for:

The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $[ ]. Contract Price is subject to adjustment based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price Work, and Work performed on a cost‐plus‐fee basis, as applicable.

Two (2) unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically.

☐ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 21 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award:

1. Deliver to Buyer two (2) copies counterparts of the Agreement, signed by Bidder (as Seller).

2. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and in the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6.

3. Other conditions precedent (if any): [ ]

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Buyer to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.

Within 10 days after you comply with the above conditions, Buyer will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

Buyer:

By (signature):

Name (printed):

Title:

Copy: Engineer

EJCDC® C‐510, Notice of Award. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 51 00 Notice of Award 2018.docx 00 51 00 ‐ 2


EJCDC® P‐520, Agreement between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i of 1

STV‐00 52 00 Agreement for Procurement 2019.docx 00 52 00 ‐ i

SECTION 00 52 00 ‐ AGREEMENT BETWEEN BUYER AND SELLER FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1— Procurement Contract ................................................................................................................ 1 1.01 Goods and Special Services ........................................................................................................... 1 1.02 The Project .................................................................................................................................... 1 1.03 Engineer ........................................................................................................................................ 1 1.04 Point of Destination ...................................................................................................................... 1

Article 2— Procurement Contract Times ...................................................................................................... 1 2.01 Time of the Essence ....................................................................................................................... 1 2.02 Schedule of Procurement Contract Times ..................................................................................... 1 2.03 Shop Drawings and Product Data ................................................................................................. 2 2.04 Liquidated Damages ..................................................................................................................... 2

Article 3— Procurement Contract Price ....................................................................................................... 3 3.01 Procurement Contract Price and Total Price—Based on Attached Bid ......................................... 3

Article 4— Payment Procedures ................................................................................................................... 3 4.01 Submittal and Processing of Applications for Payment ................................................................ 3 4.02 Progress Payments; Final Payment ............................................................................................... 3 4.03 Interest .......................................................................................................................................... 4

Article 5— Assignment of Procurement Contract ........................................................................................ 4

Article 6— Procurement Contract Documents ............................................................................................. 6 6.01 List of Procurement Contract Documents ..................................................................................... 6

Article 7— Seller’s Representations and Certifications ................................................................................ 7 7.01 Seller’s Representations ................................................................................................................ 7 7.02 Seller’s Certifications ..................................................................................................................... 8

Article 8— Confidentiality ............................................................................................................................. 8 8.01 Confidential Information ............................................................................................................... 8 8.02 Disclosure of Confidential Information ......................................................................................... 9 8.03 Waiver of Immunity ...................................................................................................................... 9

Article 9— Mutual Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 9 9.01 Mutual Waiver of Consequential Damages .................................................................................. 9

Exhibit A— Assignment of Procurement Contract, Consent to Assignment, and Acceptance of Assignment.................................................................................................................................................. 12

Exhibit B— Surety’s Consent to Assignment............................................................................................... 13



STV‐00 52 00 Agreement for Procurement 2019.docx 00 52 00 ‐ 1

AGREEMENT BETWEEN BUYER AND SELLER FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

This Procurement Agreement is by and between the City of Stevenson (“Buyer”) and [ ] (“Seller”).

Terms used in this Procurement Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions of the Procurement Contract and the Supplementary Conditions of the Procurement Contract.

Buyer and Seller hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1—PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

1.01 Goods and Special Services

A. Seller shall furnish the Goods and Special Services as specified or indicated in the Procurement Contract Documents. The Goods and Special Services are generally described as follows: .

1.02 The Project

A. The Project, of which the Goods and Special Services are a part, is generally described as follows: Wastewater Treatment Plant Improvements – Phase 1.

1.03 Engineer

A. Buyer has retained Wallis Engineering ("Engineer"), to prepare Procurement Contract Documents and act as Buyer's representative. Engineer assumes all duties and responsibilities and has the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Procurement Contract Documents in connection with Seller’s furnishing of Goods and Special Services.

1.04 Point of Destination

A. The Point of Destination is designated as: Wastewater Treatment Plant, 686 Southwest Rock Creek Drive, Stevenson, WA 98648.

ARTICLE 2—PROCUREMENT CONTRACT TIMES

2.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, including the submittal of Shop Drawings and Samples, the delivery of Goods, and the furnishing of Special Services as stated in the Procurement Contract Documents, are of the essence of the Procurement Contract.

2.02 Schedule of Procurement Contract Times

A. The following schedule sets forth the Procurement Contract Times:




Milestone Date or Days Notes

Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data

42 days After Contract Times commence.

Submit Revisions or Additions to Shop Drawings and Product Data

14 days After receipt of each Engineer’s Review.

Deliver acceptable Goods to Point of Destination

154 days After approval of shop drawings. Delivery may be made in the 15‐day period before delivery date.

Commence Special Services for Goods

14 days After delivery, date of Buyer’s acknowledgment of receipt.

Complete Special Services and Readiness for Final Inspection and Acceptance of Goods and Special Services

14 days After commencement of Special Services.

2.03 Shop Drawings and Product Data

A. Submittal of Shop Drawings and Product Data: Seller shall submit all Shop Drawings and Samples required by the Procurement Contract Documents to Engineer for its review and approval.

B. Engineer’s Review: It is the intent of the parties that Engineer will conduct its review of Shop Drawings and Samples and issue its approval, or a denial accompanied by substantive comments regarding information needed to gain approval, within 14 days after Seller's submittal of such Shop Drawings and Samples, or within such longer period that is needed because of the quantity and quality of such submittals. Resubmittals will be limited whenever possible.

2.04 Liquidated Damages

A. Buyer and Seller recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 2.01, and that Buyer will suffer financial and other losses if the Goods are not delivered to the Point of Destination and ready for receipt of delivery by Buyer within the time specified in Paragraph 2.02, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with this Procurement Contract. The parties also recognize that the timely performance of services by others involved in the Project is materially dependent upon Seller’s specific compliance with the delivery requirements of Paragraph 2.02. Further, the parties recognize the time, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the loss (whether direct, consequential, or otherwise) suffered by Buyer if complete, acceptable Goods are not delivered on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Buyer and Seller agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) Seller shall pay Buyer $1,000 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 2.02 for submission of Shop Drawings and Product Data and delivery of acceptable Goods. Seller’s obligation to pay liquidated damages shall be limited to an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Seller’s Contract Price.




ARTICLE 3—PROCUREMENT CONTRACT PRICE

3.01 Procurement Contract Price and Total Price—Based on Attached Bid

A. For furnishing the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents, Buyer shall pay Seller the prices stated in Seller’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit, subject to final adjustments for Unit Price Goods and Special Services and Buyer’s Contingency Allowance, if any, and subject to the following Buyer‐accepted alternates: _____ .

ARTICLE 4—PAYMENT PROCEDURES

4.01 Submittal and Processing of Applications for Payment

A. Seller shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions and the following paragraphs. Engineer and Buyer will process such Applications for Payment in accordance with said Article 13.

4.02 Progress Payments; Final Payment

A. Seller may submit an Application for Payment requesting the stated percentage of Procurement Contract Price upon attainment of each of the following Payment Line Items:

Payment Line Item (Lump Sum) Percentage of Lump Sum

1. Receipt of Approval of Shop Drawings and Product Data 10

2. Completion of acceptable factory testing (if any)] 5

3. Delivery of Goods to Point of Destination in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents

70

4. Completion of Special Services in accordance with Procurement Contract Documents

10

5. Final Payment: Correction of non‐conformities, provision of final Operations and Maintenance manuals, submittal of warranties and other final documentation required by the Procurement Contract Documents

5

Total Procurement Contract Price (Lump Sum) 100

B. For Unit Price Goods and Special Services, if any, or for payments owed to Seller as a result of authorizations by Buyer under the Buyer’s Contingency Allowance (if any), Seller shall submit a separate Application for Payment, no more frequently than monthly, that states (1) the actual quantities of such Unit Price Goods and Special Services that have been furnished, and the applicable unit prices; and (2) the services or items performed or furnished under the Buyer’s Contingency Allowance, and the amounts owed. If practical, and at Seller’s option, Seller may apply for such unit price and Buyer’s Contingency Allowance payments in a separate section of an Application for Payment submitted under Paragraph 4.02.A for lump sum items.




C. Buyer shall pay Seller the amount owed under an Application for Payment within 30 days after Engineer’s presentation to Buyer of the Application for Payment and Engineer’s recommendation.

4.03 Interest

A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the state statutory rate.

ARTICLE 5—ASSIGNMENT OF PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

A. Buyer has the right to assign this Procurement Contract for furnishing Goods and Special Services, but only to a person or entity with sufficient apparent ability to satisfy all of Buyer's obligations under this Procurement Contract, and Seller hereby consents to such assignment. Forms documenting the assignment of the Procurement Contract, and consent of Seller’s surety to the assignment, have been executed by Buyer, Seller, and Seller's surety, and are attached as exhibits to this Procurement Agreement. If so, assigned the following provisions apply:

1. The Procurement Contract is initially executed in the name of the entity identified herein as Buyer, and will be assigned by such Buyer (as assignor) to a construction contractor (Contractor/Assignee) designated by such Buyer. The assignment will occur on the effective date of the construction contract between such Buyer (Project Owner) and the Contractor/Assignee, which is expected to occur on or about 3/1/2022. Commencing on the date of acceptance of assignment by the Contractor/Assignee, all references in the Procurement Contract to “Buyer” shall mean the designated Contractor/Assignee.

2. The assignment of this Procurement Contract relieves the assignor from all further obligations and liabilities under this Procurement Contract. After assignment, Seller shall become a subcontractor or supplier to the Contractor/Assignee and, except as noted herein, all rights, duties, and obligations of Buyer under the Procurement Contract become the rights, duties, and obligations of the Contractor/Assignee.

3. After assignment:

a. The Procurement Drawings and Procurement Specifications, and any modifying Addenda will become “Contract Documents” under the construction contract.

b. If the Procurement Drawings or Procurement Specifications, as “Contract Documents” under the construction contract, are duly modified under such construction contract, then Seller and Contractor/Assignee shall enter into a corresponding Change Order under the applicable provisions of this Procurement Contract.

c. The Procurement Drawings and Procurement Specifications may not be modified by Seller or Contractor/Assignee, singly or in tandem, except as such Procurement Drawings or Procurement Specifications, as “Contract Documents” under the construction contract, have been duly modified under such construction contract.

d. All performance warranties, guarantees, and indemnifications required by the Procurement Contract will continue to run for the benefit of assignor (Project




Owner) and, in addition, for the benefit of the Contractor/Assignee. However, if assignor (Project Owner) and Contractor/Assignee make the same warranty or guarantee claim, then Seller shall only be liable once for such claim. Other than its remedies under such warranties, guarantees, and indemnifications, assignor will not retain direct rights under this Procurement Contract, but will have rights and remedies as a party to the construction contract, whose scope of work will encompass the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, and modifying Addenda; provided, however, that any limitations on Seller’s liability in this Procurement Contract will continue to bind the original Buyer (assignor) after assignment.

e. The Contractor/Assignee shall have all the rights of the Buyer under the Performance Bond and Payment Bond.

f. Seller shall submit all Applications for Payment directly to Contractor/Assignee.

1) Contractor/Assignee shall review each Application for Payment promptly, determine the amount that Contractor/Assignee approves for payment, and then include the amount approved in the next application for payment submitted to Project Owner (or Engineer) under the construction contract.

2) Contractor/Assignee shall pay Seller within 30 days of receipt of payment from the Project Owner under the construction contract.

3) After assignment Engineer will review, approve, or deny the content of Applications for Payment under the Procurement Contract only to the extent that Contractor/Assignee, as construction contractor, has incorporated such content into payment applications that Engineer reviews under the construction contract.

g. The Contractor/Assignee shall have all the rights of the Buyer under any pending Claim by Buyer.

h. All Claims and supporting documentation will be submitted directly by the claimant party (either Contractor/Assignee or Seller), to the other party, without submittal to Engineer.

1) The other party will render a response in writing within 30 days of receipt of the last submittal of claimant.

2) If the other party does not render a written response to a Claim within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant, the other party shall be deemed to have approved the Claim in its entirety.

3) The other party’s written response to a Claim, or the approval of the Claim in its entirety as a function of failure to respond within 30 days, will be final and binding upon Buyer and Seller 30 days after it is issued, unless within such 30 days of issuance either Buyer or Seller appeals the result by initiating the mediation of the Claim in accordance with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Paragraph 12.02 of the General Conditions.




4) Any Claim by Seller that Contractor/Assignee may choose to submit, present, or forward to Project Owner must be submitted to Buyer within sufficient time for Contractor/Assignee to preserve its rights under the construction contract, notwithstanding any procedures or time limits in this Procurement Contract.

i. Seller’s recovery of additional cost, time, or both cost and time for any Claim attributable to the Project Owner will be limited to the proportionate recovery by Contractor/Assignee against Project Owner for such Claim. Seller will cooperate and assist Contractor/Assignee in pursuing any Claim by Contractor/Assignee against Project Owner on behalf of Seller, including the timely preparation and delivery of supporting documentation.

j. If the pursuit of any claim by Contractor/Assignee against Project Owner on Seller’s behalf requires the expenditure by Contractor/Assignee of legal or consulting fees, or results in litigation, arbitration, or any dispute resolution procedures, Seller agrees to pay for a proportionate share of attorneys’ fees, consultant fees, and litigation, arbitration, and other resolution costs incurred by Contractor/Assignee in pursuing the claim on behalf of Seller, based upon the amount claimed by Seller as compared to the total value of the claim pursued by the Contractor/Assignee.

k. All rights, duties, and obligations of Engineer to Contractor/Assignee and Seller under this Procurement Contract will cease.

l. Subject to the foregoing provisions, all references in the Procurement Contract to submitting items to Engineer, or to Engineer having tasks or obligations, will be read after such an assignment as requiring submittal to Contractor/Assignee, or as Contractor/Assignee having such tasks or obligations (which Contractor/Assignee may delegate when appropriate).

m. If the Procurement Contract includes a Buyer’s Contingency Allowance, upon assignment such allowance will be automatically reduced to the amount previously authorized by Buyer (Project Owner), and cease to be operational.

B. No other assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Procurement Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound. Specifically, but without limitation, Procurement Contract payments or other money that may become due, and Procurement Contract payments or other money that are due, may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by Laws and Regulations). Unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to such an assignment, such an assignment will not release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Procurement Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 6—PROCUREMENT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

6.01 List of Procurement Contract Documents

A. The Procurement Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Procurement Agreement.




2. General Conditions of the Procurement Contract.

3. Supplementary Conditions of the Procurement Contract.

4. Procurement Specifications as listed in the Procurement Specifications table of contents.

5. Procurement Drawings.

6. Addenda Numbers to inclusive.

7. Bonds:

a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney).

b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney).

8. Exhibits to this Procurement Agreement (enumerated as follows):

a. Exhibit, Assignment of Contract, Consent to Assignment, and Acceptance of Assignment

b. Exhibit, Surety’s Consent to Assignment

c. Exhibit A, Seller’s Bid, solely as to the prices set forth therein (pages 1 to 5, inclusive); and

9. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract and are not attached hereto:

a. Change Orders;

b. Change Directives; and

c. Field Orders.

B. The documents listed in Paragraph 6.01.A are attached to this Procurement Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Procurement Contract Documents other than those listed above.

D. The Procurement Contract Documents may only be amended or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 11.01 of the Procurement General Conditions.

ARTICLE 7—SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

7.01 Seller’s Representations

A. In order to induce Buyer to enter into this Procurement Agreement, Seller makes the following representations:

1. Seller has examined and carefully studied the Procurement Contract Documents.

2. If required by the Instructions to Bidders to visit the Point of Destination and the site where the Goods are to be installed or Special Services will be provided, or if, in Seller’s judgment, any observable local or site conditions may affect the delivery, cost, progress, or furnishing of the Goods and Special Services, then Seller has visited the Point of Destination and site where the Goods are to be installed or Special Services will be




provided (as applicable) and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the observable local and site conditions that may affect delivery, cost, progress, and furnishing of the Goods and Special Services.

3. Seller is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect the cost, progress, and performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract.

4. Seller has carefully studied, considered, and correlated the information known to Seller with respect to the effect of such information on the cost, progress, and performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract.

5. Seller has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Seller has discovered in the Procurement Contract Documents, and the written resolution (if any) thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Seller.

6. The Procurement Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract.

7. Seller’s entry into this Procurement Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Seller that without exception all prices in the Procurement Agreement are premised upon furnishing the Goods and Special Services as required by the Procurement Contract Documents.

7.02 Seller’s Certifications

A. Seller certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Procurement Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 7.02:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Procurement Contract execution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Procurement Contract to the detriment of Buyer, (b) to establish bid or contract prices at artificial non‐competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Buyer of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Buyer, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial, non‐competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Procurement Contract.

ARTICLE 8—CONFIDENTIALITY

8.01 Confidential Information

A. Confidential information is information in documents submitted by Seller that Seller clearly and prominently labels in writing to be a trade secret, proprietary, or confidential. Such




documents, if any, will be maintained in a manner that endeavors to avoid disclosing confidential information to third parties, to the extent allowed by Laws and Regulations.

B. Seller shall clearly and prominently mark confidential information with the word “CONFIDENTIAL” on each page or sheet or on the cover of bound documents. Place “CONFIDENTIAL” stamps or watermarks so that they do not obscure any of the required information on the document, either in the original or in a way that would obscure any of the required information in a photocopy of the document.

8.02 Disclosure of Confidential Information

A. If Buyer is requested to disclose confidential information, or becomes legally compelled (by oral questions, interrogatories, requests for information or documents, subpoena, civil or criminal investigative demand, public information requests, or other requests under Laws and Regulations) to disclose confidential information, or is required by a regulatory body, governing agency, or controlling authority to disclose confidential information, or make any other disclosure that is prohibited or otherwise constrained by the Procurement Contract, Buyer will provide Seller with prompt notice so Seller may seek an appropriate protective order or other remedy. Seller will be solely responsible for submitting to the regulatory body, governing agency, or controlling authority any arguments, briefs, memoranda, motions, authorities, or other information in opposition to disclosure.

B. Buyer’s obligations with respect to confidential information are nullified by the following exceptions:

1. Confidential information becomes a part of the public domain through publication or otherwise, through no fault of the Buyer;

2. Buyer can demonstrate through suitable documentation that the confidential information was already in the Buyer’s possession, and not previously marked as confidential, or was otherwise publicly available prior to the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract;

3. The confidential information is subsequently and independently disclosed to the Buyer by a third party who has a lawful right to disclose such information;

4. Buyer has a good faith belief that disclosure is required or justified; or

5. Buyer is required to disclose the confidential information by court order or by applicable Laws and Regulations.

8.03 Waiver of Immunity

A. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Procurement Contract, it is stipulated and agreed that by accepting confidential information, Buyer has not and does not waive its legal immunity (if any) from suit or liability.

ARTICLE 9—MUTUAL WAIVER

9.01 Mutual Waiver of Consequential Damages

A. Buyer and Seller waive against each other, and against the other’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors, any and all claims




for or entitlement to incidental, indirect, or consequential damages arising out of, resulting from, or related to the Procurement Contract. If Buyer (Project Owner) assigns this Procurement Contract to a construction contractor (Contractor/Assignee), then the terms of this Paragraph 9.01.A will be binding upon the Contractor/Assignee with respect to Seller and assignor. The terms of this mutual waiver do not apply to or limit any claim by either Buyer or Seller against the other based on any of the following: (a) contribution or indemnification, (b) liquidated damages, (c) costs, losses, or damages attributable to personal or bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of the tangible property of others, (d) intentional or reckless wrongful conduct, or (e) rights conferred by any bond provided by Seller under this Procurement Contract.




IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Buyer and Seller have signed this Procurement Agreement. Counterparts have been delivered to Buyer and Seller.

The Effective Date of the Procurement Contract is .

Buyer Seller

(typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization)

By: By: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)

Date: Date: (date signed) (date signed)

Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

(If Seller is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: Attest: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)


Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative: Designated Representative:

Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)


Address: Address:

Phone: Phone:

Email: Email: (If Buyer is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Buyer is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.)

Exhibit A—Assignment of Procurement Contract, Consent to Assignment, and Acceptance of Assignment. EJCDC® P‐520, Agreement between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contract.

Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Page 12 of 1


EXHIBIT A—ASSIGNMENT OF PROCUREMENT CONTRACT, CONSENT TO ASSIGNMENT, AND ACCEPTANCE OF ASSIGNMENT

This assignment will be effective on the effective date of the construction contract between Buyer (as “Owner”) and Contractor/Assignee (as “Contractor”).

The Procurement Contract between [insert name of original Buyer] (“Buyer”) and [insert name of Seller] (“Seller”) for furnishing Goods and Special Services entitled [insert name/designation of Procurement Contract] (Procurement Contract) is hereby assigned, transferred, and set over to Contractor/Assignee, as assignee, by Buyer, as assignor. Upon assignment the Contractor/Assignee shall have the duties, rights, and obligations of Buyer under the terms of the Procurement Contract, and will be responsible to Owner under the construction contract for the performance of obligations by Seller, which will become a Subcontractor or Supplier to Contractor/Assignee. Buyer, Seller, and Contractor/Assignee hereby acknowledge and agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of assignment set forth in Article 5 of the Agreement Between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contract.

Assignment Made by Buyer


By: Date: (individual’s signature) (date signed)

Name: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

If Buyer is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Buyer is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of Buyer‐Seller Agreement.

Assignment Acknowledged and Accepted by Seller




If Seller is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.

Assignment Accepted by Contractor/Assignee




If Contractor/Assignee is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.

Exhibit B—Surety’s Consent to Assignment. EJCDC® P‐520, Agreement between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contract.

Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Page 13 of 1


EXHIBIT B—SURETY’S CONSENT TO ASSIGNMENT

Surety hereby acknowledges, agrees, and consents that the Procurement Contract for furnishing Goods and Special Services entitled [Name of Procurement Contract] by and between [Name of Buyer] (“Buyer”) and [Name of Seller] (“Seller”) may be assigned, transferred, and set over to [Name of Contractor/Assignee] (“Contractor/Assignee”), in accordance with Article 5 and Exhibit A of the Agreement between Buyer and Seller for Procurement Contract.

Surety further agrees that, upon assignment of the Procurement Contract, the Contractor/Assignee shall have all the rights of the Buyer under the Procurement Performance Bond and Procurement Payment Bond.

Agreement to Assignment Acknowledged and Accepted by Surety




Attach Power of Attorney.

EJCDC® C‐550, Notice to Proceed. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 55 00 Notice to Proceed 2018.docx 00 55 00 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 55 00 ‐ NOTICE TO PROCEED

Buyer: Buyer’s Project No.:

Engineer: Engineer’s Project No.:

Seller: Seller’s Project No.:

Project:

Contract Name:

Effective Date of Contract:

Buyer hereby notifies Seller that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on .

On that date, Seller shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work will be done prior to such date.

In accordance with the Agreement:

The number of days from the commencement date of the Contract Times to submit Shop Drawings and Product Data is 42 days.

The number of days from Shop Drawing and Product Data approval to deliver the Goods is 154 days.

Before starting any Work, Seller must comply with the following:

Buyer:

By (signature):

Name (printed):

Title:

Date Issued:

Copy: Engineer

EJCDC® C‐550, Notice to Proceed. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 55 00 Notice to Proceed 2018.docx 00 55 00 ‐ 2


EJCDC® P‐610, Performance Bond for Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 61 00 Performance Bond for Procurement 2019.docx 00 61 00 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 61 00 ‐ PERFORMANCE BOND FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

Seller Surety

Name: Name:


Buyer Procurement Contract

Name: Description (name and location):

Mailing address (principal place of business):

Procurement Contract Price:

Effective Date of Procurement Contract:

Bond

Bond Amount:

Date of Bond: (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Procurement Contract)

Modifications to this Bond form:

☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 15

Surety and Seller, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Performance Bond, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

Seller as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Seller) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)

By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)


Title: Title:



Title: Title:

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Seller, Surety, Buyer, or other party is considered plural where applicable.




The Seller and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors, and assigns to the Buyer for the performance of the Procurement Contract, which is

incorporated herein by reference.

1. If the Seller performs the Procurement Contract, the Surety and the Seller shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 2.

2. If there is no Buyer Default under the Procurement Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond will arise after:

2.1. The Buyer first provides notice to the Seller and the Surety that the Buyer is considering declaring a Seller Default. Such notice may indicate whether the Buyer is requesting a conference among the Buyer, Seller, and Surety to discuss the Seller’s performance. If the Buyer does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Buyer’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Buyer shall attend. Unless the Buyer agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph will be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Buyer’s notice. If the Buyer, the Seller, and the Surety agree, the Seller shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Procurement Contract, but such an agreement does not waive the Buyer’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Seller Default;

2.2. The Buyer declares a Seller Default, terminates the Procurement Contract, and notifies the Surety; and

2.3. The Buyer has agreed to pay the Balance of the Procurement Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Procurement Contract to the Surety or to a seller selected to perform the Procurement Contract.

3. Failure on the part of the Buyer to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 2.1 does not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

4. When the Buyer has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 2, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

4.1. Arrange for the Seller, with the consent of the Buyer, to perform and complete the Procurement Contract;

4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Procurement Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

4.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified sellers acceptable to the Buyer for a contract for performance and completion of the Procurement Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Buyer and a seller selected with the Buyer’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Procurement Contract, and pay to the Buyer the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Procurement Contract Price incurred by the Buyer as a result of the Seller Default; or




4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new seller, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

4.4.1. After investigation, determine the amount for which Surety may be liable to the Buyer and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Buyer; or

4.4.2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Buyer, citing the reasons for denial.

5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven (7) days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Buyer to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Buyer shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Buyer. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 4.4, and the Buyer refuses the payment, or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice, the Buyer shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Buyer.

6. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Buyer will not be greater than those of the Seller under the Procurement Contract, and the responsibilities of the Buyer to the Surety will not be greater than those of the Buyer under the Procurement Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Buyer to pay the Balance of the Procurement Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

6.1. the responsibilities of the Seller for correction of defective or non‐conforming Goods and Special Services, and completion of the Procurement Contract;

6.2. additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Seller’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

6.3. liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Procurement Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non‐performance of the Seller.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 4.1, 4.3, or 4.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

8. The Surety shall not be liable to the Buyer or others for obligations of the Seller that are unrelated to the Procurement Contract, and the Balance of the Procurement Contract Price will not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action will accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Buyer or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

9. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Procurement Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

10. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction where the Point of Destination is located and must be instituted within two years after a declaration of Seller Default, or within two years after the Seller ceased working, or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.

11. Notice to the Surety, the Buyer, or the Seller must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

12. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Point of Destination, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal




requirement will be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

13. Definitions

13.1. Balance of the Procurement Contract Price—The total amount payable by the Buyer to the Seller under the Procurement Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Seller for any amounts received or to be received by the Buyer in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Seller is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Seller under the Procurement Contract.

13.2. Buyer Default—Failure of the Buyer, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Seller as required under the Procurement Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Procurement Contract.

13.3. Goods and Special Services—The full scope of materials, equipment, other items, and services to be furnished by Seller, as defined in the Procurement Contract.

13.4. Point of Destination—The location where delivery of the Goods shall be made, as stated in the Procurement Contract.

13.5. Procurement Contract—The contractual agreement between the Buyer and Seller identified on the cover page, including all Procurement Contract Documents and changes made to the Procurement Contract.

13.6. Seller Default—Failure of the Seller, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Procurement Contract.

13.7. Procurement Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the contractual agreement between the Buyer and Seller.

14. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: [Describe modification or enter “None”]

EJCDC® P‐615, Payment Bond for Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 61 50 Payment Bond for Procurement 2019.docx 00 61 50 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 61 50 ‐ PAYMENT BOND FOR PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

Seller Surety

Name: Name:


Buyer Procurement Contract

Name: Description (name and location):

Mailing address (principal place of business):

Procurement Contract Price:

Effective Date of Procurement Contract:

Bond

Bond Amount:

Date of Bond: (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Procurement Contract)

Modifications to this Bond form:

☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 17

Surety and Seller, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Payment Bond, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Seller as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Seller) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)

By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)


Title: Title:



Title: Title:

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Seller, Surety, Buyer, or other party is considered plural where applicable.




1. The Seller and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Buyer to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Procurement Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

2. If the Seller promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Buyer from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Procurement Contract, then the Surety and the Seller shall have no obligation under this Bond.

3. If there is no Buyer Default under the Procurement Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Buyer under this Bond will arise after the Buyer has promptly notified the Seller and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Buyer or the Buyer’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Procurement Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Seller and the Surety.

4. When the Buyer has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Buyer against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following:

5.1. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Seller

5.1.1. have furnished a written notice of non‐payment to the Seller, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

5.1.2. have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Seller have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

6. If a notice of non‐payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Buyer to the Seller, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non‐payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

7.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Buyer, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

7.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7.3. The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Seller may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.




8. The Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Buyer to the Seller under the Procurement Contract will be used for the performance of the Procurement Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any procurement performance bond. By the Seller furnishing and the Buyer accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Seller in the performance of the Procurement Contract are dedicated to satisfying obligations of the Seller and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Buyer’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the Goods and Special Services.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Buyer, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Seller that are unrelated to the Procurement Contract. The Buyer shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Procurement Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the Point of Destination is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Procurement Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Buyer, or the Seller must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement where the Point of Destination is located, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Seller and Buyer shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1. Buyer Default—Failure of the Buyer, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Seller as required under the Procurement Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Procurement Contract.

16.2. Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

16.2.1. The name of the Claimant;

16.2.2. The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;




16.2.3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Procurement Contract;

16.2.4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;

16.2.5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Procurement Contract;

16.2.6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

16.2.7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

16.2.8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.3. Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Seller or with a subcontractor of the Seller to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Procurement Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Point of Destination is located or where the Goods and Special Services are to be installed or furnished. The intent of this Bond is to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Procurement Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Seller and the Seller’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.

16.4. Goods and Special Services—The full scope of materials, equipment, other items, and services to be furnished by Seller, as defined in the Procurement Contract.

16.5. Point of Destination—The location where delivery of the Goods shall be made, as stated in the Procurement Contract.

16.6. Procurement Contract—The contractual agreement between the Buyer and Seller identified on the cover page, including all Procurement Contract Documents and all changes made to the Procurement Contract.

16.7. Procurement Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the contractual agreement between the Buyer and Seller.

17. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: [Describe modification or enter “None”]

EJCDC® P‐625, Buyer’s Acknowledgment of Receipt of Goods. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 62 50 Buyer Acknowledgment of Receipt of Goods 2019.docx 00 62 50 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 62 50 ‐ BUYER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENT RECEIPT OF GOODS

Buyer: Buyer’s Project No.: Engineer: Engineer’s Project No.: Seller: Seller’s Project No.: Project: Contract Name:

This Buyer’s Acknowledgment of Receipt of Goods (Acknowledgment) applies to:

☐ All Goods ☐ The following specified portions of the Goods:

Date of delivery of the Goods to the Point of Destination:

Date of Buyer’s visual inspection of the Goods:

Date of this Acknowledgment:

Buyer acknowledges:

1. The Goods to which this notice applies have been delivered to the Point of Destination.

2. Buyer has visually inspected such Goods pursuant to Paragraph 9.02.B.1 of the General Conditions of the Procurement Contract.

3. Based on the visual inspection, such Goods appear to comply with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents as to quantities and condition, subject to any exceptions and limitations in this Acknowledgment.

4. Such Goods are deemed received for purposes of Paragraph 9.02.B.2 of the General Conditions of the Procurement Contract.

5. Seller may submit its Application for Payment for the delivered Goods, subject to the terms of the Procurement Agreement.

Exceptions (if any) to this Acknowledgment: ☐ None ☐ As follows:

The responsibilities between Buyer and Seller for securing and storing the Goods, maintaining the Goods during storage, and for furnishing the Special Services, shall be as provided in the Procurement Contract.

The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Acknowledgement:

This Acknowledgment does not constitute an acceptance of any Goods not in conformance with the Procurement Contract Documents, nor is it a release of Seller's obligation to furnish all Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract.

Buyer Engineer, on behalf of Buyer

By (signature):

Name (Printed):

Title:

Date:

EJCDC® P‐626, Buyer’s Notice Regarding Conformity of Goods and Special Services. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV‐00 62 60 Buyer Notice Regarding Conformity of Goods 2019.docx 00 62 60 ‐ 1

SECTION 00 62 60 ‐ BUYER’S NOTICE REGARDING CONFORMITY OF GOODS AND SPECIAL SERVICES

Buyer: Buyer’s Project No.: Engineer: Engineer’s Project No.: Seller: Seller’s Project No.: Project: Contract Name: Notice Date: Effective Date of the Procurement Contract:

Buyer hereby gives notice to Seller that, to the best of Buyer’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Goods and Special Services:

☐ Are in conformance with the Procurement Contract Documents. Upon Seller’s submittal of its final Application for Payment in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents, Seller will be eligible for final payment, except as expressly indicated in the Procurement Contract.

☐ Are nonconforming with the Procurement Contract Documents for the following reason(s):

1.

Seller’s Special Services were completed on:

Buyer has consulted with and received Engineer’s recommendation on conformity of the Goods and Special Services.

This Buyer’s Notice Regarding Conformity of Goods and Special Services (Notice) is made expressly subject to the following terms and conditions to which all who receive and rely on said Notice agree:

1. This Notice is expressly subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the Procurement Contract.

2. This Notice is not a guarantee or warranty of Seller’s performance under the Procurement Contract, an acceptance of Goods and Special Services that are not in accordance with the related Procurement Contract Documents, including but not limited to nonconforming Goods and Special Services discovered after final inspection, nor an assumption of responsibility for any failure of Seller to furnish the Goods and Special Services thereunder in accordance with the Procurement Contract, or to otherwise comply with the Procurement Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein.

3. This Notice does not relieve Seller of any surviving obligations under the Procurement Contract and is subject to Buyer’s reservations of rights with respect to completion and final payment.

Buyer

By (signature): Name (Printed):

Date: Title:

EJCDC® P‐700, Standard General Conditions of the Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page i of 3

STV‐00 70 00 General Conditions of the Procurement Contract 2019.docx 00 70 00 ‐ i

SECTION 00 70 00 ‐ STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1— Definitions and Terminology ....................................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 4

Article 2— Preliminary Matters .................................................................................................................... 5

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................... 5

2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 6

2.03 Electronic Transmittals ................................................................................................................. 6

2.04 Preliminary Schedules ................................................................................................................... 6

2.05 Preliminary Conference ................................................................................................................ 6

2.06 Safety ............................................................................................................................................ 7

Article 3— Procurement Contract Documents ............................................................................................. 7

3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 7

3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 7

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ........................................................................................ 8

3.04 Requirements of the Procurement Drawings and Procurement Specifications ........................... 8

3.05 Reuse of Documents ..................................................................................................................... 9

Article 4— Commencement and Schedule ................................................................................................... 9

4.01 Commencement of Procurement Contract Times ........................................................................ 9

4.02 Continuing Performance ............................................................................................................... 9

4.03 Adjustments to Progress Schedule ............................................................................................. 10

4.04 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 10

Article 5— Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 11

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 11

5.02 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 12

5.03 Surety or Insurance Companies .................................................................................................. 12

Article 6— Licenses and Fees ...................................................................................................................... 13

6.01 Intellectual Property and License Fees ....................................................................................... 13


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page ii of 3

STV‐00 70 00 General Conditions of the Procurement Contract 2019.docx 00 70 00 ‐ ii

6.02 Seller’s Infringement ................................................................................................................... 13

6.03 Buyer’s Infringement .................................................................................................................. 14

Article 7— Seller’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................. 14

7.01 Performance of Obligations ........................................................................................................ 14

7.02 Labor, Materials and Equipment ................................................................................................ 14

7.03 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 15

7.04 “Or Equals” .................................................................................................................................. 15

7.05 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 16

7.06 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 16

7.07 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 19

7.08 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 19

Article 8— Shipping and Delivery ............................................................................................................... 19

8.01 Shipping ....................................................................................................................................... 19

8.02 Delivery ....................................................................................................................................... 19

8.03 Risk of Loss .................................................................................................................................. 20

Article 9— Buyer’s Rights ............................................................................................................................ 20

9.01 Seller’s Warranties and Guarantees ........................................................................................... 20

9.02 Inspections and Testing .............................................................................................................. 21

9.03 Non‐Conforming Goods and Special Services ............................................................................. 22

9.04 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 24

Article 10— Engineer’s Status ..................................................................................................................... 24

10.01 Engineer’s Role Defined .......................................................................................................... 24

10.02 Duties and Responsibilities; Authority; Limitations ................................................................ 24

Article 11— Changes ................................................................................................................................... 25

11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Procurement Contract .................................................... 25

11.02 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................ 25

11.03 Change Directives ................................................................................................................... 26

11.04 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................. 26

11.05 Buyer‐Authorized Changes in the Goods and Special Services ............................................... 26

11.06 Buyer’s Contingency Allowance .............................................................................................. 26

11.07 Unauthorized Changes in the Goods and Special Services ..................................................... 27

11.08 Change of Procurement Contract Price .................................................................................. 27


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TOC Page iii of 3

STV‐00 70 00 General Conditions of the Procurement Contract 2019.docx 00 70 00 ‐ iii

11.09 Change of Procurement Contract Times ................................................................................. 27

11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 27

Article 12— Claims, Disputes, and Dispute Resolution .............................................................................. 27

12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 27

12.02 Dispute Resolution Method .................................................................................................... 29

Article 13— Payment .................................................................................................................................. 29

13.01 Applications for Progress Payments ....................................................................................... 29

13.02 Review of Applications for Progress Payments....................................................................... 30

13.03 Basis and Amount of Progress Payments ............................................................................... 31

13.04 Suspension of or Reduction in Payment ................................................................................. 31

13.05 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 32

13.06 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 33

Article 14— Cancellation, Suspension, and Termination ........................................................................... 33

14.01 Cancellation............................................................................................................................. 33

14.02 Suspension of Performance by Buyer ..................................................................................... 33

14.03 Suspension of Performance by Seller ..................................................................................... 34

14.04 Breach and Termination.......................................................................................................... 34

Article 15— Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................... 35

15.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 35

15.02 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 35

15.03 Computation of Time .............................................................................................................. 35

15.04 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 35

15.05 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 35

15.06 Entire Agreement .................................................................................................................... 35

15.07 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 36

15.08 Headings .................................................................................................................................. 36

15.09 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 36



STV‐00 70 00 General Conditions of the Procurement Contract 2019.docx 00 70 00 ‐ 1

ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Whenever used in the Procurement Bidding Requirements or Procurement Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to the singular or plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Procurement Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Procurement Contract Documents.

2. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Seller, in a form acceptable to Buyer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Procurement Contract Documents.

3. Bid—An offer or proposal of a prospective Seller submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Goods and Special Services to be provided.

4. Bidder—An individual or entity that, as a prospective Seller, submits a Bid to Buyer.

5. Buyer—The individual or entity purchasing the Goods and Special Services.

6. Change Directive—A written directive from Buyer to Seller issued on or after the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Goods and Special Services.

7. Change Order—A document which is signed by Seller and Buyer and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision to the Procurement Contract Documents or an adjustment in the Procurement Contract Price or the Procurement Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract. Change Orders may be the result of mutual agreement by Buyer and Seller, or of resolution of a Claim.

8. Claim—A demand or assertion by Buyer or Seller seeking an adjustment of Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Procurement Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

9. Contractor/Assignee—A construction contractor with which Project Owner enters into a construction contract, and to which Project Owner, as initial Buyer, assigns this Procurement Contract.

10. Effective Date of the Procurement Contract—The date indicated in the Procurement Agreement on which the Procurement Contract becomes effective.

11. Electronic Document—Any Project‐related correspondence, attachments to correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format.




12. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (e‐mail), upload/download from a secure Project website, or other communications methods that allow: the transmission or communication of Electronic Documents; the documentation of transmissions, including sending and receipt; printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the recipient; the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and recipient; and the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted by this Procurement Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of Electronic Documents.

13. Engineer—The individual or entity designated as such in the Procurement Agreement.

14. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Goods or Special Services, but which does not involve a change in the Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times.

15. Goods—The tangible and movable personal property that is described in the Procurement Contract Documents, regardless of whether the property is to be later attached to realty.

16. Goods and Special Services—The full scope of materials, equipment, other items, and services to be furnished by Seller, including Goods, as defined herein, and Special Services, if any, as defined herein. This term refers to both the Goods and the Special Services, or to either the Goods or the Special Services, and to any portion of the Goods or the Special Services, as the context requires.

17. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.

18. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Procurement Contract that Seller must attain by the date or within the number of days indicated, including but not limited to the delivery of the Goods and the furnishing of Special Services.

19. Notice of Award—The written notice, by Buyer to a Bidder, of Buyer’s acceptance of the Bid.

20. Point of Destination—The specific address of the location where delivery of the Goods will be made, as stated in the Procurement Agreement.

21. Procurement Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Buyer and Seller, that sets forth the Procurement Contract Price and Procurement Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Procurement Contract Documents.

22. Procurement Bidding Documents—The Procurement Bidding Requirements and the proposed Procurement Contract Documents (including all Addenda).

23. Procurement Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and Bid Form with any supplements.




24. Procurement Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between Buyer and Seller concerning the Goods and Special Services.

25. Procurement Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Procurement Agreement, and which together comprise the Procurement Contract. Shop Drawings and other Seller submittals are not Procurement Contract Documents, even if accepted, reviewed, or approved by Engineer or Buyer.

26. Procurement Contract Price—The money that Buyer has agreed to pay Seller for furnishing the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents.

27. Procurement Contract Times—The times stated in the Procurement Agreement by which the Goods must be delivered, Special Services must be furnished, and other Milestones must be attained.

28. Procurement Drawings—That part of the Procurement Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Goods and Special Services to be furnished by Seller. Shop Drawings and other Seller submittals are not Procurement Drawings as so defined.

29. Procurement Specifications—That part of the Procurement Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.

30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Project Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start‐up, and of which the Goods and Special Services are a part.

31. Project Owner—The entity that has retained (or will retain) engineers, contractors, and others for the planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start‐up of facilities and improvements. As of the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract, the Project Owner is the Buyer.

32. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Goods and Special Services and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Goods and Special Services will be judged.

33. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Seller, of required Submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the Submittals.

34. Seller—The individual or entity furnishing the Goods and Special Services.

35. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Seller and submitted by Seller to illustrate some portion of the Goods and Special Services. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Procurement Drawings and are not Procurement Contract Documents.

36. Special Services—Services to be performed by Seller (or its agents or subcontractors) in association with the Goods to be furnished by Seller, as required by the Procurement Contract Documents.




37. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Seller, which the Procurement Contract Documents require Seller to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results of tests and evaluations, source quality‐control testing and inspections, and field or site quality‐control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; suppliers’ instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and maintenance data; record documents; and other such documents required by the Procurement Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Procurement Contract Documents. Change proposals, Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation or clarification are not Submittals.

38. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Buyer accepts, and to which Buyer makes an award of the Procurement Contract.

39. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Procurement Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions.

40. Unit Price Goods and Special Services—Goods and Special Services to be paid for on the basis of unit prices (if any).

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B and 1.02.C are not defined, but have the indicated meanings when used in the Bidding Requirements or Procurement Contract Documents.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives

1. The Procurement Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Goods and Special Services. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be commercially reasonable and will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Goods and Special Services for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Procurement Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, as shown or indicated in the Procurement Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective will not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing of Goods or Special Services or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to any other provision of the Procurement Contract Documents.

2. The word “non‐conforming” when modifying the words “Goods and Special Services,” “Goods,” or “Special Services,” refers to Goods and Special Services that are unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that they:




a. do not conform to or comply with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents;

b. do not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Procurement Contract Documents; or

c. in the case of Special Services, have not been completed.

3. The word “receipt” when referring to the Goods, means the physical taking and possession by the Buyer under the conditions specified in Paragraph 9.02.B.2.

4. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

5. The word "furnish," when used in connection with the Goods and Special Services means to supply and deliver said Goods to the Point of Destination (or some other specified location) and to perform said Special Services fully, all in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents.

C. Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times: References to a change in “Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times” or “Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to (1) Procurement Contract Price, (2) Procurement Contract Times, or (3) both Procurement Contract Price and Procurement Contract Times, as warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed.

D. Unless stated otherwise in the Procurement Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well‐known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Procurement Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. When Seller delivers the executed counterparts of the Procurement Agreement to Buyer, the Seller also shall deliver to Buyer the performance bond and payment bond (if the Procurement Contract requires Seller to furnish such bonds).

B. Evidence of Seller’s Insurance: When Seller delivers the signed counterparts of the Procurement Agreement to Buyer, the Seller also shall deliver to Buyer, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Procurement Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Seller in accordance with Article 5. Evidence of insurance to be obtained at a later date, such as insurance relating to transit or storage of the Goods, will be provided to Buyer at the time of such insurance is obtained.

C. Evidence of Buyer’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Procurement Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Buyer shall promptly deliver to Seller, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Procurement Contract), certificates and other evidence of insurance (if any) required to be provided by Buyer.




2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Buyer shall furnish to Seller four printed copies of the Procurement Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Procurement Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

2.03 Electronic Transmittals

A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Procurement Contract, the Buyer, Seller, and Engineer may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means.

B. If the Procurement Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Buyer, Seller, and Engineer shall jointly develop such protocols.

C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long‐term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents.

2.04 Preliminary Schedules

A. Within 15 days after the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract, Seller shall submit to Buyer and Engineer for timely review:

1. a progress schedule of activities, consistent with the Procurement Contract Times, including at a minimum, Shop Drawing and Sample submittals, tests, and deliveries as required by the Procurement Contract Documents.

a. The progress schedule will be acceptable to Buyer and Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Submittals, tests, and deliveries to completion within the specified Milestones of the Procurement Contract Times.

b. Such acceptance will not impose on Buyer or Engineer responsibility for the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of Seller’s performance of its obligations under the Procurement Contract, nor interfere with or relieve Seller from Seller’s full responsibility therefor.

c. Such acceptance will not be deemed as an acknowledgment of the reasonableness and attainability of the schedule.

2. a preliminary schedule of Submittals.

B. No progress payment will be made to Seller until an acceptable progress schedule and acceptable schedule of Submittals are submitted to Buyer and Engineer (and other conditions applicable to progress payments are met).

2.05 Preliminary Conference

A. Within 20 days after the Procurement Contract Times start to run, a conference attended by Seller, Buyer, Engineer and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Goods and Special Services and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.04.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records.




2.06 Safety

A. Buyer and Seller shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, and to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss.

B. When Seller's personnel, or the personnel of any subcontractor to Seller, are present at the Point of Destination or any work area or site controlled by Buyer, the Seller shall be responsible for the compliance by such personnel with any applicable requirements of Buyer's safety programs that are made known to Seller.

C. If Buyer or its representatives visit the Seller’s manufacturing or storage facilities, for testing, inspection, or other purposes, Seller shall inform Buyer in advance of any safety preparations, standards, or programs with which Buyer and its representatives must comply.


3.01 Intent

A. The Procurement Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all.

B. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Procurement Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce or furnish the indicated Goods and Special Services will be provided, whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Buyer.

C. Unless otherwise stated in the Procurement Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Procurement Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will govern.

D. The Procurement Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral.

E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Procurement Contract Documents, as provided in Paragraph 3.04.

F. Any provision or part of the Procurement Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be valid and binding upon Buyer and Seller.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws and Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws and Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Procurement Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Procurement Contract Documents.

B. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and no instruction of a supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Buyer,




Seller, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Procurement Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction will be effective to assign to Buyer or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of Seller’s obligations, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Procurement Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies

1. Seller’s Review of Procurement Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of Seller’s obligations, Seller discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Procurement Contract Documents, or between the Procurement Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any supplier to Seller, then Seller shall promptly report it to Engineer (or if the Procurement Contract is assigned, then directly to Contractor/Assignee) in writing. Seller shall not proceed with the Goods and Special Services affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer (or if the Procurement Contract is assigned, then by Contractor/Assignee) or by an amendment or supplement to the Procurement Contract Documents issued pursuant to Article 11.

2. Seller shall not be liable to Buyer or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Procurement Contract Documents unless Seller had actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies: Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Procurement Contract Documents, the provisions of the Procurement Contract Documents will take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Procurement Contract Documents and:

1. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Procurement Contract Documents); or

2. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Procurement Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Requirements of the Procurement Drawings and Procurement Specifications

A. During the performance of Seller’s obligations and until final payment, Seller and Buyer shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Procurement Drawings and Procurement Specifications (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Goods and Special Services, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Procurement Drawings and Procurement Specifications, and judge of the acceptability of the Goods and Special Services thereunder.

1. After assignment (if any) Seller shall submit such matters directly to Contractor/Assignee for response or administration, and the Procurement Contract provisions in Paragraphs 3.04.B and C will not apply.




B. Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, and if necessary, initiate an amendment or supplement to the Procurement Drawings or Procurement Specifications. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be consistent with the overall intent of the Procurement Contract Documents, and will be final and binding on Seller and Buyer. If either Buyer or Seller believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times, either may make a Claim for such adjustment as provided in Article 12.

C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Procurement Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Goods and Services, (2) the design (as set forth in the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Buyer and Seller that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation.

3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Seller and its subcontractors and suppliers shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof, on extensions of the Project or any other project, without written consent of Buyer and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or

2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Procurement Contract Documents, reuse any such Procurement Contract Documents for any purpose without Buyer’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Procurement Contract Documents.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Procurement Contract. Nothing herein precludes Seller from retaining copies of the Procurement Contract Documents for record purposes.

ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND SCHEDULE

4.01 Commencement of Procurement Contract Times

A. The Procurement Contract Times will commence to run on the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract.

4.02 Continuing Performance

A. Seller shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.04.A., as duly adjusted, and the Goods will be delivered and the Special Services furnished within the Procurement Contract Times.

B. Seller shall carry on furnishing of the Goods and Special Services and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Buyer. No furnishing of Goods and Special




Services will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as expressly permitted herein, or as Buyer and Seller may otherwise agree in writing.

4.03 Adjustments to Progress Schedule

A. The progress schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.04 may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Seller shall submit to Buyer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.04) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Procurement Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any applicable provisions of the Procurement Specifications.

2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Procurement Contract Times must be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. Adjustments in Procurement Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order.

4.04 Delays

A. If Buyer, Engineer, or anyone for whom Buyer is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with Seller’s performance or progress, then Seller shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times.

B. Seller shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Seller or anyone for whom Seller is responsible.

C. If Seller’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Buyer, Seller, and those for which they are responsible, then Seller shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Procurement Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Seller’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Procurement Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:

1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes;

2. abnormal weather conditions;

3. inspection delays by governmental authorities, and custom delays;

4. international shipping delays;

5. acts or failures to act of third‐party entities; and

6. acts of war or terrorism.

D. Adjustments of Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price—General Provisions: Seller’s entitlement to an adjustment of Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price is limited as follows:

1. Seller’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Procurement Contract Times is conditioned on the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical




path to completion of Seller’s obligations, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference.

2. Seller shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Procurement Contract Price for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Seller. Such a concurrent delay by Seller does not preclude an adjustment of Procurement Contract Times to which Seller is otherwise entitled.

3. Adjustments of Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price are subject to the provisions of Articles 11 and 12.

E. Each Seller request seeking a delay‐related increase in Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following: (1) the circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment; (2) the date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect Seller’s progress; (3) the date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect Seller’s progress; (4) the number of days’ increase in Procurement Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and (5) the impact on Procurement Contract Price. Seller shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Buyer or Engineer may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion.


5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Seller shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Procurement Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Seller’s obligations under the Procurement Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 9.04, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other provisions of the Procurement Contract.

B. Seller shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other provisions of the Procurement Contract.

C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by Buyer prior to execution of the Procurement Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney‐in‐fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney‐in‐fact signed the accompanying bond.




D. Seller shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the required amounts.

E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Seller is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Seller shall promptly notify Buyer and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements of this Procurement Contract.

F. If Seller has failed to obtain a required bond, Buyer may exercise Buyer’s termination rights under Article 14.

G. Upon request to Buyer from any subcontractor, supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of Seller’s obligations, Buyer shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity.

H. Upon request to Seller from any subcontractor, supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of Seller’s obligations, Seller shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity.

5.02 Insurance

A. Seller shall provide insurance of the types and coverages and in the amounts stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions.

B. Failure of Buyer to demand certificates of insurance or other evidence of Seller's full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Buyer to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided will not be construed as a waiver of Seller’s obligation to maintain such insurance.

C. Upon assignment of this Procurement Contract, Seller shall name the Contractor/Assignee as an additional insured and comply with the written request of Contractor/Assignee to provide evidence of insurance.

D. Buyer does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Procurement Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Seller.

E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on Seller’s liability under the indemnities and other rights granted to Buyer in the Procurement Contract.

5.03 Surety or Insurance Companies

A. All bonds and insurance required by the Procurement Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Buyer or Seller shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies must also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.




ARTICLE 6—LICENSES AND FEES

6.01 Intellectual Property and License Fees

A. Except to the extent stated elsewhere in the Procurement Contract Documents, Seller is not transferring any patent rights, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights for the Goods delivered.

B. To the extent Seller is manufacturing to Buyer’s design, Buyer retains all patent rights, copyrights, and other intellectual property rights in such design.

C. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Procurement Contract Documents for incorporation in the Goods or for the performance of Special Services, and if, to the actual knowledge of Buyer or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others, then the existence of such rights and payment obligations will be disclosed to Seller in the Procurement Contract Documents.

D. Seller shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use or the furnishing of the Goods, unless specified otherwise by the Procurement Contract Documents.

6.02 Seller’s Infringement

A. Subject to Paragraph 6.01, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Seller shall indemnify and hold harmless Buyer, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, damages, and judgments (including but not limited to all reasonable fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right by any of the Goods as delivered or Special Services as performed.

B. Buyer will promptly notify Seller in writing of any claim, suit, or threat of suit by a third party for any infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right with respect to the Goods as delivered or Special Services as performed.

C. Seller shall promptly defend or settle the claim or suit. Seller shall have control over such claim or suit, bear all expenses, and satisfy any adverse judgment.

1. If Seller fails to defend such suit or claim after written notice by Buyer, Seller will be bound, in any subsequent suit or claim against Seller by Buyer, by any factual determination in the prior suit or claim.

2. If Buyer fails to provide Seller the opportunity to defend such suit or claim, Buyer shall be barred from any remedy against Seller for such suit or claim.

D. If a determination is made that Seller has infringed upon the intellectual property rights of another, Seller may, at Seller’s own expense, obtain the necessary licenses for Buyer’s benefit, or replace the Goods and provide related design and construction, consistent with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents, to avoid the infringement.




6.03 Buyer’s Infringement

A. Subject to Paragraph 6.01, and to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Buyer shall be responsible to Seller for any infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right caused by Seller’s compliance with the Procurement Drawings or Procurement Specifications, and will reimburse Seller for any license fee or royalties paid by Seller to others if such payment resulted from any invention, design, process, product, or device specified to be furnished or performed in the Procurement Drawings or Procurement Specifications, but not identified as being subject to payment of such license fee or royalty.

B. Seller will promptly notify Buyer in writing of any claim, suit, or threat of suit by a third party for intellectual property infringement arising from Seller’s compliance with the Procurement Drawings or Procurement Specifications.

C. Buyer shall defend or settle the claim or suit. Buyer shall have control over such claim or suit, bear all expenses, and satisfy any adverse judgment.

1. If Buyer fails to defend such suit or claim after written notice by Seller, Buyer will be bound, in any subsequent suit or claim against Buyer by Seller, by any factual determination in the prior suit or claim.

2. If Seller fails to provide Buyer the opportunity to defend such suit or claim, Seller shall be barred from any remedy against Buyer for such suit or claim.

ARTICLE 7—SELLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.01 Performance of Obligations

A. Seller shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures necessary to perform its obligations in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents.

B. Seller shall supervise, inspect, and direct the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform its obligations in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents.

C. Seller shall coordinate the provision of Special Services to avoid or limit interference or disruption of other activities at the location where the Special Services are to occur, including but not limited to ongoing facility operations and construction activities.

7.02 Labor, Materials and Equipment

A. Seller shall provide competent, qualified and trained personnel in all aspects of its performance of the Procurement Contract.

B. All Goods, and all equipment and material incorporated into the Goods, must be as specified, and unless specified otherwise in the Procurement Contract Documents, must be:

1. new, and of good quality;

2. protected, assembled, connected, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the original manufacturer’s instructions; and




3. shop‐assembled to the greatest extent practicable.

7.03 Laws and Regulations

A. Seller shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of its obligations in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents. Except where otherwise expressly required by such Laws and Regulations, neither Buyer nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Seller’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Seller furnishes Goods and Special Services knowing or having reason to know that such furnishing is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Seller shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such performance. It will not be Seller’s responsibility to make certain that the Procurement Specifications and Procurement Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this provision will not relieve Seller of Seller’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract if there were no Bids) that have a direct effect on the cost or time of Seller’s performance will be the subject of an adjustment in Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times. If Buyer and Seller are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Article 12.

7.04 “Or Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment to be incorporated into the Goods is specified or described in the Procurement Contract Documents by using the names of one or more proprietary items or specific suppliers or manufacturers, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other suppliers or manufacturers may be submitted to Buyer for Engineer’s review.

1. If in Engineer’s sole discretion, such an item of material or equipment proposed by Seller is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or equal” item.

2. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment may be considered functionally equal to an item so named only if in the exercise of reasonable judgment, Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) it has an acceptable record of performance and availability of responsive service; and (4) Seller certifies that if approved: a) there will be no increase in any cost, including capital, installation or operating costs, to Buyer; and b) the proposed item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Procurement Contract Documents.




B. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or Submittal made pursuant to Paragraph 7.04.A. Engineer will be the sole judge of whether to accept or reject such a proposal or Submittal. No “or equal” will be ordered, manufactured or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing. Engineer will advise Buyer and Seller in writing of any negative determination. Notwithstanding Engineer’s approval of an “or‐equal” item, Seller shall remain obligated to comply with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents.

C. Special Guarantee: Buyer may require Seller to furnish at Seller’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any such proposed “or‐equal.”

D. Data: Seller shall provide all data in support of any such proposed “or equal” at Seller’s expense.

7.05 Taxes

A. Seller shall pay all taxes and duties arising out of the sale of the Goods and the performance of Special Services. All taxes and duties are included in the Procurement Contract Price, except as noted in the Supplementary Conditions.

7.06 Submittals

A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements

1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Seller shall:

a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents;

b. determine and verify:

1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal; and

2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of Seller’s obligations.

c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal.

2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that Seller has satisfied its obligations under the Procurement Contract Documents with respect to Seller’s review of that Submittal, and that Seller approves the Submittal.

3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Seller shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents. This notice will be set forth in a written communication separate from the Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on the Shop Drawing itself.




B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Seller shall label and submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals.

1. Shop Drawings

a. Seller shall submit the number of copies required in the Procurement Specifications.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Seller proposes to provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.06.C.

2. Samples

a. Seller shall submit the number of Samples required in the Procurement Specifications.

b. Seller shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.06.C.

3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Procurement Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related work performed by Seller prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent Submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Seller.

C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Goods, comply with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Procurement Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, manufacturing, fabrication, installation, or shipping, or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.

3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Seller from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents unless Seller has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.06.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Procurement




Contract Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Procurement Contract modification.

5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Seller from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.06.A and B.

6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.

7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will result in such item becoming a Procurement Contract Document.

8. Seller shall furnish Goods that comply with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.06.C.4.

D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples

1. Seller shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Seller shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals.

2. Seller shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample Submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Seller shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Buyer for such time. Buyer may impose a set‐off against payments due Seller to secure reimbursement for such charges.

3. If Seller requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample, Seller shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Buyer for its review time, and Buyer may impose a set‐off against payments due Seller to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Seller.

E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings and Samples

1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings and Samples:

a. Seller shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Procurement Contract Documents.

b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established in the schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted.

c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents as to general form and content of the Submittal.




d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Seller shall confer with Engineer regarding the reason for the non‐acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document.

2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.04 and 2.05.

7.07 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Seller shall indemnify and hold harmless Buyer, Engineer, Project Owner, and any assignee of Buyer, including Contractor/Assignee, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of Seller's obligations under the Procurement Contract, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Goods themselves), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Seller, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by Seller or anyone for whose acts Seller may be liable.

B. In any and all claims against Buyer, Engineer, Project Owner, or any assignee of Buyer, including Contractor/Assignee, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Seller, any subcontractor, any supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to furnish any of the Goods and Special Services, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.07.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Seller or any such subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

7.08 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers

A. Seller may retain subcontractors and suppliers for the performance of parts of the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services. The Seller’s retention of a subcontractor or supplier will not relieve Seller’s obligation to Buyer to perform and complete the furnishing the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 8—SHIPPING AND DELIVERY

8.01 Shipping

A. Seller shall select the carrier and bear all costs of packaging, transportation, insurance, special handling, and all other costs associated with shipment and delivery.

8.02 Delivery

A. Seller shall deliver the Goods free on board (FOB) to the Point of Destination, freight prepaid, in accordance with the Procurement Contract Times set forth in the Procurement Agreement, or other date agreed to by Buyer and Seller.




B. At least 10 days before shipment, Seller shall provide written notice to Buyer of the manner of shipment and the anticipated delivery date. The notice must also include any instructions concerning special equipment or services required at the Point of Destination to unload and care for the Goods. Seller shall also require the carrier to give Buyer at least 24 hours’ notice by telephone prior to the anticipated time of delivery.

C. Buyer will be responsible and bear all costs for unloading the Goods from carrier.

D. Buyer will assure that adequate facilities are available to receive delivery of the Goods at the time established for delivery, or on another date agreed to by Buyer and Seller.

E. No partial deliveries will be allowed, unless permitted or required by the Procurement Contract Documents or agreed to in writing by Buyer.

F. Provisions governing inspection on delivery are set forth in Paragraph 9.02.

8.03 Risk of Loss

A. Risk of loss and insurable interests transfer from Seller to Buyer upon Buyer’s receipt of the Goods.

B. Notwithstanding the provisions of Paragraph 8.03.A, if Buyer rejects the Goods as non‐conforming, the risk of loss on such Goods will remain with Seller until Seller corrects the non‐conformity or Buyer accepts the Goods. If rejected Goods remain at the Point of Destination pending modification and acceptance, then Seller shall be responsible for arranging adequate protection and maintenance of the Goods at Seller's expense.

ARTICLE 9—BUYER’S RIGHTS

9.01 Seller’s Warranties and Guarantees

A. Seller warrants and guarantees to Buyer that the title to the Goods conveyed will be proper, its transfer rightful, and free from any security interest, lien, or other encumbrance. Seller shall defend, indemnify, and hold Buyer harmless against any liens, claims, or demands contesting or affecting title of the Goods conveyed.

B. Seller warrants and guarantees to Buyer that all Goods and Special Services will conform with the Procurement Contract Documents, and with the standards established by any Samples approved by Engineer. Engineer shall be entitled to rely on Seller’s warranty and guarantee. If the Procurement Contract Documents do not otherwise specify the characteristics or the quality of the Goods, the Goods must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 7.02.B.

C. Seller’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, improper modification, improper maintenance, or improper operation by persons other than Seller;

2. excessive corrosion or chemical attack, unless corrosive or chemically‐damaging conditions were disclosed by Buyer in the Procurement Contract Documents and the Procurement Contract Documents required the Goods to withstand such conditions;

3. use in a manner contrary to Seller's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance; or




4. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

D. Seller's obligation to furnish the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents will be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Goods and Special Services that are non‐conforming, or a release of Seller’s obligation to furnish the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents:

1. observations by Buyer, Engineer, or Project Owner;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Buyer of any progress or final payment;

3. use of the Goods by Buyer or Project Owner;

4. any acceptance by Buyer, Engineer, or Project Owner, or any failure to do so;

5. the end of the correction period established in Paragraph 9.04;

6. the issuance of a notice of acceptance;

7. any inspection, test or approval by others; or

8. any correction of non‐conforming Goods and Special Services by Buyer or Project Owner.

E. Buyer shall promptly notify Seller of any breach of Seller’s warranties or guarantees.

9.02 Inspections and Testing

A. General Provisions

1. The Procurement Contract Documents specify required inspections and tests. Buyer shall have the right to perform, or cause to be performed, reasonable inspections and require reasonable tests of the Goods at Seller’s facility, and at the Point of Destination. Seller shall allow Buyer a reasonable time to perform such inspections or tests.

2. Seller shall reimburse Buyer for all expenses, except for travel, lodging, and subsistence expenses of Buyer’s and Engineer's representatives, for inspections and tests specified in the Procurement Contract Documents. If as the result of any such specified testing the Goods are determined to be non‐conforming, then Seller shall also bear the travel, lodging, and subsistence expenses of Buyer’s and Engineer's representatives, and all expenses of re‐inspection or retesting.

3. Buyer shall bear all expenses of inspections and tests that are not specified in the Procurement Contract Documents (other than any re‐inspection or retesting resulting from a determination of non‐conformity, as set forth in Paragraph 9.03); provided, however, that if as the result of any such non‐specified inspections or testing the Goods are determined to be non‐conforming, then Seller shall bear all expenses of such inspections and testing, and of any necessary re‐inspection and retesting.

4. Seller shall provide Buyer timely written notice of the readiness of the Goods for all inspections, tests, or approvals which the Procurement Contract Documents specify are to be observed by Buyer prior to shipment.




5. Buyer will give Seller timely notice of all specified tests, inspections, and approvals of the Goods which are to be conducted at the Point of Destination, and a representative of Seller will attend such tests, inspections, and approvals.

6. If, on the basis of inspections or testing, the Goods appear to be conforming, Buyer will give Seller prompt notice thereof. If on the basis of inspections or testing, the Goods appear to be non‐conforming, Buyer will give Seller prompt notice thereof and will advise Seller of the remedy Buyer elects under the provisions of Paragraph 9.03.

7. Neither payments made by Buyer to Seller prior to any tests or inspections, nor any tests or inspections, will constitute acceptance of non‐conforming Goods, or prejudice Buyer’s rights under the Procurement Contract.

B. Visual Inspection on Delivery

1. Buyer will visually inspect the Goods upon delivery solely for purposes of identifying the Goods, general verification of quantities, and observation of apparent condition. Such visual inspection will not be construed as final or as receipt of any Goods and Special Services that, as a result of subsequent inspections and tests, are determined to be non‐conforming.

2. If, on the basis of the visual inspection specified in Paragraph 9.02.B.1, the Goods appear to comply with the requirements of the Procurement Contract Documents as to quantities and condition, then within 10 days of delivery Buyer shall issue to Seller Buyer’s acknowledgment of the receipt of Goods.

C. Final Inspection

1. After all of the Goods have been incorporated into the Project, tested in accordance with such testing requirements as are specified, and are functioning as required, and Seller has performed and completed all Special Services, Buyer will make a final inspection.

2. If, on the basis of the final inspection, Buyer determines that the Goods and Special Services are conforming, Buyer’s notice thereof will constitute Buyer’s acceptance of the Goods and Special Services, subject to any limitations stated in the notice.

3. If, on the basis of the final inspection, the Goods and Special Services are non‐conforming, Buyer will identify the non‐conformity in writing.

9.03 Non‐Conforming Goods and Special Services

A. If, on the basis of inspections and testing prior to delivery, the Goods and Special Services are found to be non‐conforming, or if at any time after Buyer has acknowledged receipt of delivery and before the expiration of the correction period described in Paragraph 9.04, Buyer determines that the Goods and Special Services are non‐conforming, then Seller shall promptly, without cost to Buyer and in response to written instructions from Buyer, either correct such non‐conforming Goods and Special Services, or, if Goods are rejected by Buyer, remove and replace the non‐conforming Goods with conforming Goods, including all work required for reinstallation.

B. Buyer’s Rejection of Non‐Conforming Goods




1. If Buyer elects to reject the Goods in whole or in part, Buyer’s notice to Seller will describe in sufficient detail the non‐conforming aspect of the Goods. If Goods have been delivered to Buyer, Seller shall promptly, and within the Procurement Contract Times, remove and replace the rejected Goods.

2. Seller shall bear all costs, losses and damages attributable to the removal, replacement, reinspection, and retesting of the non‐conforming Goods.

3. Upon rejection of the Goods, Buyer retains a security interest in the Goods to the extent of any payments made and expenses incurred in their testing and inspection.

C. Buyer’s Rejection of Non‐Conforming Special Services

1. If at any time Buyer elects to reject the Special Services in whole or in part, Buyer’s notice to Seller will describe in sufficient detail the non‐conforming aspect of the Special Services.

2. Seller shall promptly provide conforming Special Services acceptable to Buyer.

3. If Seller fails to provide conforming Special Services, Buyer may remove the Special Services from the scope of the Procurement Contract, and equitably reduce the Procurement Contract Price.

D. Remedying Non‐Conforming Goods: If Buyer elects to permit the Seller to modify the Goods to correct the non‐conformance, then Seller shall promptly provide a schedule for such modifications and shall make the Goods conforming within a reasonable time.

E. Buyer’s Acceptance of Non‐Conforming Goods: Instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of non‐conforming Goods discovered either before or after final payment, Buyer may accept the non‐conforming Goods. Seller shall bear all reasonable costs, losses, and damages attributable to Buyer’s evaluation of and determination to accept such non‐conforming Goods.

F. Seller Obligations: Seller shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages, including but not limited to all fees and charges for re‐inspection, retesting and for any engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs arising out of or relating to the non‐conforming Goods and Special Services. Seller's obligations will include the costs of the correction or removal and replacement of the non‐conforming Goods and the replacement of property of Buyer and others destroyed by the correction or removal and replacement of the non‐conforming Goods, and obtaining conforming Special Services from others.

G. Buyer's Rejection of Conforming Goods: If Buyer asserts that Goods and Special Services are non‐conforming and such Goods and Special Services are determined to be conforming, or if Buyer rejects as non‐conforming Goods and Special Services that are later determined to be conforming, then Seller shall be entitled to reimbursement from Buyer of costs incurred by Seller in inspecting, testing, correcting, removing, or replacing the conforming Goods and Special Services, including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs associated with the incorrect assertion of non‐conformance or rejection of conforming Goods and Special Services.




9.04 Correction Period

A. Seller’s responsibility for correcting all non‐conformities in the Goods and Special Services will extend for a period of one year after the acceptance of the Goods and Special Services in accordance with Paragraph 9.02.C.2.

B. Where non‐conforming Goods and Services (and damage to other work resulting therefrom) have been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Goods and Services will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

C. Seller’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph may not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS

10.01 Engineer’s Role Defined

A. Engineer will be Buyer’s representative until assignment (if any) of the Procurement Contract.

B. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer prior to assignment, if any, of the Procurement Contract, are set forth in the Procurement Contract Documents.

C. Engineer’s responsibilities, if any, after an assignment (if any) of the Procurement Contract, are set forth in the Procurement Agreement.

10.02 Duties and Responsibilities; Authority; Limitations

A. As set forth in Article 3, Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the Procurement Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Goods and Special Services, and will issue clarifications, interpretations, and decisions regarding such issues.

B. Acting on behalf of Buyer under the provisions of Article 9, Engineer has the authority to disapprove or reject Goods and Special Services that Engineer believes to be non‐conforming. Engineer also has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Goods or Special Services as provided in Paragraph 9.02, whether or not the Goods are fabricated or installed, or the Special Services are completed.

C. Engineer may authorize minor deviations or variations in the Procurement Contract Documents by: 1) written approval of specific variations set forth in Shop Drawings when Seller has duly noted such variations as required in Paragraph 7.06.A.3, or 2) a Field Order.

D. As set forth in Article 12, Engineer will review Claims, and render decisions on Claims.

E. In rendering any interpretations, clarifications, reviews, decisions, disapprovals, acceptances, rejections, authorizations, and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Buyer or Seller. Engineer will not be liable to Buyer, Seller, or others in connection with any interpretations, clarifications, reviews, decisions, disapprovals, acceptances, rejections, authorizations, or judgments conducted or rendered by Engineer in good faith.




F. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures used by Seller to perform its obligations under this Procurement Contract, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Seller to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of its obligations. Engineer will not be responsible for Seller’s failure to furnish the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 11—CHANGES

11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Procurement Contract

A. The Procurement Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Change Directive, or a Field Order.

B. If an amendment or supplement to the Procurement Contract includes a change in the Procurement Contract Price or the Procurement Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order.

C. All changes to the Procurement Contract that involve (1) the conformance or acceptability of the Goods and Special Services, (2) the design (as set forth in the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Buyer and Seller may amend other terms and conditions of the Procurement Contract without the recommendation of the Engineer.

11.02 Change Orders

A. Buyer and Seller shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

1. Changes in Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Goods and Special Services furnished in accordance with a Change Directive;

2. Changes in Procurement Contract Price resulting from a Buyer set‐off, unless Seller has duly contested such set‐off;

3. Changes in the Goods and Special Services which are: (a) ordered by Buyer pursuant to Paragraph 11.05, (b) required because of Buyer’s acceptance of non‐conforming Goods and Services under Paragraph 9.03 or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Goods and Special Services involves the design (as set forth in the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters; and

4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under: Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Change Directive; Article 12, Claims; and similar provisions.

B. If Buyer or Seller refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed.




11.03 Change Directives

A. A Change Directive will not change the Procurement Contract Price or the Procurement Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Procurement Contract Price and Procurement Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Procurement Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.08 regarding change of Procurement Contract Price.

B. If Buyer has issued a Change Directive and Buyer or Seller believes that an adjustment in Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price is necessary, then such party shall submit a Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 30 days after the completion of the Goods and Services set out in the Change Directive.

11.04 Field Orders

A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Goods and Services if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Procurement Contract Price or the Procurement Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept as indicated by the Procurement Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Buyer and also on Seller, which shall perform the Goods and Special Services involved promptly.

B. If Seller believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Goods and Special Services at issue, Seller shall submit a Claim as provided herein.

11.05 Buyer‐Authorized Changes in the Goods and Special Services

A. Without invalidating the Procurement Contract and without notice to any surety, Buyer may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Goods and Special Services. Changes involving the design (as set forth in the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation.

B. Such changes in the Goods and Special Services may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Buyer and Seller have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Procurement Contract Times or Procurement Contract Price; or by a Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Seller shall promptly proceed with the Goods and Special Services involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Goods and Special Services, promptly cease activities with respect to such deletion. Added or revised Goods and Special Services must be performed under the applicable conditions of the Procurement Contract Documents.

11.06 Buyer’s Contingency Allowance

A. The Buyer’s Contingency Allowance, if any such is set forth in the Procurement Agreement, is for the sole use of Buyer to cover unanticipated costs.

B. If Buyer exercises its unilateral right to use all or a portion of the Buyer’s Contingency Allowance, Buyer will issue a written directive that documents the costs to which the




allowance is applied, Seller’s entitlement to compensation, and the consequent reduction in such allowance.

C. Prior to final payment, the Total Price, as set forth in the Procurement Agreement, will be duly adjusted to account for any unused portion of the Buyer’s Contingency Allowance.

D. The Procurement Agreement, Article 5, addresses the impact on Buyer’s Contingency Allowance of an assignment of the Procurement Contract.

11.07 Unauthorized Changes in the Goods and Special Services

A. Seller shall not be entitled to an increase in the Procurement Contract Price or an extension of the Procurement Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Procurement Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented.

11.08 Change of Procurement Contract Price

A. The Procurement Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment of Procurement Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment in the Procurement Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. For changes in Unit Price Goods and Special Services, by application of the unit prices to the quantities of the items involved;

2. To the extent the cost of the change is not covered by unit prices, then by a mutually agreed lump sum; or

3. To the extent the cost of the change is not covered by unit prices and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of documented costs plus a Seller’s fee for overhead and profit of 15%.

11.09 Change of Procurement Contract Times

A. The Procurement Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Procurement Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12.

11.10 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Goods and Special Services or the provisions of the Procurement Contract (including, but not limited to, Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Seller’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.

ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS, DISPUTES, AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

12.01 Claims

A. The parties agree to endeavor to avoid or resolve Claims through direct, good faith discussions and negotiations whenever practicable. Such discussions and negotiations should at the outset address whether the parties mutually agree to suspend the Claims process, including the time periods established in this Paragraph 12.01; if so, a written record of such mutual agreement should be made and jointly executed.




B. Claimant shall deliver to Engineer and the other party to the Procurement Contract written notice of each Claim within 15 days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the Claim.

C. Claimant shall deliver written supporting data to Engineer and the other party within 45 days after such occurrence unless Engineer allows an additional period of time.

D. Engineer will review each such Claim and render a decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any.

E. If Engineer does not render a formal written decision on a Claim within the time stated in Paragraph 12.01.D., Engineer shall be deemed to have issued a decision denying the Claim in its entirety 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any.

F. The rendering of a decision by Engineer pursuant to this Paragraph 12.01 with respect to any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Buyer or Seller of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Procurement Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. If the exercise of such rights or remedies will imminently be time‐barred, a party may take actions necessary to preserve such rights and remedies notwithstanding the lack of the condition precedent referred to in this paragraph.

G. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Procurement Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of Goods and Special Services under the Procurement Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Procurement Drawings, Procurement Specifications, Addenda, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Buyer and Seller that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Buyer and Seller are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Paragraph 12.02.

H. Engineer’s written decision on such Claim or a decision denying the Claim in its entirety that is deemed to have been issued pursuant to Paragraph 12.01, will be final and binding upon Buyer and Seller 30 days after it is issued unless within 30 days of issuance Buyer or Seller appeals Engineer’s decision by initiating the mediation of such Claim in accordance with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Paragraph 12.02.

I. If Article 12 has been amended to delete the mediation requirement, then Buyer or Seller may appeal Engineer's decision within 30 days of issuance by following the alternative dispute resolution process set forth in Article 12, as amended; or if no such alternative dispute resolution process has been set forth, Buyer or Seller may appeal Engineer's decision by 1) delivering to the other party within 30 days of the date of such decision a written notice of intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction, and 2) within 60 days after the date of such decision instituting a formal proceeding in a court of competent jurisdiction.

J. No Claim for an adjustment in Procurement Contract Price or Procurement Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with Article 12.

K. The effect on Claims of an assignment of the Procurement Contract by Buyer to a Contractor/Assignee is addressed in the Procurement Agreement, Article 5.




12.02 Dispute Resolution Method

A. Either Buyer or Seller may initiate the mediation of (1) any Claim decided in writing by Engineer under Paragraph 12.01 before such decision becomes final and binding, or (2) any other dispute between the parties, including but not limited to any dispute arising after final inspection of the Goods and Services. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Procurement Contract. The request for mediation must be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Procurement Contract. Timely submission of the request will stay Engineer's decision from becoming final and binding.

B. Mediation is a condition precedent to seeking final dispute resolution under Paragraph 12.01.C. Buyer and Seller shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process must be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation will be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.

C. If the mediation process does not result in resolution of the dispute, then Engineer’s written Claim decision under Paragraph 12.01.D or a Claim denial pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.E becomes final and binding, or if applicable such other dispute is deemed resolved in favor of respondent, unless, within 30 days after termination of the mediation, Buyer or Seller:

1. elects in writing to invoke any final dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or

2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim or dispute to another final dispute resolution process, or

3. if no final dispute resolution process has been provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, delivers to the other party written notice of the intent to submit the Claim or dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction, and within 60 days of the termination of the mediation institutes such formal proceeding.

ARTICLE 13—PAYMENT

13.01 Applications for Progress Payments

A. Seller shall submit to Buyer for Engineer’s review Applications for Payment filled out and signed by Seller and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Procurement Contract Documents and also as Buyer or Engineer may reasonably require.

B. The timing and amounts of progress payments will be as stipulated in the Procurement Agreement.

C. Any Application for Payment that is based in whole or in part on the delivery of Goods must be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation reasonably satisfactory to Buyer warranting that Buyer has rightfully received good title to the Goods from Seller and that, upon payment, the Goods will be free and clear of all liens. Such documentation will include releases and waivers from all parties with viable lien rights.

D. Buyer shall notify Seller promptly of any deficiency in the required documentation.




13.02 Review of Applications for Progress Payments

A. Review of Applications

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Buyer, or return the Application to Seller indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Buyer, based on Engineer’s observations of Seller’s progress, as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Goods and Special Services or other obligations of Seller have progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Goods and Special Services or other obligations of Seller are generally in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents; and

c. the conditions precedent to Seller being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Seller’s progress.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Goods and Special Services or other obligations of Seller have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Goods and Special Services or other obligations of Seller in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Goods and Special Services or other obligations of Seller beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Procurement Contract; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Seller to be paid additionally by Buyer, or entitle Buyer to withhold payment to Seller.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Seller’s progress for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Seller’s performance or furnishing of Goods and Special Services or other obligations of Seller; or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, manufacturing, fabrication, installation, or shipping, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

c. for Seller’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Seller’s performance under the Procurement Contract; or




d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Seller has used the money paid for the Procurement Contract Price; or

e. to determine that title to any of the Goods or component parts have passed to Buyer free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Buyer stated in Paragraph 13.02.A.2.

6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set‐offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Buyer from loss because:

a. the Goods and Services are non‐conforming, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Procurement Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Buyer has been required to correct non‐conforming Goods and Special Services in accordance with Paragraph 9.03.C, or has accepted non‐conforming Goods and Special Services pursuant to Paragraph 9.03.E; or

d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Seller and therefore justify termination for cause under the Procurement Contract Documents.

13.03 Basis and Amount of Progress Payments

A. The basis and amounts of the progress payments will be as provided in the Procurement Agreement, subject to the provisions of this Article 13 regarding reductions in payment.

13.04 Suspension of or Reduction in Payment

A. Buyer may temporarily cease making progress payments, or reduce the amount of a progress payment, even though recommended for payment by Engineer, under the following circumstances:

1. Buyer has reasonable grounds to conclude that Seller will not furnish the Goods or the Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents, and

2. Buyer has requested in writing assurances from Seller that the Goods and Special Services will be delivered or furnished in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents, and Seller has failed to provide adequate assurances within ten days of Buyer’s written request.

3. In addition to any reductions in payment (set‐offs) recommended by Engineer, Buyer is entitled to impose a set‐off against payment based on any of the following:

a. claims have been made against Buyer based on Seller’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Goods and Special Services, or has incurred costs, losses, or damages resulting from Seller’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Goods and Special Services, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non‐compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement;




b. Seller has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Point of Destination or the worksite;

c. Seller has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;

d. Buyer has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to Submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;

e. the Goods and Special Services are non‐conforming, requiring correction or replacement;

f. Buyer has been required to correct non‐conforming Goods and Special Services, in accordance with Paragraph 9.03.C, or has accepted non‐conforming Goods and Special Services pursuant to Paragraph 9.03.E;

g. the Procurement Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

h. an event that would constitute a default by Seller and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred;

i. liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Seller’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Goods and Special Services; or

j. liens have been filed in connection with the Procurement Contract, except where Seller has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Buyer to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such liens.

B. If Buyer refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Buyer will provide Seller and Engineer immediate written notice stating the reason for such action and promptly pay Seller any amount remaining after deduction of the amount withheld. Buyer shall promptly pay Seller the amount withheld when Seller corrects the reason for such action to Buyer’s satisfaction.

13.05 Final Payment

A. After Seller has corrected all non‐conformities to the reasonable satisfaction of Buyer and Engineer and furnished all Special Services, Seller may submit its final Application for Payment following the procedures for progress payments.

B. The final Application for Payment will be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Procurement Contract Documents (including but not limited to all final operations and maintenance manuals, and any special warranties), a list of all unsettled Claims, and the written consent of surety to the making of final payment.

C. If, on the basis of final inspection and the review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, Engineer is reasonably satisfied that Seller has furnished the Goods and Special Services in accordance with the Procurement Contract Documents, and that Seller has fulfilled all other obligations under the Procurement Contract Documents, then Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment subject to the provisions of




Paragraph 13.02, and present the final Application for Payment to Buyer. Such recommendation will account for any set‐offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Buyer from loss for the reasons stated in Paragraph 13.02.

D. If Engineer does not recommend final payment, Engineer will return the final Application for Payment to Seller, indicating the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Seller shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the final Application for Payment.

E. In support of its recommendation of final payment Engineer will also give written notice to Buyer and Seller that the Goods and Special Services are acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of Paragraph 13.06.

F. If the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, Buyer shall, within 30 days after receipt thereof, pay Seller the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Buyer is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, pursuant to the provisions of Paragraph 13.04.

G. Buyer will not make final payment, or return or release included retainage (if any) at any time, unless Seller submits written consent of the surety to such payment, return, or release.

13.06 Waiver of Claims

A. By making final payment, Buyer waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other damages for late completion by Seller, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim, appeal, set‐off, or express reservation of rights by Buyer. Buyer reserves all other claims or rights after final payment.

B. The acceptance of final payment by Seller will constitute a waiver by Seller of all claims and rights against Buyer other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 12.

ARTICLE 14—CANCELLATION, SUSPENSION, AND TERMINATION

14.01 Cancellation

A. Buyer has the right to cancel the Procurement Contract, without cause, at any time prior to delivery of the Goods by written notice. Cancellation pursuant to the terms of this paragraph will not constitute a breach of contract by Buyer. Upon cancellation:

1. Buyer shall pay Seller for the direct costs incurred in producing any Goods that Seller has specially manufactured for the Project, plus a fair and reasonable amount for overhead and profit.

2. For Goods that are not specially manufactured for the Project, Seller shall be entitled to a restocking charge of 10 percent of the unpaid Procurement Contract Price of such Goods.

14.02 Suspension of Performance by Buyer

A. Buyer has the right to suspend performance of the Procurement Contract for up to 90 days, without cause, by written notice. Upon suspension under this paragraph, Seller shall be entitled to an increase in the Procurement Contract Times and Procurement Contract Price




caused by the suspension, provided that performance would not have been suspended or delayed for causes attributable to Seller.

14.03 Suspension of Performance by Seller

A. Seller may suspend the furnishing of the Goods and Special Services only under the following circumstance:

1. Seller has reasonable grounds to conclude that Buyer will not perform its future payment obligations under the Procurement Contract; and

2. Seller has requested in writing assurances from Buyer that future payments will be made in accordance with the Procurement Contract, and Buyer has failed to provide such assurances within ten days of Seller’s written request.

14.04 Breach and Termination

A. Buyer’s Breach

1. Seller shall have the right to terminate the Procurement Contract for cause by declaring a breach if Buyer fails to comply with any material provision of the Procurement Contract. Upon termination, Seller shall be entitled to all remedies provided by Laws and Regulations.

2. If Seller believes Buyer is in breach of its obligations under the Procurement Contract, Seller shall provide Buyer with reasonably prompt written notice setting forth in sufficient detail the reasons for declaring that it believes a breach has occurred. Buyer shall have 7 days from receipt of the written notice declaring the breach (or such longer period of time as Seller may grant in writing) within which to cure or to proceed diligently to cure such alleged breach.

B. Seller’s Breach

1. Buyer may terminate Seller’s right to perform the Procurement Contract for cause by declaring a breach should Seller fail to comply with any material provision of the Procurement Contract Documents. Upon termination, Buyer shall be entitled to all remedies provided by Laws and Regulations.

2. In the event Buyer believes Seller is in breach of its obligations under the Procurement Contract, Buyer shall provide Seller with reasonably prompt written notice setting forth in sufficient detail the reasons for declaring that it believes a breach has occurred. Seller shall have 7 days from receipt of the written notice declaring the breach (or such longer period of time as Buyer may grant in writing) within which to cure or to proceed diligently to cure such alleged breach.

3. If and to the extent that Seller has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01, the notice and cure procedures of that bond, if any, will supersede the notice and cure procedures of Paragraph 14.04.B.2.




ARTICLE 15—MISCELLANEOUS

15.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Procurement Contract requires the giving of written notice to Buyer, Seller, or Engineer, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered:

1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of business;

2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or

3. by e‐mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e‐mail’s subject line.

15.02 Controlling Law

A. This Procurement Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Goods are to be installed.

B. In the case of any conflict between the express terms of this Procurement Contract and the Uniform Commercial Code, as adopted in the state whose law governs, it is the intent of the parties that the express terms of this Procurement Contract will apply.

15.03 Computation of Time

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Procurement Contract by number of days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

15.04 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Procurement Contract, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Procurement Contract in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.

15.05 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Procurement Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Procurement Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Goods and Special Services or termination or completion of the Procurement Contract or of the services of Seller.

15.06 Entire Agreement

A. Buyer and Seller agree that this Procurement Contract is the complete and final agreement between them, and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. This Procurement Contract may not be altered, modified, or amended except in writing signed by an authorized representative of both parties.




15.07 No Waiver

A. A party’s non‐enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Procurement Contract.

15.08 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.

15.09 Successors and Assigns

A. Buyer and Seller each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Procurement Contract.

EJCDC® P-800, Supplementary Conditions of the Procurement Contract. Copyright© 2019 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV-00 80 00 Supplementary Conditions for Procurement 2019.docx 00 80 00 - i

SECTION 00 80 00 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1— Definitions and Terminology ....................................................................................................... 1

Article 2— Preliminary Matters .................................................................................................................... 1

Article 3— Procurement Contract Documents ............................................................................................. 1

Article 4— Commencement and Schedule ................................................................................................... 1

Article 5— Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................... 2

Article 6— Licenses and Fees ........................................................................................................................ 4

Article 7— Seller’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 5

Article 8— Shipping and Delivery ................................................................................................................. 5

Article 9— Buyer’s Rights .............................................................................................................................. 6

Article 10— Engineer’s Status ....................................................................................................................... 6

Article 11— Changes ..................................................................................................................................... 6

Article 12— Claims, Disputes, and Dispute Resolution ................................................................................ 6

Article 13— Payment .................................................................................................................................... 6

Article 14— Cancellation, Suspension, and Termination ............................................................................. 7

Article 15— Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................... 7



STV-00 80 00 Supplementary Conditions for Procurement 2019.docx 00 80 00 - 1

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE PROCUREMENT CONTRACT

These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® P-700, Standard General Conditions of the Procurement Contract (2019). The General Conditions remain in full force and effect except as amended.

Supplementary Conditions are also included in the following Sections:

1. Section 00 22 00 - Washington State Department of Ecology (Ecology) Water Pollution Control State Revolving Fund (SRF) Pre-Selection Specification Insert.

The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.

The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added.

ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

SC-1.01.A Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 1.01.A.40:

41. Owner: The Buyer. Refer to Section 00 70 00, Paragraph 1.01.A.5.

42. Site: The Point of Destination. Refer to Section 00 70 00, Paragraph 1.01.A.20.

43. Manufacturer: Seller. Refer to Section 00 70 00, Paragraph 1.01.A.34.

44. Work: The Goods and Special Services. Refer to Section 00 70 00, Paragraph 1.01.A.16.

ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.02 Copies of Documents

SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

Buyer shall furnish to Seller one (1) fully signed counterpart of the Procurement Agreement, and one (1) copy of the Procurement Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF).


No Supplementary Conditions in this Article.

ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND SCHEDULE






5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

SC-5.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.01.A:

1. Required Performance Bond Form: The performance bond that Seller furnishes will be in the form of EJCDC® P-610, Performance Bond (2019 edition).

2. Required Payment Bond Form: The payment bond that Seller furnishes will be in the form of EJCDC® P-615, Payment Bond (2019 edition).

5.02 Insurance

SC-5.02 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.02.E:

F. Seller shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the furnishing of Goods and Special Services and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Seller’s furnishing of the Goods or Special Services and Seller’s other obligations under the Procurement Contract Documents, whether the furnishing of Goods and Special Services or other obligations are to be performed by Seller, any subcontractor or supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to furnish the Goods and Special Services, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts;

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Seller’s employees;

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Seller’s employees;

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: (a) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Seller, or (b) by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Goods, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

G. The policies of insurance so required by this Paragraph 5.02 to be purchased and maintained must:

1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs SC-5.02.F.3 through SC-5.02.F.6 inclusive, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Buyer, Engineer, their consultants, and

Esvelt Environmental Engineering, LLC, 8812 East Redwood Lane, Spokane, WA 99217,




all of whom must be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds must provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby;

2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided below or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater;

3. include completed operations insurance;

4. include contractual liability insurance covering Seller’s indemnity obligations under Paragraph 7.07;

5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder will provide a copy of the notice to the other party, each other insured, and Engineer;

6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Seller may be correcting, removing, or replacing non-conforming Goods in accordance with Paragraph 9.03 and 9.04; and

7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and Seller shall furnish Buyer and each other additional insured identified in these Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Buyer and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter).

H. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph SC-5.02.F must provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations:

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs SC-5.02.F.1 and F.2:

Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not less than

Workers’ Compensation State Statutory Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s responsibility coverage), if applicable

Statutory

Jones Act (if applicable) Bodily injury by accident—each accident (for maritime occupations)

$ N/A

Bodily injury by disease—aggregate (for maritime occupations) $ N/A Employer’s Liability Each accident $100,000




Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not less than

Each employee $100,000 Policy limit $500,000 Stop-gap Liability Coverage For work performed in monopolistic states, stop-gap liability coverage must be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of:

$1,000,000

2. Seller’s General Liability under Paragraphs SC-5.02.F.3 through F.6 which must include completed operations and product liability coverages and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of Seller:

Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not less than

General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $1,000,000

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph SC-5.02.F.6:

Automobile Liability Policy limits of not less than

Bodily Injury Each Person $1,000,000 Each Accident $1,000,000 Property Damage Each Accident $1,000,000

4. Professional Liability (if the Special Services include professional services):

Seller’s Professional Liability Policy limits of not less than

Each Claim $ N/A Annual Aggregate $ N/A

I. Seller shall deliver to Buyer, with copies to each additional insured identified in these Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Buyer or any other additional insured) which Seller is required to purchase and maintain.

ARTICLE 6—LICENSES AND FEES





ARTICLE 7—SELLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.06 Submittals

SC-7.06 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.06.E:

F. This section shall be supplemented with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures and Section 01 78 00 Close-Out Submittals of the Technical Specifications.

7.07 Indemnification

SC-7.07 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.07.B:

C. Seller assumes responsibility for and shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its agents, employees and officials (hereinafter “Indemnitee”) harmless from any and all claims, demands, damages, expenses, losses, fines, penalties or liabilities, including loss of use, arising from, resulting in any manner directly or indirectly from or connected with or in the course of the performance of the Work and the obligations herein, including without limitation claims of subcontractors and suppliers contracting with Seller. Seller’s obligation to defend, indemnify and hold Indemnitee harmless shall include, but is not limited to, Indemnitee’s personnel-related costs, attorney and expert fees, court costs, and all other claim-related expenses, to the fullest extent permitted by law, even though such claims may prove to be false, groundless, or fraudulent, subject only to the limitations provided below.

D. Seller’s duty to indemnify shall not apply to liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damage to property caused by or resulting from: (a) the sole negligence of Indemnitee or (b) the concurrent negligence of (i) Indemnitee, its agents or employees and (ii) Seller, its agents or employees with such liability limited to the extent of Seller or Seller’s agents or employees negligence. RCW 4.24.115

E. Seller specifically and expressly waives any immunity that may be granted it under the worker’s compensation laws under the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51 RCW; provided that such waiver shall be expressly limited to Seller’s indemnity obligations herein and shall not be intended as a benefit to any third party. Further, the indemnification obligation under this Contract shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable to or for any third party under workers compensation acts, disability benefits acts, or other employee benefits acts. This waiver was mutually negotiated.

F. The partial or complete invalidity of any one or more provisions of this Section shall not affect the validity or continuing force and effect of any other provision. If any provision is invalid, in whole or in part, the balance of the provisions shall be considered reformed to reflect the intent of the parties to the greatest extent possible consistent with the law. The provisions of this section shall survive termination of this Agreement.

ARTICLE 8—SHIPPING AND DELIVERY





ARTICLE 9—BUYER’S RIGHTS

9.01 Seller’s Warranties and Guarantees

SC-9.01 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 9.01.E:

F. This section shall be supplemented with the warranties specified in the Technical Specifications. All materials and equipment found defective within the warranty period shall be replaced or repaired, with all cost of replacement or repair, including shipping charges, to be borne by the Seller, except for those items which are normally consumed in service, such as oil, grease, etc.

9.02 Inspections and Testing

SC-9.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 9.02.C:

D. This section shall be supplemented with Section 01 75 00 Testing and Commissioning Procedures of the Technical Specifications.

9.04 Correction Period

SC-9.04 Amend Paragraph 9.04.A to read as follows:

A. Seller’s responsibility for correcting all non-conformities in the Goods and Special Services will extend for a period of one two years after the acceptance of the Goods and Special Services in accordance with Paragraph 9.02.C.2.

ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS


ARTICLE 11—CHANGES

11.02 Change Orders

SC-11.02.C Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 11.02.B:

C. The Change Order Form to be used on this Project is EJCDC No. C-941.

11.03 Change Directives

SC-11.03.C Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 11.03.B:

C. The Work Change Directive Form to be used on this Project is EJCDC No. C-940.

ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS, DISPUTES, AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION


ARTICLE 13—PAYMENT





ARTICLE 14—CANCELLATION, SUSPENSION, AND TERMINATION


ARTICLE 15—MISCELLANEOUS

15.02 Controlling Law

SC-15.02 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 15.02.B:

C. This Agreement is entered into in Skamania County, Washington. Venue shall be in Skamania County, State of Washington.

15.10 Anti-kickback

SC-15.10 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 15.09:

SC-15.10 Anti-kickback

A. No officer or employee of the City, having the power or duty to perform an official act or action related to this Agreement, shall have, or acquire, any interest in this Agreement, or have solicited, accepted, or granted, a present or future gift, favor, service, or other thing of value from any person with an interest in this Agreement.

EJCDC® C-940, Work Change Directive. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


STV-00 94 00 Work Change Directive 2018.docx 00 94 00 - 1

SECTION 00 94 00 - WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

Buyer: Work Change Directive No.: Engineer: Buyer’s Contract No.: Seller: Seller’s Contract No.: Project: Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Work Change Directive:

Seller is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):

Description:

Attachments:

Purpose for the Work Change Directive:

Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to change in Contract Price and Contract Time, is issued due to:

☐ Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. ☐ Necessity to proceed for schedule or other reasons.

Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary):

Contract Price: $ [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated].

Contract Time: days [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated].

Basis of estimated change in Contract Price:

☐ Lump Sum ☐ Unit Price ☐ Cost of the Work ☐ Other

Recommended by Engineer Authorized by Buyer

By:

Title:

Date:

EJCDC® C-941, Change Order. Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies


STV-00 94 10 Change Order 2018.docx 00 94 10 - 1

SECTION 00 94 10 - CHANGE ORDER

Buyer: Change Order No.: Engineer: Buyer’s Project No.: Seller: Seller’s Project No.: Project: Contract Name: Date Issued: Effective Date of Change Order:

The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:

Description:

Attachments:

Change in Contract Price

Change in Contract Times [State Contract Times as either a specific date or a

number of days] Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. 1 to No.:

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No.1 to No.:

Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: [Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment: Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment:

Recommended by Engineer (if required) Authorized by Buyer

By:

Title:

Date:

Authorized by Buyer Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable)

By:

Title:

Date:

STV‐01 33 00 Submittal Procedures for Procurement.doc 01 33 00‐1

SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies procedures for submittals.

B. The Seller shall submit descriptive information which will enable the Engineer to determine whether the proposed materials, equipment, testing, and schedules are in general conformance with the design concept and in compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. The information to be submitted shall consist of schedules, shop drawings, specifications, product data, test procedures, certified test reports, certificates of conformance, certificates of installation and testing, warranties, operating and maintenance manuals, lesson plans, and such other information, as specifically required in the Contract Documents.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Article 10 of the Instructions to Bidders, Paragraph 10.01 – “Or Equal” Items

B. Article 1 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 1.01.A.32 – Samples

C. Article 1 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 1.01.A.35 – Shop Drawings

D. Article 2 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 2.04 – Preliminary Schedules

E. Article 7 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 7.04 – “Or Equals”

F. Article 7 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 7.06 – Submittals

G. Division 1 ‐ General Requirements

H. Division 40 ‐ Process Interconnections

I. Division 43 ‐ Process Gas and Liquid Handling Equipment

J. Division 46 ‐ Water and Wastewater Equipment

1.03 SELLER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Seller shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall ensure that the material, equipment, testing, and schedules shall be as described in the submittal.


B. The Seller shall verify that the material and equipment described in each submittal conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the information shows deviations from the Contract Documents, the Seller shall, by statement in writing accompanying the submittal, identify the deviations and state the reason and notify the Engineer in each case for approval.

C. The Seller shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the Engineer in each case where such submittal may affect the work.

D. The Seller shall not order any materials prior to receipt of the Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings and Product Data. Work performed before acceptance of Shop Drawings and Products shall be at the Seller’s own risk. In the event of termination for convenience, the Buyer will not be responsible for any materials ordered prior to submittal approval.

1.04 OR EQUALS

A. Determination of “or equal” materials and equipment shall be in accordance with the Standard General Conditions with the following paragraphs.

B. Seller shall provide a submittal with all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Seller’s expense. Data shall at minimum meet the requirements of Shop Drawings and Product Data of this specification section.

C. Seller may submit a qualification package meeting the requirements of Shop Drawings and Product Data of this specification section per Article 10 of the Instructions to Bidders with a deadline prior to the Bid Opening date for a pre‐bid determination on the suitability of the material and equipment from Engineer.

D. After the deadline in the above paragraph, Seller assumes all liability and expense related to the Engineer’s evaluation and incorporation of “or equals” items into the work.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Any substitutions proposed by the Seller shall require submittals to fully enable the Engineer to evaluate the proposed substitution.

B. All submittals shall clearly note and explicitly describe all details of any proposed and/or Engineer approved substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents.

C. The Engineer’s approval of any Shop Drawing or Product Data shall not release the Seller from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents.

D. The approval of any Shop Drawing that substantially deviates from the requirement of the Contract Documents shall require a change order.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Submit Schedule per Article 2 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 2.04.

2.02 SAMPLES

A. Samples, where required in the Technical Specifications, or requested by the Engineer, shall be submitted for approval.

B. The approved samples shall be identified as to their intended use and the transmittal shall be accompanied by a letter of certification from the Seller stating that the samples comply with the contract drawings and specifications.

C. All samples shall be individually and indelibly labeled or tagged, indicating thereon the project name, contract number, Manufacturer's name, equipment name, equipment specification number, and all specified physical characteristics.

2.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Shop Drawing Format

1. Seller shall identify each copy of the Shop Drawings with the contract drawing number in the lower right hand corner, shall make all shop drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large enough to show all pertinent features of the item and it's method of connection to the work, and shall make all shop drawing prints in blue or black on white background.

2. Shop Drawings shall be bound in a 3‐ring or 3‐clip, loose leaf binder or folder with the equipment title, specification number(s), and manufacturer name clearly printed on the front of the binder or folder.

3. All drawings should be 11 by 17 inches or 8 1/2 x 11 inches. If drawings larger than 11 by 17 inches are required (drawings larger than 11x17 are discouraged), drawings shall be folded neatly and placed inside transparent inserts within the binder or folder.

4. When revised for resubmission, Seller shall clearly identify drawings with changes made since previous submission.

5. Each item listed in the paragraphs below shall be included and be appropriately identified.

B. Shop Drawing Content: Seller shall submit the following minimum information as part of their Shop Drawing Submittal for each model or type of unit supplied by the Seller:


1. Process and Instrumentation Diagram of the system, detailing the equipment supplied and showing equipment that shall interface with the system.

2. Mechanical Drawings – General Arrangement Plans, Sections, and Details

a. Concrete channels.

b. Instrumentation.

c. Equipment and skids.

d. Enclosures and panels for equipment and controls.

3. Electrical and Controls Drawings:

a. Control schematics, single‐line, and list of all input/output signals for control panels.

b. Electrical single‐line diagram including power distribution requirements, transformers, drives, panel boards, meters and protective devices.

c. Panel layout diagrams including control devices and auxiliary devices and wiring diagrams.

4. Drawings shall be to a level of detail sufficient for a contractor to install the system.

5. Drawings shall show the general dimensions of the equipment and shall confirm the size of the unit.

6. Drawings shall include: size and location of required piping and utility connections, structural supports, construction details, weights of major components, materials of construction of all components, including all buy‐out items.

C. Product Data: Seller shall submit the following minimum information as part of their Product Data Submittal for each model or type of unit supplied by the Seller:

1. Manufacturer’s catalog information.

2. Manufacturer’s specifications for materials and manufacturing.

3. Detailed information for all ancillary items such as hardware and mounting frames, etc.

4. Information on equipment field erection requirements including total weight of assembled components and weight of each subassembly.

5. Installation and storage instructions.


6. Design calculations and performance curves demonstrating compliance with the performance and design criteria of the specifications.

7. Manufacturer’s coating system technical data sheets.

8. Manufacturer's warranty as specified.

9. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts.

10. A maintenance schedule showing the required maintenance, frequency of maintenance, lubricants, and other items required at each regular preventive maintenance period.

11. Information and location of nearest parts, service crews, and repair facilities to the Buyer.

12. Installation list for installations in the U.S. with location, contact names, and phone numbers, if requested by the Engineer.

13. Any additional information listed elsewhere in the Specifications and required to be submitted.

14. List all design modifications for Engineer’s approval, if any, to accommodate the equipment proposed.

15. List of all variances from Specifications (Note: Failure to specifically list and fully explain all variance will be cause for rejection of submittal.)

16. Any other required information to clearly and readily demonstrate compliance with all parts of the Specifications.

17. A bill of materials for all equipment, tagged devices, components, special tools, and spare parts supplied with the system, including component original part numbers identifying each furnished component and corresponding to the number provided on the drawings.

D. For instrumentation and controls, submit the following:

1. A detailed instrument list for all field instruments that includes tag number, service, manufacturer, type, range, hazardous area classification and connection type.

2. Narrative description for all control systems, summary of control functions, summary of monitoring functions, description of alarms, control set points, alarm set‐points, graphic interface screens.

3. Detailed Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system network communication architecture, control panel layouts, input/output lists.


4. Detailed bill of materials for all Control Panel and PLC hardware.

5. Control system programming. Program documentation printout with tag numbers, ladder logic, program and function listing, and descriptive comments.

E. For process connected instruments:

1. Manufacturer's technical data sheet

2. Wiring diagram

3. Bill of materials

4. Manufacturer’s warranty as specified

5. Installation instructions and details including: tube material and size, connection size, fitting size, material, and rating, isolation or other valve type and material as applicable, pipe stand size and material, required elevations and dimensions.

6. List of spare parts and calibration standards as applicable.

F. Copies of the final approved and conformed Shop Drawings and Product Data are required to be submitted with the operation and maintenance manuals.

2.04 MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY

A. The Manufacturer’s Warranty shall be submitted to the Engineer with the Product Data submittal and shall be in conformance with the respective equipment and materials specification sections.

B. All submitted warranties shall state in writing that the warranty period will begin from the Date of Substantial Completion and will end as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents from this date.

2.05 FACTORY TEST REPORTS

A. At minimum 15 days prior to delivery of materials and equipment, certified copies of the reports of all tests listed in the technical sections (and referenced publications) shall be submitted and approved.

B. Test reports shall be accompanied by notarized certificates from the manufacturer certifying that the material and equipment proposed to be supplied is of the same type, quality, manufacture and make as that tested.

C. Test results shall cite the contract requirements, the test or analytical procedures used, the actual results, and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to the specification requirements.


D. All test reports shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports.

E. If test results are required to be witnessed by an independent testing laboratory, that laboratory shall certify the Test Report.

2.06 BILL OF MATERIALS

A. Bill of materials and/or shipping manifest shall be submitted with shipment prior to or upon delivery of products to point of destination.

B. Bill of materials shall include the equipment, part, or tool name, identification numbers, and number of units supplied.

2.07 TESTING AND TRAINING SUBMITTALS

A. Submit testing and commissioning submittals in accordance with Section 01 75 00.

B. Submit training submittals in accordance with Section 01 79 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Paper Copies: Seller shall submit four (4) paper copies of all submittals plus the number of copies the Seller wants returned, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

B. Electronic Copies: Seller shall upload one (1) Adobe® Reader® (pdf) copy to the project ftp site. The pdf must contain a duplicate copy of all the paper copy information.

C. Certification: All submittals shall be approved and certified by the Seller as conforming to the drawings and specifications.

D. Schedule: All required Shop Drawings and Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer by not later than as required in Article 2 of the Agreement.

E. Transmittal Sheet: All submittals shall be submitted in a bound volume shall include Transmittal Form 01 33 00‐1. The transmittal form shall indicate the date of submission and whether the Engineer’s or Buyer’s approval is required.

F. Submittal Identification and Status: Each item of submittal to be incorporated into the work shall be cross‐referenced to the contract drawings and specifications so as to clearly identify the use for which it is intended.

G. Variations: Variations from contract requirements are discouraged. If submittals show variations from the contract requirements, the Seller shall describe and list such variations in writing at the time of submission. If the Engineer approves any such variation, the Engineer shall issue an appropriate contract modification, except that, if


the variation is minor or does not involve a change in price or in time or performance, a modification need not be issued.

3.02 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. General:

1. Submittals shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01 33 00‐1, included in this section, or an approved substitute form. Equipment or identification numbers shall be listed on the form for items being submitted. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package as a whole.

2. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Submittal numbers shall have the following format: "XXXXX‐Y.Z"; where "XXXXX" is the specification section number assigned to the submittal, “Y” is the sequential item in that section, and Z is the sequential submittal number. Example: Submittal 01 33 00‐1.1 is the first submittal of this section (e.g. the Schedule of Submittals). The resubmission would be 01 33 00‐1.2.

B. Submittal Completeness: Submittals which do not have all the information required to be submitted are not acceptable and will be returned.

C. Submittals returned marked “Revise and Resubmit” or “Rejected” will be reviewed no more than three (3) times at the Buyer’s expense. Additional Engineer reviews, beyond the initial three (3) reviews, will be charged to the Seller at $140 per hour of review time by the Engineer(s) required to review the submittal.

D. Submittal Priority: When multiple submittals have been sent to the Engineer for review, Seller shall indicate priority for receipt of reviewed submittals. Engineer will attempt to review and reply to the highest priority submittals in the most timely manner when Seller indicates that there is a priority.

3.03 REVIEW PROCEDURE

A. Engineer will review and return the submittal indicating one of the following actions on the Submittal Transmittal Form 01 33 00‐1.

1. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, test or work method is in general conformance with the design concept and complies with the Contract Documents, submittal copies will be marked "No Exceptions Taken" and given Review Action 1. In this event the Seller may begin to incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.


2. If the review indicates that the submittal is insufficient or that limited corrections are required, copies will be marked "Furnish as Corrected" and be given Review Action 2. The Seller may begin incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where submittal information will be incorporated in Operation and Maintenance data, a corrected copy shall be provided, otherwise no further action is required.

3. If the review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will be marked "Revise and Resubmit". Comments will be provided to indicate, in part, the deficiencies that must be addressed. The submittal will be given Review Action 3. Except at its own risk, the Seller shall not undertake work covered by such a submittal until the submittal has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either “No Exceptions Taken” or “Furnish as Corrected”.

4. If the comments require a complete resubmittal, copies will be further marked "Rejected" and given a Review Action 4. Except at its own risk, the Seller shall not undertake work covered by such a submittal until the submittal has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either "No Exceptions Taken" or "Furnish as Corrected."

5. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, test or work method is not in general conformance with the design concept or in compliance with the Contract Documents, copies of the submittal will be marked "Submit Specified Item" and given Review Action 5. This action indicates that in the Engineers opinion the equipment or material submitted does not comply with that specified. The Seller should completely review the suitability of the equipment or material and seek out alternatives that will meet the intent of the design. Except at its own risk, the Seller shall not undertake work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is made and returned marked either "No Exceptions Taken" or "Furnish as Corrected."

3.04 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF SELLER'S SUBMITTALS

A. Review of drawings, tests, methods of work, or information regarding materials or equipment the Seller proposes to provide, shall not relieve the Seller of its responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the Buyer or by any officer or employee of the Buyer, and the Seller shall have no claim under the Contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work and test, material, or equipment so reviewed. A mark of "No Exceptions Taken" or "Note Markings" shall mean that the Buyer, or any officer or employee of the Buyer, has no objection to the Seller, upon the Seller's own responsibility, providing the materials or equipment proposed.

* * * END OF SECTION * * *


FORM 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL/TRANSMITTAL Date Stamp

Contractor: _________________________ Contract No.: _______________________

Submittal No. _______________________ Date: ______________________________ Resubmittal Y/N:_____________________

This Section To Be Completed By Contractor This Section to be Completed by Engineer

Item No.

* P/C

Spec. Paragraph

Dwg. No.

Description of Item

CopiesSubm.

Review Action

Notes

Contractor certifies Review of Submittal, Verification of Field Measurements and Compliance with Contract Documents By________________________ Date_________________ Deviation: Yes ____ Substitution: Yes _____ No ____ No _____ (if “Yes” for either, attach supporting information.)

Legend ‐ Review Action

1 No exceptions taken

2 Furnish As Corrected

3 Revise and Resubmit

4 Rejected – See Remarks

5 Submit Specified Item * P ‐ Partial Submittal C ‐ Complete Submittal

Review By Date

Returned to Contractor By

STV‐01 60 00 Product Requirements for Procurement.doc 01 60 00‐1

SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section specifies the general requirements for Seller’s equipment and materials, unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the Specifications.

B. Product items, presented in these specifications, are included for convenience and are not complete listings of all equipment and materials to be supplied under this Contract.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Other divisions where these product requirements are applicable, unless specified otherwise therein, include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Division 40 ‐ Process Interconnections

2. Division 43 ‐ Process Gas and Liquid Handling Equipment

3. Division 46 ‐ Water and Wastewater Equipment

B. Article 7 of the Standard General Conditions, Paragraph 7.04 – Or Equals

C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The equipment and materials furnished shall be subject to the requirements of applicable portions of the following regulatory agencies:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.)

a. All equipment and devices shall be listed by and bear the Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Inc U.L. label or the CSA‐C/US label.

2. State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries

a. Equipment not carrying these labels shall be labeled or listed by an approved agency as required by State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries.

3. National Fire Protection Association


a. National Electrical Code (NEC)

4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration:

a. 29 CFR 1910 ‐ Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

5. Washington State Department of Labor and Industries

a. Chapter 49.17 RCW ‐ Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)

6. International Building Code (IBC) by International Code Council:

a. All equipment is to be designed for the project seismic zone in accordance with the latest edition of International Building Code.

b. Calculations demonstrating this requirement shall be furnished to the Engineer if requested.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable portions of the following standards:

1. ANSI – American National Standards Institute

a. ANSI Z535.1 Safety Colors

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers

a. ANSI/ASME B16.1 ‐ Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

b. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1:2013 ‐ Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

3. American Bearing Manufacturers Association:

a. ABMA 9 ‐ Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

b. ABMA 11 ‐ Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

4. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. AWS D1.1 ‐ Structural Welding Code

5. AISI/SAE – American Iron and Steel Institute/Society of Automotive Engineers

a. AISI/SAE 316 (UNS S31600) – 316 Stainless Steel

b. AISI/SAE 316L (UNS S31603) – 316L Stainless Steel


6. International Standards Organization (ISO)

a. ISO 1940‐1 ‐ Mechanical Vibration ‐‐ Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State

b. ISO 2151‐2004 (E) ‐ Noise Test Code for Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish the following data with equipment submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

1. Seismic Calculations, if requested

2. Equipment Bases: Submit material, layout with dimensions, drill pattern, mounting hardware, and anchor data.

3. Lifting Eyes: Show location on equipment layout drawings.

4. Pipe Connections: Call out pipe connection standards on all equipment layout drawings.

5. Bearings: Provide ABMA L‐10 bearing life for all equipment bearings. Show bearing lubrication location and detail on equipment drawings.

6. V‐belt Drives: Provide calculation of service factor, number of belts. Show belt, sheave, and guard arrangement on equipment drawings.

7. Drive Shaft Couplings: Provide service life, product information. Show coupling and guard arrangement on equipment drawings.

8. Nameplates: Submit material, layout with dimensions, and data.

9. Finishes: Provide coating data sheet for all factory applied coatings.

10. Noise Attenuation: Provide noise attenuation data, if requested. If enclosure is required, provide product data and details for enclosure.

11. Delivery: Submit bill of materials or shipping manifest prior to or upon delivery of products to point of destination.

1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Requests for “or equal” (substitution) determination shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the Standard General Conditions and Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

B. Single Source Products: If material or equipment is specified by only one patent or proprietary name, or by the name of only one manufacturer, it is for the


purpose of standardization, or because the Owner knows of no equal. If standardization is the reason for using one name to specify any material or equipment, substitutions will not be considered; this may be waived if substitution is determined by the Owner to be in the Owner's best interest. In other cases, the Seller may offer substitutions of products considered to be equal to or better than that specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All equipment is to be designed for the service intended, of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses, which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection and during continuous or intermittent operation.

B. All equipment shall be designed, constructed, installed and tested in accordance with the best practices and methods of the industry.

C. All equipment is to be design for the project seismic zone. Calculations demonstrating this requirement shall be furnished to the Engineer if requested.

D. Where product specifications include a named manufacturer, with or without model number, and also include performance requirements, named manufacturer’s products must meet the performance specifications.

E. Unless otherwise specified, equipment or material of the same type or classification used for the same purpose shall be the product of the same manufacturer and shall be the same model.

F. Mechanical and electrical equipment, particularly bearings, contacts and other wearing parts shall be designed for extended periods of operation without frequent maintenance or attention.

G. Motors and drives shall be furnished with safety devices including shear pins, flexible coupling guards and belt guards.

H. All machinery shall be designed such that all working parts are readily accessible for inspection and repair, and each part is suitable for the service required.

I. Cathodically compatible materials of construction shall be used for fabrication.

2.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Manufacture parts to United States standard sizes and gauges.

B. Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads.


C. Use 1/4‐inch minimum thickness unless otherwise specified or approved.

2.03 EQUIPMENT METAL BASES

A. Mount equipment assemblies on a single heavy cast iron or welded steel base unless otherwise shown or specified.

B. The base shall comprise a base plate, perimeter flange, and reinforcements.

C. Base plate shall be fabricated of steel not less than ¼” thick, unless otherwise specified.

D. Perimeter flange and reinforcements shall be designed to prevent flexing or warping under operating conditions.

E. Base plate and/or flange shall be drilled for hardware used to secure unit base to concrete pad.

F. Provide base plate and/or flange with machined support pads and tapered dowels for alignment or mating of adjacent items.

G. Provide adequate openings to facilitate grouting after installation and openings for electrical conduits in base plate.

H. Round or chamfer and grind smooth all corners.

I. Continuously weld seams and contact edges between steel plates and shapes AWS D1.1, and grind welds smooth.

J. Provide jacking screws in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in leveling prior to grouting.

K. Base shall contain provisions for lifting the complete equipment assembly during shipping and installation.

L. All equipment bases and baseplates shall be mounted on reinforced concrete pads.

2.04 ANCHORS

A. Each equipment manufacturer shall furnish an anchor bolt pattern and a schedule of the sizes of the required anchor bolts, nuts, and washers of adequate design for securing bases and bedplates to concrete bases.

B. Provide anchor bolt design of a length to allow for 1‐1/2‐inch of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural concrete, unless otherwise specified.


C. Anchor and assembly bolts and nuts shall be of ample size and strength for the purpose intended.

D. All bolts shall be standard machine bolts, with cold pressed hexagon nuts.

E. Provide suitable degauling compounds for bronze and stainless steel threaded components.

F. Any space wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a water channel, is classified as a submerged location. Bolts and nuts in submerged locations, corrosive areas, or submerged and embedded in concrete or buried in earth shall be AISI 316/316L stainless steel.

2.05 HARDWARE

A. All machine bolts, nuts and cap screws shall be of the hex head type. Hardware of parts requiring special tools or wrenches shall not be used.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all hardware shall be AISI 316/316L stainless steel.

2.06 LIFTING EYES

A. Supply all equipment weighing over 100 pounds with lifting eyes. Parts of equipment assemblies which are normally serviced separately, such as motors, shall have lifting eyes of their own.

2.07 MOTORS

A. All motors, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with Section 40 05 93 ‐ Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment.

2.08 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this section shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ASME/ANSI B16.1, Class 125.

B. All pipe threads shall conform in dimension and limits of size ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 NPT, Taper Pipe Thread.

C. Grooved pipe connections shall be in accordance with AWWA C606.

2.09 GUARDS

A. All exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards in accordance with the requirements of the WISHA and Occupational Safety and Health Act.


B. Guards shall be fabricated of minimum 12‐gauge steel and expanded metal screen to provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard.

C. The guard shall be primed with a minimum of 2.5 to 3.5 Mils of Tnemec 1 primer. Two coats of finish epoxy coating Tnemec N69 (minimum 3.0 to 5.0 Mils DFT) shall be applied in accordance with the safety color definition of ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code for marking physical hazards.

2.010 BEARINGS

A. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller anti‐friction type of standard manufacture.

B. Bearings shall be conservatively designed to withstand all stresses of the service specified.

C. Bearing shall be rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA 9 or 11. ABMA L‐10 life shall not be less than 100,000 hours for process equipment, and 50,000 hours for other equipment unless otherwise specified or approved.

D. All grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory lubricated for life, shall be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be the standard hydraulic type.

E. Oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient size to safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. and shall be equipped with a filler pipe and an external level gauge.

2.011 V‐BELT DRIVES

A. Pulleys and bushes shall be dynamically and statically balanced. Pulleys shall be separately mounted on their bushes by means of three pull‐up grub or cap tightening screws. Bushes shall be key seated to the driver shaft.

B. Belts shall be selected for not less than 150% of rated driver horsepower and, where 2 pulley sizes are specified, shall be capable of operating with either set of pulleys. Belts shall be of the anti‐static type where flame‐proof equipment is specified.

C. The belt tension device must be designed to allow the maintenance personnel to replace the belts without exerting or lifting over 40 pounds without the use of lifting, jacking or pulling tools.


D. Each belt‐driven unit shall be furnished with a complete set of spare belts. Spare belts shall be properly identified as to design, horsepower speed, length, pulley size and use and shall be packaged and stored as specified for spare parts storage and marking. Where 2 or more belts are involved, matched sets of belts shall be provided.

2.012 SHAFT COUPLINGS

A. General: Shaft couplings for direct connected electric motor‐driven equipment 1/2 HP or larger shall be Type I or Type II as specified herein. Type I couplings shall be utilized for all reversing drives, positive displacement pumps or high torque loads. Type II couplings shall be employed on all other drives. Where requirements of the equipment dictate specialized features, the manufacturer may substitute the coupling normally supplied for the service. All couplings shall be non‐lubricated type, designed for not less than 50,000 hours operating life. Coupling sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation and type of service. The use of couplings as specified herein shall not relieve the requirement for precision alignment of all driver‐driven units.

B. Type I couplings: Positive displacement pumps and reversing equipment or equipment where sudden torque reversals may be expected shall be connected to their drivers by flexible couplings which can accommodate angular misalignment, and end float, and which cushions shock loads and dampens torsional vibrations. The flexible member shall consist of a built‐up elastic member comprised of synthetic rubber, duck and wire reinforcement with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber. The flexible member shall be attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws and the flanges shall be attached to the stub fit. There shall be no metal‐to‐metal contact between the driver and driven unit.

C. Type II couplings shall be employed on normal torque, non‐reversing applications. Type II couplings shall be of the pin and preloaded neoprene cylinder type, designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration and shaft misalignment or offset. Stub shafts shall be connected through collar or round flanges, firmly keyed to their shafts, to neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins. Couplings with cylinders pinned to both coupling flanges will not be acceptable.

2.013 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Furnish nameplate for each piece of equipment and its motor fastened in a readily readable position.

B. Material: Stainless steel, 0.032 inches thick.


C. Identification:

1. Equipment: Manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, head or pressure rating, capacity, speed, impeller diameter, frame and bearing numbers.

2. Motors: Manufacturer's name, model, serial number, running current, starting current, horsepower, voltage, frequency, phase, and speed.

3. Lettering: Stamped or Etched.

4. Language: English.

D. Size: 4” wide x 2” high

E. Color: Black

F. Mounting: Four 3/16" diameter side holes.

G. Fasteners: Stainless steel screwed into inserts, anchor shields or tapped holes in equipment or base.

H. Location of all data plates shall be easily visible in the completed installation.

2.014 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS

A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, provide suitable insulation between adjacent surfaces, so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. Connections of dissimilar piping materials shall utilize dielectric unions, flanges, couplings, or bushings.

2.015 FINISHES

A. Factory Painting: On self‐contained or enclosed components, apply a factory protective paint system unless otherwise noted. Paint or otherwise protect surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly by a method, which provides protection for the life of the equipment.

B. Shop Priming: Except where field sandblasting is required, apply one or more shop coats of metal primer on surfaces to be finish painted at the site, of sufficient thickness to protect surfaces until finished. Primer shall be compatible with finish coat, Tnemec 1 or equal.

C. Rust Preventive: Machined, polished, other ferrous surfaces, and non‐ferrous surfaces, which are not to be painted shall be coated with a rust preventive compound.


2.016 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Mechanical and electrical equipment, as installed in this project, shall not create sound levels that are in excess of that permitted by WISHA/OSHA for 8 hours per day worker exposure unless otherwise noted for the specific piece of equipment involved.

B. Sound levels shall be demonstrated per ISO 2151‐2004 (E) when requested by Engineer to verify equipment sound levels.

C. If the required sound level cannot be achieved by bare equipment in its designated environment, provide sound attenuating enclosures. Sound attenuating enclosures shall have necessary ventilation to prevent equipment overheating and shall be constructed for easy removal to permit maintenance. Devices necessary for day‐to‐day operation shall pierce the enclosure or otherwise be accessible without need to remove the enclosure.

D. Equipment, which when operating has obvious excessive vibrations, shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. Baseline vibration measurements shall be made where specified.

2.017 LUBRICATION

A. An adequate and, as far as practicable, automatic means of lubrication for all working parts shall be provided. Arrange lubrication grease nipples, grease boxes and other lubrication devices so that they are readily accessible for routine greasing.

B. Make lubrication points that are not readily accessible, accessible by using grease nipples and Type 316 stainless steel tubing extension with plastic tubing where required for flexibility. Secure the nipples to the equipment at appropriate locations.

C. Use grease nipples of a consistent type; alemite button head type or equivalent.

D. A list of all required lubricants shall be provided in the operation and maintenance manuals.

E. Provide initial lubricant recommended by equipment manufacturer in sufficient quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace consumption during testing, startup, and operation until final acceptance by Owner.

2.018 SPARE PARTS

A. All equipment shall be furnished with spare parts as specified and as recommended by the manufacturer and all accessories required to place each


item of equipment in full operation, and for on‐going adjustment, repair and maintenance of the equipment supplied.

B. These spare parts include, but are not limited to, adequate oil and grease (as required for first lubrication of equipment after field testing), light bulbs, fuses, and other spare parts as required for maintenance.

C. Additional spare parts shall be furnished as specified elsewhere in the Specifications.

D. All bearings, bushings, and shaft sleeves shall be “export” packaged.

E. Packaging

1. Package spare parts to prevent damage in transit and in storage.

2. Attach an identification label or tag to the part or to its packaging which contains:

a. The part number;

b. A reference to the tag number of the equipment component, and

c. The name and contact information of the supplier.

3. Attach relevant instructions on the application and method of use of the spare part, special tool, or maintenance material.

F. Storage Container(s)

1. Package spare parts and special tools in one or more of hinged, heavy‐duty, weather and impact resistance plastic cargo box(es) for long‐term storage.

2. The box(es) shall be lockable with a padlock.

3. The box(es) shall be clearly labeled with the contents and name of manufacturer or supplier.

2.019 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. For each type of equipment to be furnished, provide a complete set of all special tools which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of such equipment. These special tools include: grease guns or other lubricating devices, valve keys and operators, and special wrenches.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTS

A. Perform factory tests for each piece of equipment where specifically called for in the section specifying that equipment. Note that factory tests are inherent in many reference standards. The requirement for a factory test in a referenced standard is hereby made a part of these Specifications. Factory tests shall be included in the contract lump sum price for the particular equipment item.

B. Conduct factory tests at the specified speeds and other conditions at which the equipment will operate in the field, except as noted.

C. Where specified, performance tests may be witnessed by the Engineer or his representative. Inform the Engineer 30‐calendar days before the test to allow arrangements to be made for witness of such tests. When non‐witnessed tests are performed, supply certified results.

3.02 PRODUCT SHIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Seller shall make its own provisions for properly delivering, storing, and protecting all material and equipment against theft, injury or damage from any and all causes until acceptance of delivery by the Owner. Damaged material and equipment shall not be used in the work.

B. All goods shall be transported and handled according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. All products shall be assembled and match marked in the shop prior to shipment.

D. All loose products shall be carefully packed in strong wooden crates or plastic wrapped as appropriate and clearly marked as to its contents, manufacturer, and supplier’s name. Complete containers or trailer‐mounted units shall be shipped with a minimal amount of loose equipment.

E. All piping shall have ends capped off prior to dispatch and securely fastened to prevent damage during transit.

F. All pumps, compressors and blowers shall be shipped on their individual base plates, complete with wooden shipping pieces and covers over suction and discharge except where they have been pre‐piped into the system.

G. Polished and machined metal surfaces shall be protected from corrosion and damage during shipment. All equipment shall be carefully packed and crated for shipment, especially electrical equipment as to prevent damage to insulation by moisture. Cover equipment having exposed bearings and glands to prevent intrusion of foreign matter.


H. Shipping, delivery, and inspections shall be performed in accordance with these specifications and Articles 8 and 9 of the Standard General Conditions.



THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

STV‐01 75 00 Testing and Commissioning for Procurement.doc 01 75 00 ‐ 1

SECTION 01 75 00 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section specifies the Special Services required by Seller for providing a Commissioning Plan and Schedule and performing on‐site installation inspection, on‐site testing and commissioning of the equipment and appurtenances specified in the technical specifications.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Other divisions requiring equipment testing and startup include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Division 40 ‐ Process Interconnections

2. Division 43 ‐ Process Gas and Liquid Handling Equipment

3. Division 46 ‐ Water and Wastewater Equipment

B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

B. Submittals include:

1. Commissioning Schedule

2. Field and Performance Testing Plan

3. Field Instrument Calibration Forms

4. Motor Testing Forms

5. Certificate of Installation and Testing Forms

6. Control Panel Testing Forms.

C. Not less than thirty (30) days before the Date of Seller’s on‐site installation inspection and assistance, the Seller shall submit to the Engineer for approval:

1. Commissioning Schedule including:

a. Dates for final factory quality control tests

b. Dates for shipment of Goods


c. Dates for Seller’s on‐site installation inspections

d. Dates for Seller’s on‐site field instrument calibration testing

e. Dates for control panel field I/O testing

f. Dates that plant control system programming will be required for testing.

g. Dates that water or sewage will be required for testing.

h. Dates for Seller’s on‐site field testing

i. Dates for Seller’s on‐site performance testing

j. Dates for Seller’s on‐site operator training

2. Field and Performance Testing Plan. Plan for Seller’s equipment including detailed procedures and start‐up requirements (water, power, etc.) for:

a. Instrumentation calibration and testing.

b. Control valve and gate testing.

c. Control panel I/O testing.

d. Field testing of all Seller supplied or controlled equipment.

e. Control system testing including all operating sequences, indications, and alarms.

f. Performance testing to verify if Seller’s system complies with the specified design criteria and operating conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FACTORY TESTING OF CONTROL PANELS

A. Perform factory tests of all control panels prior to shipment.

B. Power Distribution and I/O Checklist

1. Manufacturer shall submit a power distribution and I/O checklist for all points in the control panel. Refer to Form 01 75 00‐1.

2. The draft checklist shall be submitted Engineer for review and approval 15 days prior to the scheduled testing date.

3. The form shall include the Manufacturer's name, project name, contract name, control panel identification, testing type (factory), and date and time of the testing.


4. The list shall include for each point, the tag name of the point, a description of the point, I/O type, scale for analog inputs, rack number, slot number, point number, factory check off for the person performing the test, and comments.

C. Control Panel Power and I/O Testing

1. All system elements will be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly.

2. Control power distribution will be checked for proper wiring and voltage levels.

3. Circuits not energized shall be tested for continuity.

4. Energized circuits shall be tested through all components from the terminal blocks in the control panel to the hardware I/O memory locations in the PLC.

5. Discrete input signals will be checked by simulating the field device with a wire jumper connected to the field wiring terminals, and verifying the input is received at the correct PLC input point. Each digital point shall be set and reset.

6. Discrete output signals will be checked by forcing the PLC output using a laptop with PLC programming software, and verifying that the output changes state at the field wiring terminals.

7. Analog points shall be verified at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of range.

8. Analog input signals will be checked by simulating the instrument signal with a 2‐wire or 4‐wire current source, connected to the field wiring terminals.

9. Analog output signals will be checked by forcing a value to the PLC output using a laptop with PLC programming software, and verifying that the output changes to the appropriate level at the field wiring terminals.

D. Control Panel Functional Testing

1. After completion of power distribution and I/O testing, the Manufacturer shall conduct subsequent functional testing.

2. All control functions and all status and alarm monitoring and indication shall be demonstrated under simulated operating conditions.

3. Simulating equipment shall be provided and wired into the control system for this testing.

4. The Manufacturer shall revise, modify, and adjust the system as required during the testing period.

5. The final completed testing forms and other functional testing documentation shall be compiled into the Factory Test Report.

E. Certified Factory Test Reports shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to shipment in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Testing and inspection shall consist of individual tests and checks made on equipment intended to provide proof of performance of units and proper operation of unit controls.

B. Testing and inspection are to assure proper alignment, size, condition, capability, strength, adjustment, lubrication, pressure, flow, leakage and any other checks deemed necessary by the Engineer to determine that all materials and equipment are of specified quality, properly situated, anchored and in all respects ready for use.

C. Testing and inspection will be performed by the installing Contractor with assistance with the Seller’s on‐site representative in the presence of the Engineer’s on‐site representative. Records of all official tests will be signed by the Engineer’s on‐site representative or the Engineer.

D. During testing and inspection, the installing Contractor with assistance with the Seller’s on‐site representative shall correct any defective work that fails to comply with parameters described in the technical specifications.

3.02 SELLER’S INSTALLATION INSPECTION

A. Seller’s on‐site representative shall inspect the installation to verify that the installation is in accordance with Seller’s and other Original Equipment Manufacturer’s (OEM’s) instructions and is in compliance with the Contract Documents and approved Seller submittals.

B. Seller’s representative shall be experienced and knowledgeable in the equipment being inspected and tested.

C. Seller’s installation inspection shall consist of:

1. Process, instrumentation, mechanical, and electrical installation inspection.

2. Review of onsite issues with installing Contractor, such as:

a. Installation questions

b. Identification of components

c. Assistance with locating or source missing parts

d. Reviewing any concerns with installation and provide recommendations.

3. Generate deficiency lists for the installing Contractor

4. Review with installing Contractor onsite commissioning activities and identify resources required for tasks.


D. Process, instrumentation, mechanical, and electrical installation inspection shall include verifying at minimum, where applicable:

1. Supports anchored.

2. Equipment bases grouted.

3. Equipment and associated piping plumbed and leak tested and test form submitted.

4. Process basins and hydraulic gates leak tested and test form submitted.

5. Process basins, tanks, and piping cleaned and flushed.

6. Valves and gates open and close as required.

7. Shafts and bearings properly aligned.

8. Equipment lubricated in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Equipment and motor rotate in proper direction.

10. V‐belt tension adequate.

11. Guards in place.

12. Emergency switches and pull cords in place.

13. Power supply cables connected.

14. Power supply voltage and phase correct.

15. Instrumentation is installed properly, and control wiring terminated.

16. Instrument Calibration Forms submitted.

17. Control System I‐O Checkout Forms submitted.

18. Equipment and instrumentation is properly tagged.

19. All associated equipment and spare parts on‐site.

3.03 FIELD INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION

A. Seller’s Representative shall perform inspection and calibrate all panel and field‐mounted instruments furnished by Seller.

B. Seller’s Representative shall complete Field Instrument Calibration Form for all Seller‐supplied instruments or equipment with analog or discrete inputs or outputs.

C. Engineer’s representative shall witness all calibration testing.


D. All calibration forms must be submitted and approved prior to on‐site functional testing.

3.04 FIELD CONTROL PANEL TESTING

A. Seller’s qualified service representative shall assist the installing Contractor, who is installing the instrumentation and control wiring, to perform field testing of the complete control panels and field devices. Contractor will be responsible for checking and verifying each control panel, instrument, and equipment input and output termination.

B. Seller shall submit the power distribution and I/O checklist used for field testing with the check spaces blank to Engineer for review and approval 15 days prior to the scheduled testing date. Any modifications to the form from the factory testing form shall be noted.

C. Field testing shall include, but not be limited to:

1. All system elements will be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly.

2. Control power distribution will be checked for proper wiring and voltage levels.

3. All instruments will be calibrated and checked according to the transmitter/switch calibration forms.

4. Circuits not energized shall be tested for continuity.

5. Energized circuits shall be tested through all components from the field instrument to the hardware I/O memory locations in the PLC.

6. Discrete input signals will be checked by actuating the field device (hand switch, limit switch, etc.) whenever possible, and verifying the input is received at the correct PLC or remote panel input point.

7. For field elements that cannot be actuated, the discrete signal will be simulated using a wire jumper connected to the field device.

8. Discrete output signals will be checked by jumpering the output terminals in the control panel, and verifying that the output changes state at the field device.

9. Analog points shall be verified at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of range.

10. Analog input signals from instruments shall be checked for proper operation by simulating the process whenever possible, and verifying the analog signal is received at the correct PLC input channel.

11. For field elements that cannot be operated, the analog signal will be simulated using a current source connected at the field device.

12. Analog output signals will be checked by simulating a signal with a current source at the control panel output terminals, and verifying that the output changes to the appropriate level at the field wiring terminals.


D. A minimum of 98% of terminations must be verified, witnessed by the Engineer’s representative, and signed off on the Control Panel Testing Form 01 75 00‐1 prior to functional testing.

E. Final Control Panel Testing Form shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved prior to on‐site equipment field testing.

3.05 MOTOR TESTING

A. Contractor shall perform motor testing in accordance with Section 40 05 93 and shall submit Motor Testing Form 40 05 93‐1 to the Engineer for approval.

B. Motor Testing Form shall be submitted immediately after equipment field testing and before performance testing.

C. Check for proper rotation before running equipment.

D. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value at full equipment load.

E. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow and which exist due to equipment malfunction.

3.06 EQUIPMENT FIELD TESTING

A. General

1. Seller’s representative shall assist the Installing Contractor in adjusting and testing the equipment.

2. Installing Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of ten (10) working days in advance of running any tests, and no tests shall be accepted unless the Engineer or Engineer’s representative is present to witness testing.

3. Engineer and Installing Contractor must give permission to energize any equipment during functional testing.

4. Potable water or secondary effluent shall be used for wet tests. Water shall be supplied by the Owner and metered by the installing Contractor.

5. Seller shall furnish any special test equipment or measuring devices required for equipment testing.

6. Seller’s representative shall instruct the Owner’s operating staff in adjusting and operating the equipment during field testing, whenever practicable.

7. Field tests shall demonstrate to the Engineer that all equipment operates properly, and specified performance has been attained.

8. Equipment shall be tested in place with its own motor. The tests shall duplicate all operating modes and failure modes.


9. Should tests indicate unsatisfactory operation, conditions shall be corrected and test repeated at the installing Contractor's and/or Seller’s expense.

10. Seller’s Representative shall complete and submit Certification of Installation and Testing Form for the equipment supplied by Seller upon completion of testing. Form shall be submitted prior to, or within 48‐hours of, Seller’s representative leaving the site after the equipment installation and field testing has been completed.

11. Seller’s Representative shall also complete and submit its standard start‐up testing forms.

12. When field testing has been successfully completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, Seller’s Representative shall verify that all field testing forms have been submitted to the Engineer signifying that all systems and equipment furnished by Seller are properly installed and field tested. All equipment field testing forms shall be submitted and approved by Engineer prior to performance testing.

B. Pumps:

1. Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running pump.

2. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring.

3. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers and seal rings, replace if defective.

4. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid through the pump.

5. Include measurement of suction and discharge pressure at the pump and measurement of pumping rate by volumetric means or through a suitably calibrated meter for two points on the performance curve.

6. For adjustable‐speed pumps, conduct tests at a minimum of two speeds.

7. Seller shall furnish any test equipment or measuring devices required, which are not part of the permanent installation.

8. Submersible pump installations shall be checked before the pumps are submerged or the wet wells are filled.

9. Vibration: Centrifugal pumps shall not exceed the acceptable vibration limits in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

C. Control Valves:

1. Inspect both hand operated and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and stems.

2. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material and are properly positioned for intended service.


3. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operate without galling.

4. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged complete.

5. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.

6. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.

7. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with a surface preparation of anti‐friction lubricating paint, "Moly‐Cote" or "Fel‐Pro", or equal, after cleaning.

3.07 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Performance testing shall not commence until all functional tests have been completed and approved by the Engineer.

B. Performance testing shall consist of testing by a simulated operation, all operational equipment and controls.

C. Performance testing shall verify that all equipment will function under the required operating conditions, all interlocking controls and sequences are properly set, and the facility will function as an operating unit.

D. Performance testing is considered to be complete when all systems are operational without fault and in accordance with the specified performance requirements.

E. Seller’s service representative shall assist installing Contractor with commissioning testing of the system components.

F. Seller’s service representative shall also assist with the control system testing and software verification to insure that all control functions and all status and alarm monitoring and indications are demonstrated under all operating conditions, and that proper communications and programming between the Seller’s control system and the plant supervisory system is demonstrated.

3.08 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning of the unit processes and operation by the Owner’s personnel shall begin immediately after completion and approval of functional and performance testing by the Engineer.

B. Taking possession and use of the facility or portions of the facility, shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.


STV‐01 75 00 Testing and Commissioning for Procurement.doc 01 75 00‐10

FORM 01 75 00‐1 CONTROL PANEL TESTING FORM

CONTRACTOR NAME:

PROJECT NAME AND CONTRACT:

CONTROL PANEL IDENTIFICATION:

TESTING (FACTORY OR FIELD):

CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION VERIFICATION

TAG DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE CONTRACTOR CHECK OFF

WITNESS CHECK OFF COMMENTS

120 VAC POWER DISTRIBUTION

24 VDC POWER DISTRIBUTION

CONTROL PANEL MODULE INPUT‐OUTPUT (I/O) VERIFICATION

TAG DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE SCALE RACK SLOT POINT CONTRACTOR CHECK OFF

WITNESS CHECK OFF COMMENTS

I/O MODULE NO.

Notes: This form shall be expanded to include all applicable tag and devices and submitted to Engineer no later than 15 days prior to testing.

STV‐01 78 00 Close‐Out Submittals for Procurement.doc 01 78 00‐1

SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSE‐OUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the procedures and requirements for contract close‐out submittals including:

1. Operation and Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual)

2. Control System Programming

3. Spare Parts and Special Tools

4. Certificate of Installation and Testing

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures

B. Division 40 ‐ Process Interconnections

C. Division 43 ‐ Process Gas and Liquid Handling Equipment

D. Division 46 ‐ Water and Wastewater Equipment

1.03 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. The Seller shall furnish a complete instruction manual for installation, operation, maintenance and lubrication requirements for each component of mechanical and electrical equipment or systems provided by the Seller.

B. If manufacturer's standard instruction and maintenance manuals are used to describe operating and maintenance procedures, such manuals shall be modified to reflect only the model or series of equipment used on this project. Extraneous material shall be crossed out neatly or otherwise annotated or eliminated.

C. The O&M Manuals shall be comprised of three primary sections:


1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) procedures

2. Vendor Data Information; and

3. Controls and Drawings.

D. The O&M Manuals shall contain:

1. Summary Sheet: At the front of the first Volume of the O&M Manual, include a page with the following information:

a. Name of Seller with contact name, phone number and address;

b. Name of Seller sales representative with contact name, phone number, and address; and

c. Seller System Model Number and Serial Numbers.

2. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment List: A complete list of mechanical and electrical equipment including:

a. Supplier/sales representative contact name, phone number, and address;

b. Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) contact name, phone number, and address;

c. OEM list of routine maintenance requirements and frequency; and

d. List of spare parts list furnished with the contract.

3. Performance and Nameplate Data List: The O&M Manual shall include a list of all the nameplate and performance data required on the equipment and the furnishing of performance curves which were the results of factory tests or technical specification requirements.

4. Complete process description, operational information, control documents, and approved drawings (Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs), General Arrangements (GAs), and Electrical drawings. Drawings shall be furnished in Adobe pdf and AutoDesk AutoCAD formats.

5. HMI (OIT) screens commented and documented.

6. Lubrication Information: OEM's recommendations regarding the lubricants to be used and lubrication schedule to be followed, including a list of acceptable lubricant from at least (3) manufacturers whose products are locally available.


7. Electrical and Control Diagrams: As‐built diagrams showing internal and connection wiring of enclosure‐contained assemblies and overall system. Drawings shall be furnished in Adobe® Reader® (pdf) and AutoDesk® AutoCAD® formats.

8. Installation and Start‐up Procedures: Manufacturer's recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, troubleshooting, and operating safety. Installation instructions shall include complete assembly drawings.

9. Operating Procedures: Manufacturer's recommended step‐by‐step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping the equipment under specified modes of operation, including initial startup, automatic and manual operation, and emergency operation.

10. Preventive Maintenance Procedures: Equipment manufacturer's recommended steps and schedules for maintaining the equipment. Maintenance procedures shall include preventive, corrective maintenance, troubleshooting and detailed assembly, disassembly and repair procedures. Troubleshooting information shall include a tabular list of typical informational malfunctions and probable remedies.

11. Overhaul Instructions: Manufacturer's directions for the disassembly, repair, and re‐assembly of the equipment and any safety precautions that must be observed while performing the work.

12. Exploded Views: Exploded views of mechanical equipment shall be provided, unless specified in the equipment description as not required; when exploded views are specified as not necessary, cut or section views shall be provided with detailed callouts.

13. Parts List and Product Data: Generic title and identification number of each component part of the equipment and control devices, complete with exploded views of each assembly and weights of individual components weighing over 100 pounds.

14. Spare Parts List: Manufacturer's recommendations for parts and maintenance tools that should be stored by the Owner including:

a. Generic title, identification number and quantity of each component part;

b. Any special storage precautions that may be required;

c. Name, address, and phone number of the nearest parts supplier;

d. Identification of those parts with an anticipated delivery time of greater than two months.

15. Equipment cleaning, monitoring, and troubleshooting procedures.


16. Specific Information: As necessary where items of information are not included in the above list but are required or as otherwise required in the Specifications.

17. Warranty: Copy of all guarantees and warranties applicable.

18. Approved shop drawings and product data.

2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. A flash drive or SD card with all final control system programs and program settings shall be submitted to the Engineer as specified herein.

B. This flash drive or SD card shall be sufficient to load the program(s) and setting(s) into the controller in the event of the loss of program or memory.

C. When the startup technician returns to the factory, the programs and settings shall be reviewed with the designers of the equipment and program(s) and a final flash drive or SD card along with program loading instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer as specified herein.

D. The flash drive or SD card will be used for reintroduction of the program(s) and setting(s) into the controllers in the event that the programming and/or settings are lost.

E. Final program documentation printout with tag numbers and descriptive comments shall be submitted with the final program.

2.03 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Furnish adequate supply of spare parts, special (equipment‐specific) tools, and maintenance materials as are required during commissioning and for on‐going cost‐effective adjustment, repair and maintenance of the equipment supplied.

B. Furnish adequate supply of maintenance materials as required during the commissioning period to maintain the equipment supplied.

C. Furnish spare parts and special tools specified in other Specification Sections.

D. Packaging

1. Package spare parts to prevent damage in transit and in storage.

2. Attach an identification label or tag to the part or to its packaging which contains:

a. The part number;

b. A reference to the tag number of the equipment component, and


c. The name and contact information of the supplier.

3. Attach relevant instructions on the application and method of use of the spare part, special tool, or maintenance material.

E. Storage Container(s)

1. Package spare parts and special tools in one or more of hinged, heavy‐duty, weather and impact resistance plastic cargo box(es) for long‐term storage.

2. The box(es) shall be lockable with a padlock.

3. The box(es) shall be clearly labeled with the contents and name of Seller.

2.04 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING

A. After the equipment installation and on‐site performance testing has been completed, the Seller shall submit the Certificate of Installation and Testing for all electrical and mechanical equipment required to be tested and in accordance with the respective specifications and manufacturer standard warranty conditions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Refer to Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures for submitting procedures, unless otherwise specified herein.

3.02 PRELIMINARY O&M MANUALS

A. Preliminary O&M Manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for review within the time period indicated in the Agreement.

B. Paper Copies: Seller shall submit four (4) paper copies plus the number of copies the Seller wants returned.

C. Electronic Copies: Seller shall upload one (1) Adobe® Reader® (pdf) copy to the project ftp site. The pdf must contain a duplicate copy of all the paper copy information. The pdf shall be formatted with bookmarks for each Volume and section of the manual.

D. Comments from the Engineer and Owner will be transmitted to the Seller. Unacceptable preliminary submittals shall be resubmitted until stamped either “No Exceptions Taken” or “Furnish As Corrected”. Lack of review comments, or partial comments from the Owner or Engineer shall not relieve the manufacturer from the obligation to provide a complete O&M Manual.


3.03 FINAL O&M MANUALS

A. On or before the Date designated for On‐Site Commissioning and Training in the Agreement, Seller shall submit Final O&M Manuals.

B. Paper Copies: Seller shall submit six (6) paper copies of each Final O&M Manual shall be submitted.

C. Electronic Copies:

1. One (1) Adobe® Reader® pdf copy shall be uploaded to the project ftp site.

2. One (1) Adobe® Reader® copy shall be submitted on USB 3.0 or 3.1 flash drive within each binder of the paper Final O&M Manual (six (6) total).

3. The pdf copies shall be high quality and must contain a duplicate copy of all the paper copy information. Original documents shall be converted to pdf to create the pdf copies. Pdf copies shall not be scanned copies. The pdf shall be formatted with bookmarks for each Volume and section of the manual.

D. Copies shall all be of original quality.

E. The manufacturer's manual shall be appropriately labeled with the equipment name and equipment number as it appears in the specifications on the cover and the spine of the binder.

F. The binders shall be provided with a table of contents and tab sheets to permit easy location of desired information.

G. Manuals shall consist of one or more volumes of white, 8 ½‐inch by 11‐inch, or 8 ½‐inch by 17‐inch, 3‐ring, loose leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage.

H. Binder ring size shall not exceed 4 inches.

I. Final O&M Manuals shall incorporate all changes due to modifications, settings, and final adjustments following startup and commissioning.

J. Final O&M Manuals shall incorporate any modifications to the Draft O&M Manuals as a result of the Owner or Engineer review.

3.04 CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. Two (2) USB 3.0 or 3.1 flash drive or SD card with all control system programs and program settings shall be submitted to the Owner 15 days prior to the date for Delivery of the Goods as designated in the Agreement.


B. Two (2) USB 3.0 or 3.1 flash drive or SD card with all programs and program settings established during startup and testing shall be submitted to the Engineer on or before completion of performance testing.

C. All programs shall be accessible to the Owner. If programs are password protected, then passwords must be provided to Owner.


A. Seller’s on‐site representative and the Engineer’s representative shall jointly inspect the spare parts and special tools upon Seller’s arrival at the time of Seller’s installation inspection services.

B. Any items missing shall be delivered to the Owner on or before the date for training.

3.06 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING

A. The Certificate of Installation and Testing shall be submitted to the Engineer on or before the date for completion of performance testing.


STV-01 79 00 Training for Procurement.doc 01 79 00-1

SECTION 01 79 00 TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section contains requirements for training the plant operating and maintenance staff to ensure proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems supplied under this contract.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

B. Division 40 - Process Interconnections

C. Division 43 - Process Gas and Liquid Handling Equipment

D. Division 46 - Water and Wastewater Equipment

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Instruction shall be performed by qualified, factory-trained engineers and technicians, knowledgeable in the maintenance and operation of the various types of equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Not less than thirty (30) days before the anticipated time for beginning the On-site Training as designated in the Commissioning Plan, the Seller shall submit to the Engineer for approval:

1. Lesson Plan

C. Submit Certificate of Training Form, Form 01 79 00 attached to this Specification Section, for each type of equipment as delineated per the Specification Sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LESSON PLAN

A. A detailed lesson plan outline describing the course content and learning objectives of each training session complete with a schedule indicating the time allocation for each subject will be prepared and submitted.

B. A copy of the lesson plan outline, training manual, handouts, visual aids and reference materials shall be suitably bound for proper organization and easy reproduction and submitted to the Engineer.


C. One complete set of originals of the lesson plans, training manuals, handouts, visual aids, and reference material shall be the property of the Buyer and shall be suitably bound for proper organization and easy reproduction.

D. Seller shall also furnish four (4) copies of necessary training manuals, handouts, visual aids and reference materials to the Buyer’ staff at the time of training.

2.02 LESSON PLAN CONTENT

A. The minimum requirements for instruction are listed below.

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Familiarize with outline, catalog, parts lists, shop drawings, etc.

2. Shop Drawings: Identify equipment components, features, and layout.

3. Safety: Review safety features, requirements, lock-out, and control interlocks.

4. Operation: Describe operating procedures – start-up, shut-down, normal, and emergency.

5. Disassembly: Demonstrate removal, disassembly, assembly, installation, and storage.

6. Normal Maintenance: Instruct on normal preventative maintenance procedures and cleaning. Review maintenance task schedule.

7. Calibration: Instruct on calibration of measuring instruments, as applicable.

8. Lubrication: Identify lubrication requirements and schedule.

9. Troubleshooting: Identify checklist and instruct on troubleshooting procedures.

10. Corrective Maintenance: Provide overview of possible problems and corrective procedures.

11. Parts: Indentify parts list, procedures for ordering, equipment repairs, and replacement of parts.

12. Spare Parts: Identify those that are on-site and those that are recommended.

13. Special Tools: Identify and describe the use of any special tools required.

14. Local Representatives: Identify contacts for ordering parts or servicing equipment.

15. Post Commissioning Services: Review Seller’s quarterly on-site service visits, 24-hour telephone support service, and warranties.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be made available to operation and maintenance personnel for training on or before the date designated for Training.

B. Prior to, or within 48-hours of, Seller’s representative leaving the Site after Commissioning and Training has been completed, Seller shall submit Certificate of Training Forms for each type of equipment.

3.02 VIDEO RECORDING

A. The Buyer may record each training session. After taping, the material may be edited and supplemented with professionally produced graphics to provide a permanent record.

3.03 TRAINING SESSIONS

A. Seller’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of training of the Buyer’s staff in the operation and maintenance of the Seller’s equipment, unless otherwise specified.

B. Training shall consist of a combination of class room and field training sessions.

C. Class room training sessions will take place at the Point of Destination at the address listed in the Agreement. The Buyer will provide facilities for classroom training sessions at this location.

D. Field training sessions shall take place at the Site of the equipment delivery.

3.04 CLASSROOM TRAINING

A. Classroom training shall include the topics listed in Paragraph 2.02.

3.05 FIELD TRAINING

A. Field training shall include the topics listed in Paragraph 2.02 as applicable and shall also include:

1. Identify location of equipment and review the purpose.

2. Review the equipment function and theory of operation.

3. Identifying flow options.

4. Identifying gates and their purpose.

5. Identifying instrumentation:

a. Location of primary element.

b. Location of instrument readout.


c. Discuss purpose, basic operation, and information interpretation.

6. Discuss, demonstrate, and perform standard operating procedures and checks.

7. Discuss and perform preventative maintenance activities.

8. Discuss and perform start-up, switch-over from dry weather flow treatment to wet weather flow treatment and shutdown procedures.

9. Perform the required equipment exercise procedures.

10. Perform start-up and shutdown procedures.

11. Review normal repair procedures.

12. Identify and review safety items and perform safety procedures.

13. Perform Buyer-approved practice maintenance and repair job(s), including mechanical and electrical adjustments and calibration and troubleshooting equipment problems.



FORM 01 79 00 CERTIFICATE OF TRAINING

NAME OF EQUIPMENT:

SPECIFICATION SECTION:

NAME OF MANUFACTURER:

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE #S:

Check if

Complete

1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals available – provide one paper copy to each trainee.

2. O&Ms - Familiarize with outline, catalog, parts lists, shop drawings, etc.

3. Drawings - Identify equipment components, features, and layout.

4. Safety – Review safety features, requirements, lock-out, and control interlocks.

5. Operation - Describe operating procedures – start-up, shut-down, normal, and emergency.

6. Disassembly – Demonstrate removal, disassembly, assembly, installation, and storage.

7. Normal Maintenance – Instruct on normal preventative maintenance procedures and cleaning.

8. Calibration – Instruct on calibration of measuring instruments, as applicable.

9. Lubrication – Identify lubrication requirements and schedule.

10. Troubleshooting – Identify checklist and instruct on troubleshooting procedures.

11. Corrective Maintenance – Provide overview of possible problems and corrective procedures.

12. Parts – Identify parts list, procedures for ordering, equipment repairs, and replacement of parts.

13. Spare Parts - Identify those that are on-site and those that are recommended.

14. Special Tools – Identify and describe the use of any special tools required.

15. Local Representatives – Identify contacts for ordering parts or servicing equipment.

Owner’s Staff Receiving Training

1. Date: (Signature) Owner’s Staff 2. Date: (Signature) Owner’s Staff 3. Date: (Signature) Owner’s Staff 4. Date: (Signature) Owner’s Staff 5. Date: (Signature) Owner’s Staff Witnessed By: Date: (Signature) Engineer or Engineer’s Representative

As the Manufacturer’s Representative, I certify that I have instructed the above Owner’s personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment indicated above and have covered the above topics during training.

Certified By: Date: (Signature) Manufacturer’s Representative

STV‐40 05 93 Common Motor Requirements for Procurement.doc 40 05 93 ‐ 1

SECTION 40 05 93 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section specifies alternating current induction motors for application on equipment specified in other Sections. Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type, synchronous speed, and deviations from this section will be listed in the equipment specification. Where such deviations occur, they shall take precedence over this section.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedure

B. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements

C. Section 01 75 00 – Testing and Commissioning

D. Division 43 ‐ Process Gas and Liquid Handling Equipment

E. Division 46 – Water and Wastewater Equipment

1.03 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. CISD‐TEFC: Chemical industry, severe‐duty enclosure

B. DIP: Dust‐ignition‐proof enclosure.

C. EXP: Explosion‐proof enclosure.

D. ODP: Open drip‐proof, motor enclosure

E. RPM: Revolutions per minute

F. TEFC: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled, motor enclosure

G. TENV: Totally Enclosed Non‐Ventilated

H. T’STAT: Thermostat, automatic reset high temperature thermal protector switch.

1.04 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. Motor design and construction shall be in accordance with the latest applicable codes and standards of the following organizations:


1. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

a. ABMA 9 ‐ Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

b. ABMA 11 ‐ Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

2. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

3. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

4. NEC National Electrical Code

5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

a. NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators

6. NFPA National Fire Protection Agency ‐ National Electrical Code

7. UL Underwriters Laboratories

B. All motors shall be listed under UL recognized component file and shall bear the UL label.

C. All motors shall be suitable for installation according to the requirements of NEC.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish Shop Drawings and Product Data submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures. For each motor, including the following:

1. Descriptive information.

2. Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

3. Additional Rating Information:

a. Service factor.

b. Locked rotor current.

c. No load current.

d. Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example, variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load classification.

e. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor.


4. Motor performance curve: percent efficiency, power factor, torque, rpm, power and current versus percent of rated power output (horsepower) curves.

5. Insulation rating.

6. Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical).

7. Dimensions and total weight.

8. Terminal box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70.

9. Bearing type.

10. Bearing lubrication.

11. Manufacturer’s certified bearing life.

12. Space heater voltage and watts.

13. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection.

14. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

15. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the motor.

16. For motors provided with cords, provide complete information on the cord including length, number and size of conductors, overall diameter, materials, and ratings.

17. Motor wiring and connection diagrams for all provided external connections including power, overtemp contacts, space heaters, moisture sensors, etc.

18. Physical drawing showing electrical connection.

19. Motor terminal connection box size.

20. For motors on VFD’s,

a. Expected speed range of load being served.

b. Provide proof of inverter duty rating and insulation rating.

B. Warranties as specified herein.


C. Furnish IEEE 112 Form A‐1 for factory test of each motor.

D. Furnish Motor Testing Form 40 05 93‐1 for all motors, unless furnished by installing Contractor.

E. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Close‐Out Submittals as a part of the process equipment manuals.

1.06 BIDDING AND PAYMENT

A. The cost for furnishing motors shall be included in the cost for a specific equipment item for which the motor is a component.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant motors for a minimum of two (2) years from the day of shipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. ABB Baldor Motor Company, Fort Smith, Arkansas

B. General Electric, Fairfield, Connecticut

C. TECO‐Westinghouse, Round Rock, Texas

D. Siemens Industry, Inc., SIMOTICS, Alpharetta, Georgia

E. US Motors – Nidec Motor Corporation, St. Louis, Missouri

F. Engineer‐approved equal.

2.02 GENERAL

A. For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and accessories of a single manufacturer.

B. Motors shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1 ‐ Motors and Generators.

2.03 OPERATING CONDITIONS

A. All motors shall be suitable both electrically and mechanically to drive the connected equipment under any and all modes of operation. The speed, horsepower, torque, base, bearing, shaft, insulation, and enclosure shall be


closely coordinated with equipment requirements specified so as to provide an efficient drive without overloading, overheating, abnormal noise or vibration.

B. All motors shall be designed for industrial service and shall be capable of operating successfully under the following conditions without exceeding nameplate rated horsepower or rated temperature rise:

1. 40 degrees centigrade maximum ambient temperature to ‐20 degrees centigrade minimum ambient temperature

2. 3,300 ft. maximum altitude

3. Voltage variations to plus or minus 10% of nameplate rating

4. Frequency variations to plus or minus 5% of nameplate rating

5. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

C. Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application. Motors shall be rated for full voltage starting, NEMA Design B, normal torque, normal starting current, unless otherwise required by the driven equipment or specified.

D. Provide motors rated for continuous duty unless otherwise specified.

2.04 HORSEPOWER RATING

A. Motor horsepower, if indicated in the detailed equipment specifications, are minimum size acceptable.

B. Frame/hp relationships shall conform to the latest NEMA standards for "T" or "U" frames, and all dimensions shall meet NEMA standards.

C. Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of driven equipment at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.

D. Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty Motor): Driven equipment brake horsepower at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.

2.05 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED

A. In general, the motor speed indicated is the rated synchronous speed. Provide motor rated full‐load speeds which are compatible with the specified performance of the driven equipment.


2.06 SERVICE FACTOR

A. Inverter‐duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

B. Other Motors: 1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.

2.07 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING

A. System Frequency: 60 Hz.

B. Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor‐driven equipment specification:

Size Voltage Phase 1/6 hp and smaller 115 1 1/6 hp through 1/2 HP 115/230 1 1/2 hp through 100 HP 230/460 3

A. Suitable for full voltage starting.

B. 40 hp and larger also suitable for reduced voltage starting with 65 percent or 80 percent voltage tap settings on reduced inrush motor starters.

C. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.

2.08 EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR

A. For all motors except single‐phase, under 1 hp:

1. Efficiency:

a. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59.

b. Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with NEMA MG 1 Table 12‐12, Full‐load Efficiencies for NEMA Premium Efficiency Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or Less (Random Wound), or as indicated in motor‐driven equipment specification.

2. Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be 0.85 or as indicated in motor‐driven equipment specification.

2.09 LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS


A. Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA MG 1 tables.

B. Safe Stall Time: 12 seconds or greater.

2.010 INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Provide NEMA Class B insulation with additional nonhygroscopic moisture protection which will maintain a minimum resistance of 1.0 megohms after 168 hours of exposure at 100% humidity.

B. Class F insulation with additional nonhygroscopic moisture protection as specified above may be utilized, however, the temperature rise as measured by resistance when operating at rated service factor and load shall conform to the limiting observable temperatures in NEMA‐MGI, for class B insulation.

C. Class A insulating materials shall not be utilized.

2.011 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1.

B. TEFC and TENV: Furnish with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.

C. Explosion‐Proof (EXP):

1. TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations.

2. Drain holes with drain and breather fittings.

3. Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in accordance with UL 2111 and NFPA 70.

4. Terminate thermostat leads in terminal box separate from main terminal box.

D. Chemical Industry, Severe‐Duty (CISD‐TEFC): In accordance with Paragraph 2.019.

2.012 TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES

A. Oversize main terminal boxes for all motors by two sizes.

B. Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90‐degree positions. Threaded hubs for conduit attachment.


C. Except ODP, furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.

D. Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1, Section 1, Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430: 500 percent.

E. Provide terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.

F. Provide conduit entrance box on the right‐hand side of all horizontal motors, when facing motor end opposite shaft extension, unless otherwise required by location.

2.013 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION

A. Horizontal Motors:

1. 3/4 hp and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, or regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.

2. 1 hp through 400 hp: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.

3. Minimum 100,000 hours L‐10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined in ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.

B. Vertical Motors:

1. Thrust Bearings:

a. Antifriction bearing.

b. Manufacturer’s standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller.

c. Oil lubricated 125 hp and larger.

d. Minimum 50,000 hours L‐10 bearing life.

2. Guide Bearings:

a. Manufacturer’s standard bearing type.

b. Manufacturer’s standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller.

c. Minimum 100,000 hours L‐10 bearing life.


C. Regreasable Antifriction Bearings:

1. Readily accessible, grease injection fittings.

2. Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs.

D. Oil Lubrication Systems:

1 Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge.

2 Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs.

3 Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling.

E. Inverter Duty Rated Motors, Bearing Isolation: Motors larger than 50 hp shall have electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage.

2.014 NOISE

A. Measured in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

B. Motors controlled by adjustable frequency drive systems shall not exceed sound levels of 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.

2.015 BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

A. In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7.

B. Maximum vibration allowed shall be 0.15 inches per second velocity measured at the bearing housings.

2.016 SHAFT RUNOUT

A. Rotor shaft extension run out shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Article 4.9.7.

B. Rotor shaft extension run out shall not exceed:

1. 0.002” TIR for shaft diameter 0.1875 ‐ 1.625 inches

2. 0.003" TIR for shaft diameter over 1.625 ‐ 6.500 inches

2.017 EQUIPMENT FINISH

A. External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturer’s standard. Finish color manufacturer’s standard.

B. Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy varnish.


2.018 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1, and attached with stainless steel screws.

B. Winding Thermal Protection:

1. Thermostats:

a. Motors for 1 hp through 125 hp.

b. Bi‐metal disk or rod type thermostats embedded in stator windings, one per phase.

c. Automatic reset contacts rated 120 volts AC, 5 amps minimum, normally closed, opening on excessive temperature.

d. Leads extending to separate terminal box for motors 100 hp and larger.

C. Nameplates:

1. Provide two engraved stainless steel stamped metal nameplates (one for the motor and one for mounting in the motor starter enclosure or MCC starter bucket), with the information required:

a. Motor data required by NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and Paragraph 10.40 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings.

b. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is rated, class of insulation, service factor, bearing part number, motor connection diagram if more than three leads, voltage and wattage of internal space heaters.

c. Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and maximum allowable kVAR for power factor correction capacitors.

D. Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturer’s recommendations and of sufficient size and number for specified seismic condition.

E. Motor Leads: Provide motor leads compatible with motor insulation system, permanently identified.


F. Eyebolts: Provide drilling and tapping for eyebolts on all motors weighing more than 83 pounds.

2.019 CHEMICAL INDUSTRY, SEVERE‐DUTY (CISD‐TEFC)

A. Where required, these following requirements take precedence:

1. In accordance with IEEE 841.

2. TEFC in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

3. Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation in severe‐duty applications including high humidity, chemical (corrosive), dirty, or salty atmospheres.

4. Motor Frame, End Shields, Terminal Box, and Fan Cover: Cast iron.

5. Ventilating Fan: Corrosion‐resistant, non‐sparking, external.

6. Drain and Breather Fittings: Stainless steel.

7. Nameplate: Stainless steel.

8. Gaskets between terminal box halves and terminal box and motor frame.

9. Oversized terminal box rotatable in 90 degree increments with NPT threaded lead connection.

10. Extra slinger on rotor shaft to prevent moisture seepage along shaft into motor.

11. Bearings:

a. Double shielded bearings.

b. 150,000 hours L‐10 (B‐10) bearing life for direct‐connected loads and 50,000 hours for belted applications, minimum.

c. Regreasable bearings, positive pressure lubrication system with automatic relief fittings.

12. External Finish: Double‐coated epoxy enamel.

13. Coated rotor and stator air gap surfaces.

14. Insulation System, Windings, and Connections:

a. Class F insulation, Class B rise or better at 1.0 service factor.


b. Copper magnet wire rated at 200 degrees Celsius minimum.

c. Multiple dips and bakes of nonhygroscopic polyester wire insulation varnish designed to resist transient spikes and high frequencies produced by inverters.

15. Service Factor:

a. At 40 Degrees C Ambient: 1.15.

b. At 65 Degrees C Ambient: 1.00.

16. Safe Stall Time Without Injurious Heating: 20 seconds minimum.

2.020 INVERTER DUTY MOTORS


1. All motors supplied power by adjustable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated.

2. Inverter duty rated motors shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1‐1993, Part 31. Insulation rating shall be 2100V minimum.

3. Motors shall be suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated.

4. Provide motors with adequate cooling for the lowest expected speed for load served.

5. Provide forced ventilation where speed ratio is greater than published range for motor provided.

6. Shaft Grounding Device: Motors larger than 5 hp shall be provided with circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (SGR) to discharge shaft currents to ground, AEGIS® SGR bearing protection ring or equal. Shaft grounding device shall be solidly bonded to grounded motor frame per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.021 SUBMERSIBLE MOTORS


1. Submersible motors shall comply with NEC Class 1, Division 1, hazardous locations section 501‐8 (a) requiring explosion proof construction.


2. Wet well duty: Continuous submerged duty in water and sewage, and minimum 15‐minute duty continuous in air under full load operating conditions.

3. Dry well duty: Continuous operation in air under full load operating conditions.

4. Controls: Set controls to permit operation only when fully submerged unless specifically rated for non‐submerged dry well duty.

5. Motor construction shall be designed to withstand 100 psi water pressure at all seal locations.

6. Maximum submergence depth: 160 feet.

7. Insulation: Class F rated insulation materials or better.

8. Mechanical seals: Two silicon carbide seals separated by an oil‐filled chamber.

9. Moisture sensing probes: Two (2) probes extending into oil chamber.

10. Moisture sensing probes relay: Provide and install moisture relay, Warrick or equal.

11. Cap/Cable assembly design: Shall prevent moisture from wicking through cable. Cable entry into lead chamber shall be epoxy encapsulated.

12. Motor leads: Nonwicking type, Class F temperature rating or better and permanently numbered for identification.

13. Embedded thermostats: Two (2) normally closed thermostats connected in series and embedded in adjoining phases.

14. Provide one or more multiconductor cables of approved construction and suitable length to extend from the motor to the indicated receptacle or junction box. Provide strain relief for the power and control cables.

15. Separate cables shall be provided for power and alarm conductors.

16. Provide control wiring connection diagram and all necessary components and relays for the required and proper control and shutdown of the motor.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 FACTORY TEST

A. Factory testing shall be conducted in accordance with IEEE 112 (latest edition), Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators and Article 12.55 of NEMA MG 1. Include measurements of winding resistance, insulation resistance, no load current, starting current and torque, locked rotor current and torque. Test multispeed motors at minimum 25% to 125% of maximum speed. Measure % of rated load, power factor, efficiency, speed, and line current for each speed or load. Submit IEEE 112 Form A for each motor.

B. Perform mechanical inspection and test of shaft runout in accordance with Articles 4.9.7 and 4.11 NEMA MG 1.

C. Perform vibration test in accordance with Article 7 NEMA MG 1.

D. The winding temperature and overtemperature protection shall be tested at maximum load per Article 12.56 and 12.57 NEMA MG 1.

E. For energy efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59 and paragraph 12.60.

F. Certified copies of the test forms shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals.

3.02 PRODUCT SHIPMENT AND PROTECTION

A. The devices shall be packaged and shipped in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Motors shall be installed on common bases, stands, etc., with the driven equipment.

B. Align the motor shaft with driven equipment according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Flexible couplings for direct drive shall be accurately adjusted according to machine Manufacturer’s guidelines, use dial indicators to check alignment to minimize vibrations. Coupling spacing shall be according to coupling manufacturer guidelines.

2. Belt drive sheaves shall be align according to belt drive manufacturers instructions to minimize belt ware and axial bearings loads. Belt tension shall be adjusted to prevent slippage at rated speed and rated load.


3. Adjust axial position of motor frame with respect to load shaft according to motor manufacturers endplay adjustment guidelines recommended to minimize extensive external axial thrust loads.

C. Provide suitable personnel guards over all shafts, couplings, or other exposed moving parts.

D. Verify proper motor branch circuit and motor overload protection devices are installed in motor branch circuit as required by NEC article 430.

E. Install power cable conduits according to motor terminal box drawing and motor manufacturer’s instructions. Install motor power supply cables and connect to motor power. Motor lead cable sizes shall be selected based on NEC and local code requirements.

F. Properly ground all equipment according to manufacturer’s recommendations regarding equipment grounding and noise attenuation practices for electrical and electromagnetic interference.

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to cable and terminal manufacturer's published torque values.

H. Install wiring between motor auxiliary devices and associated controllers and protective devices according to manufacturer’s instructions and information on motor nameplate.

I. Connections of devices sensitive to electromagnetic interferes such as RTD’s, thermistors, thermal protector switches, vibration sensors and other applicable instrumentation wiring shall be made per manufacturer’s instructions. Shielded conductors shall be used and routed in dedicated conduits, all in separate conduit runs end to end.

J. Install wiring to motor auxiliaries such as motor space heaters, motor blowers motor brake coils according to NEC power wiring requirements and according to motor manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 ON‐SITE TESTING

A. Contractor shall test all motors to be installed.

B. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Verify mechanical installation is secure and all mounting hardware is tight according to manufacturer’s recommended torque specifications.


2. Inspect all electrical connections for proper termination, electrical clearances, mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

3. Verify all shipping materials and braces are removed from the shaft. Verify that the motor and the coupled load are properly aligned, rotate freely and are not binding.

4. Verify that maintenance information is posted. This information should include lubricants needed and preventive maintenance schedule.

5. Verify that proper lubricants are readily available at the site.

6. Verify proper rotation and grounding. Motors must be uncoupled during rotation check if equipment damage can occur from operating under incorrect rotation.

7. Verify that motor overcurrent protection is in accordance with the NEC.

C. Assure that equipment manufacturer's representative is present when equipment is placed in operation.

D. Contractor shall verify that the Motor Testing Form 40 05 93‐1 is included at the end of this section has been completed for all motors and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The installing Contractor shall perform voltage, current and insulation resistance tests as required to complete the Motor Testing Form. Testing shall include:

1. Measure winding insulation integrity with a “Megger” or other insulation resistance tester.

2. Apply power and verify rotation direction of the motor. Change the rotation direction if necessary and retest.

3. Measure full load operating voltage for each phase to ground.

4. Measure full load operating voltage between each phase.

5. Measure motor circuit resistance between each phase.

6. Measure full load operating current for each phase.

7. Compare motor operating amperage to nameplate value at full equipment load.

8. Verify that motor over‐current protection is functional and record overload trip setting.


E. Engineer’s representative shall witness all motor testing.

F. All motor testing forms must be submitted and approved prior to or during on‐site functional testing.

G. During functional testing, the Manufacturer shall simulate motor alarm and shutdown conditions to test that the motor protection functions correctly. These tests shall be witnessed and verified by the Engineer.

H. If the test results indicate corrective measures are required, the installing Contractor and Manufacturer shall undertake all such corrective measures until the motor installation is accepted by the Engineer. No additional compensation will be paid for corrective measures.

3.05 Training

A. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall include training on the motors with the training on motor‐driven equipment specified elsewhere.



FORM 40 05 93‐1 MOTOR TESTING FORM INSTALLING CONTRACTOR NAME: PROJECT NAME:

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NO.: MANUFACTURER NAME:

NAME OF EQUIPMENT: LOCATION/SERVICE:

MOTOR STARTER LOCATION: EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SECTION:

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA

MANUFACTURER: MODEL NUMBER:

SERIAL NO.: HORSEPOWER:

VOLTAGE/PHASE/FREQUENCY: FULL LOAD RPM:

FULL LOAD AMPERAGE/LOCKED ROTOR AMPERES: FULL LOAD NOMINAL EFFICIENCY:

NEMA DESIGN: LOCKED ROTOR CODE:

ENCLOSURE TYPE: FRAME SIZE:

INSULATION CLASS: TEMPERATURE RISE:

DUTY CYCLE: MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:

POWER FACTOR: SERVICE FACTOR:

BEARINGS: THERMAL PROTECTION:

OTHER MOTOR SERVICE INFORMATION

STARTER TYPE: STARTER MANUFACTURER/MODEL:

SPACE HEATER VOLTAGE/PHASE/WATTS OR AMPS: MOTOR OVERLOAD TRIP SETTING:

MOTOR ROTATION DIRECTION VERIFIED: MOTOR GROUNDING VERIFIED:

FULL LOAD TESTING DATA

L1 TO GROUND L2 TO GROUND L3 TO GROUND

FULL LOAD OPERATING VOLTAGE, V

INSULATION RESISTANCE, MEGAOHMS

L1 TO L2 L2 TO L3 L3 TO L1

FULL LOAD OPERATING VOLTAGE, V

MOTOR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE, OHMS

L1 L2 L3

FULL LOAD OPERATING CURRENT, AMPS

SELLER/MANUFACTURER

CHECK OFF CONTRACTOR CHECK OFF WITNESS CHECK OFF

NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

* VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READINGS SHALL BE TAKEN AT THE CLOSEST ACCESSIBLE POINT TO THE LOAD.

STV‐43 11 33 Rotary Lobe Blowers.doc 43 11 33 ‐ 1

SECTION 43 11 33 ROTARY LOBE BLOWERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer shall furnish three (3) positive displacement rotary lobe blowers as specified herein, complete.

B. The work shall include fabrication, factory‐testing, delivery, installation inspection, field testing, certification of installation and field testing, and training.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 0 – Bid Documents

B. Division 1 – General Requirements

C. Section 40 05 93 ‐ Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment


A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):

1. ABMA 11 ‐ Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

B. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA):

1. AGMA 390.01 ‐ Quality Numbering System of the Gear Classification Manual

C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

1. AISI 1043 ‐ Standard for Carbon Steel

2. AISI 8620 ‐ Steel, Single Quenched and Tempered (230°C (450°F)), Carburized

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. ASME B16.1 ‐ Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.

2. ASME B40.100 ‐ Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments


E. American Society of Heating and Air‐Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

1. ASHRAE Standard 52.2‐2012 ‐ Method of Testing General Ventilation Air‐Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

F. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials):

1. ASTM A48 / A48M‐03 ‐ Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

G. EN Standard

1. GG 20 ‐ Cast Iron

2. GGG 50 ‐ Cast Iron

H. International Standards Organization (ISO)

1. ISO 1217 ‐ Displacement compressors ‐ Acceptance Tests

2. ISO 1940‐1 ‐ Mechanical Vibration ‐‐ Balance Quality Requirements For Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State

3. ISO 2151‐2004 (E) ‐ Noise Test Code for Compressors and Vacuum Pumps

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250 ‐ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

2. NEMA MG1 ‐ Motors and Generators

J. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

1. Title 29, Part 1910 ‐ Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations

K. UL Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.)

1. All equipment and devices shall be listed by and bear the Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Inc U.L. label or the CSA‐C/US label.

2. Sound enclosure acoustic material shall comply with UL94‐HF1 for fire‐retardant, self‐extinguishing, non‐dripping materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures and including:


1. Shop Drawings and Product Data.

2. Performance curves showing capacity in cubic feet per minute, discharge pressure and blower horsepower from 0 percent to 130 percent of design capacity, dB(A) noise pressure level.

3. Performance curves of silencers and filters showing capacity in cfm and pressure drop from 0 percent to 130 percent of design capacity. If performance curves are not available, then other such data or guarantee that demonstrates that the silencers are properly sized.

4. Complete submittals for valves, gauges, filters, and all accessories.

5. Motor data as required in Section 43 05 93.

6. Complete noise attenuation data.

B. Certified Factory Test Reports as specified herein.

C. Bill of Materials per Section 01 33 00.

D. Field erection requirements per Section 01 33 00.

E. Manufacturer's warranties as specified herein.

F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 00, Close‐Out Submittals.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The manufacturer of the products specified in the Section shall be fully experienced, qualified, and reputable in the manufacture of such equipment.

B. The manufacturer shall have at least 50 installations in the United States of the model specified in satisfactory operation for at least 10 years.

C. Manufacturer shall have a qualified factory‐trained representative and service center qualified in repair of the blowers permanently located within a 300‐mile radius of the project site.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant the materials and equipment specified herein to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Field Testing.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROTARY LOBE BLOWERS

A. Manufacturer: Approved Manufacturers are listed below; however, regardless of being listed, the Manufacturer must comply with the specifications, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

1. Aerzen Generation 5 Delta Blower GM Series

2. Kaeser Com‐pak Series Package with Omega Rotary‐Lobe Blowers

3. EASYAIR® X2 ROOTS package with a RAM X™ blowers

4. Engineer‐approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for approval.

B. Equipment Schedule Number: B‐B‐1, ‐2, ‐3

C. Type:

1. Positive Displacement Rotary Lobe Blower (blower): 3‐lobe, rotary, constant volume, variable pressure type, positive displacement

D. Performance Criteria and Operating Conditions:

1. Maximum blower speed:

a. Blower: 4,000 RPM

2. Air flow capacity, maximum, Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (SCFM) (at 14.7 PSIA, 68 deg F, 36% RH):

a. New Aeration Basin: 1,100 SCFM at 10 psi differential pressure

b. Existing Oxidation Ditch: 1,800 SCFM at 7 psi differential pressure

3. Air flow capacity, minimum, SCFM: 300 at 10 psi differential pressure

4. Inlet air temperature, maximum: 100°F

5. Site elevation: 99 ft MSL

6. Inlet relative humidity (RH), maximum: 85%

E. Casing.


1. The blower casing shall be of one‐piece construction, with separate side plates or head plates that are bolted and pinned to the housing.

2. Materials shall be close‐grained cast iron ASTM A48 or EN GG 20 suitably ribbed to prevent distortion under the specified operating conditions.

3. Minimum blower casing pressure rating shall be 36 psig.

4. Inlet and outlet shall be flanged or threaded connections.

5. The casing shall incorporate a proven means of pulsation cancellation.

6. The vibration level as measured at the blower casing, in the X/Y planes of the bearings, shall not exceed 0.5”/sec RMS when operating at the specified maximum operating pressure and speed in the actual blower package.

F. Rotors

1. Each impeller shall be of the “stiff” design with first lateral critical speed at least 120% of the maximum allowable operating speed.

2. The rotors shall be three‐lobe type, and shall operate without rubbing or liquid seals or lubrication.

3. Rotor‐shaft assembly shall be drop forged in one single piece of AISI 1043 or ENGGG 50 carbon steel.

4. The rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced per ISO1940‐1/ANSI S2.19 G6.3.

G. Bearings

1. Each rotor‐shaft shall be supported by anti‐friction bearings, and fixed to control the axial location of the rotor‐shaft in the unit.

2. Regardless of theoretical bearing life calculations, the bearings shall be sized for a minimum expected life of 5 years between overhauls.

H. Timing Gears

1. The impellers shall be timed by a pair of single helical AGMA (390.01) 12 quality gears with hardened and ground teeth, with a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.70. Spur gears may be furnished upon approval of the Engineer.


2. Gears shall be mounted on the shafts with a tapered interference fit, and secured by a locknut or other Engineer‐approved means.

I. Seals

1. Seals shall be designed to prevent lubricant from leaking into the air stream as well as to prevent oil from leaking out of the machine.

2. Four rotary piston ring shaft seals, an oil slinger, and an O‐ring seal shall be provided at the point where the shaft passes through the sideplates. Alternate seal types may be furnished upon approval by the Engineer.

3. Further provision shall be made to vent the impeller side of the oil seal to atmosphere to eliminate any possible carry‐over of lubricant into the air stream.

J. Lubrication

1. Timing gears and bearings shall be oil splash lubricated. Grease lubrication of any kind shall not be allowed. An oil sight glass shall be provided on each oil sump.

2. Each blower shall receive its initial oil filling at the factory.

3. Oil shall be fully synthetic suitable for continuous discharge temperatures up to 250 degrees F or as required for application.

2.02 INLET FILTER/SILENCER

A. Each package shall be supplied with one combination inlet filter/silencer.

B. The inlet filter/silencer shall be mounted directly to the inlet flange of the blower.

C. The filter media efficiency must meet the requirements of ASHRAE 52.2 Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) 7, greater than 50% removal of 3‐10 microns and 99% removal of 10 microns and larger.

D. The silencer portion shall be located upstream of the inlet filter.

E. Filter and silencer performance losses shall be included in the blower performance calculation.

F. The filter element shall be designed to trap dirt on the inside so that upon changing, dirt does not fall into the machinery. Filters where dirt accumulates on the external surface of the filter will not be permitted.


2.03 BASE FRAME/DISCHARGE SILENCER

A. Each package shall be supplied with one combination base frame/discharge silencer.

B. The silencer shall be a chamber type design for maximum sound attenuation unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All materials must be suitable for the maximum blower discharge temperature and pressure.

C. The silencer shall be fabricated of a single shell of pressure vessel quality steel with continuous welds.

D. The silencer must be subject to a pressure test for tightness and strength at a minimum of 1.65 times the maximum blower operating pressure.

E. The silencer shall have a machined inlet connection where the discharge flange of the blower bolts directly to, with no intermediary pieces.

F. Discharge silencer performance losses shall be included by the blower vendor in the blower performance calculation.

G. The base frame shall be constructed from welded carbon steel or cast iron that shall be designed to maintain alignment of the blower internal components and the drive during operation.

H. The base frame shall be designed to resist distortion while being installed on vibration isolating mounts.

I. The blower manufacturer shall supply a stainless steel grounding lug fully welded to the base. A ground connection shall be provided between the blower base and the sound enclosure to provide grounding for the entire package.

J. The discharge silencer shall have connection for a drain.

2.04 INLET AND DISCHARGE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Each package shall be connected to the plant piping via a flexible connector located downstream of the discharge silencer. Flexible connectors shall prevent the transmission of noise and vibrations from the blower package into the piping.

B. Flexible connectors shall be a silicone or reinforced sleeve secured with four (4) stainless steel sleeve clamps. The process connection will terminate with metal ANSI flange “stub pipe”, axially restrained by the external process piping.


C. The flexible connectors shall be Unaflex “Supreme” Style 189, with standard ANSI flange connections, or Engineer‐approved equal.

D. Minimum temperature rating shall be 300 degrees F, and minimum working pressure rating shall be 25 psig.

2.05 ELECTRIC MOTOR

A. Motor shall comply with Specification Section 43 05 93, Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment.

B. Type: Chemical Industry‐Severe Duty (CISD‐TEFC) and Inverter Duty

C. Efficiency: Premium Efficient per NEMA MG 1

D. Speed, maximum: 1,800 RPM

E. Electrical service: 460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz current

F. Torque rating: NEMA B

G. Speed Range, minimum: 3:1 constant torque

H. Duty cycle: continuous

I. F3 top mounted conduit box

J. Frame type/size: NEMA standard suitable for overhung belt drive

K. Base: Pivoting to provide automatic tensioning of the belts

L. Motor Size, minimum: 125 HP

M. The motor nominal rating after any corrections for ambient conditions shall be 10% above the maximum operating bHP.

N. Blower manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating the starting torque requirement of the blower and the motor.

2.06 V‐BELT DRIVE

A. Each package shall be supplied with a v‐belt drive that shall be of the high capacity type, oil and heat resistant.

B. Drive shall be designed for a minimum service factor of 1.4 times the maximum operating BHP, or 1.1 times the motor nameplate HP, whichever is larger.


C. Belt tensioning shall be automatic without the use of any devices or interaction on the part of the operator.

D. Sheaves shall be dynamically balanced regardless of the operating speed. Sheaves shall be interchangeable for speed adjustment.

E. The belt tension device shall be designed to allow the maintenance personnel to replace the belts without exerting or lifting over 40 pounds and without the use of lifting, jacking or pulling tools.

F. V‐belts shall be banded.

2.07 V‐BELT GUARD

A. The belt drive shall be guarded in compliance with OSHA regulations.

B. Portions of the guard shall be easily removable allowing for belt inspection and replacement.

C. Guard material shall be perforated or sheet carbon steel.

2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. Each package shall be supplied with vibration isolating feet with a minimum efficiency of 80%.

B. Blower manufacture shall be responsible for attenuating noise and vibration in the blower package such that no special installation base shall be required, nor shall any additional measures be required to reduce vibrations from the blower package being transmitted to the base or the piping.

2.09 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

A. Each package shall be supplied with a single pressure safety relief valve on the discharge side of the blower mounted downstream of the discharge silencer and upstream of the check valve.

B. The safety valve shall be set to protect the blower from exceeding its maximum pressure rating, and shall be sized to pass 100% of the design flow.

C. The safety valve shall be field adjustable and spring loaded.

D. The pressure relief valve shall be housed by the sound enclosure and shall relieve into a segmented section of the sound enclosure or outside of the sound enclosure.


E. Valve shall be stainless steel or carbon steel, suitable for the maximum discharge temperature of the blower.

F. Valve shall be preset to a Manufacturer‐selected pressure setting above the maximum operating pressure to protect the blower and accessories from over‐pressurization.

G. Manufacturer: Kunkle or Engineer‐approved equal.

2.010 CHECK VALVE

A. Each package shall be supplied with one check valve that shall be installed on the discharge line.

B. The check valve shall be of the full‐bore, low pressure‐drop, flapper type design with a stainless steel body, and steel flap embedded in silicone with full‐contact seal.

C. The check valve flap shall be removable without disturbing the piping.

D. Pressure losses produced by the check valve shall be included in the blower performance calculation.

E. Check valve shall be gas tight at 15 psig.

F. Check valve have a temperature rating of 300 degrees F.

2.011 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT DEVICES

A. Inlet Vacuum Gauge

1. Provide a differential pressure vacuum gauge on the inlet of each blower.

2. Gauge shall function as a filter maintenance indicator.

3. Manufacturer and Model: Dwyer model 2040 or Engineer‐approved equal

4. Accuracy: 2% full scale

5. Range: ‐40 to 0 inches water column

6. Dial size: 4 inch

7. Temperature limits: 20 to 140 deg F

8. Enclosure rating: IP67


9. Case: Open front

10. Case material: Die cast aluminum case with acrylic cover

11. Dial: Aluminum, white background, black figures and graduations

12. Connection location: Duplicate side and back, high and low pressure taps

13. Accessories: Air filter gauge accessory kit with isolation valves

14. Gauge dial face shall be mounted on the acoustic enclosure.

B. Discharge Pressure Gauge

1. Provide a pressure gauge on the discharge of each blower.

2. Manufacturer and Model: Ashcroft Type T5500 or Engineer‐approved equal.

3. Per ASME B40.100, the full scale pressure range shall be approximately twice the normal operating pressure. The maximum operating pressure should not exceed approximately 75% of the full scale range.

4. Accuracy: 1% full scale (Grade A, ASME B40.100)

5. Range: 0 – 20 psi


7. Case: Open front

8. Case material: Stainless steel

9. Weather protection: Dry Case IP54

10. Ring type: Stainless steel, bayonet

11. Window: Shatterproof glass

12. Dial: Aluminum, white background, black figures and graduations.

13. Pointer: Micrometer adjustable

14. Movement: 400 SS (conventional)

15. Bourdon tube and socket: Stainless steel

16. Ambient temperature: ‐20 to 200 deg F


17. Process temperature: ‐20 to 250 deg F or the maximum discharge temperature of the blower whichever is greater

18. Gauge shutoff cocks: Stainless steel

19. Pulsation dampener: Stainless steel, glycerin‐filled

20. Gauge dial face shall be mounted on the acoustic enclosure.

C. Discharge High Pressure Switch

1. Provide a discharge pressure switch on the discharge of each blower to protect the blower from excessive operating pressure.

2. Manufacturer and Model: Ashcroft B‐Series or G‐Series, Type 400, or Engineer‐approved equal.

3. Operating range, inlet: ‐30 to 30 inches of water column (w.c.)

4. Operating range, discharge: 0 to 15 psig

5. Pressure setting range: between 15 and 100% of operating range

6. Factory adjusted setpoint (XFS), vacuum: ‐20 inches w.c., decreasing, Manufacturer to confirm proper setpoint.

7. Enclosure: NEMA 4X

8. Housing: Epoxy coated aluminum

9. Actuator Seal, inlet: Buna‐N

10. Actuator Seal, discharge: Viton

11. Process temperature, inlet: 0 to 150 deg F

12. Process temperature, discharge: 20 to 300 deg F or the maximum discharge temperature of the blower, whichever is greater

13. Ambient temperature: ‐20 to 150 deg F

14. Output signal: Two (2) (dual) SPDT 15A, 125/250/480 Vac (not independently adjustable)

15. Influence of ambient temperature: ± 1% of full scale/50 deg F temperature change


16. Mounting bracket: Furnish as required.

D. Discharge Pressure Transmitter

1. Provide discharge pressure transmitter on the discharge of each blower.

2. Manufacturer and Model: Huba Control Model 511, or Engineer‐approved equal.

3. Pressure range: 0 to 15 psi

4. Process connection: 1/4” male thread NPT, 303 series stainless steel

5. Protection Standard: IP65

6. Housing material: 303 series stainless steel

7. Measuring cell: Ceramic

8. Media stopper: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)

9. Seal material: Fluoro‐elastomer (FPM)

10. Process temperature: 5 to 257 °F, or the maximum discharge temperature of the blower, whichever is greater

11. Ambient temperature: 0 ‐ 185 °F

12. Output signal: 4 to 20 mA

13. Power supply: 8 to 33 VDC

14. Accuracy: ± 0.5% of full scale

15. Long‐term drift: ≤ 1% of full scale

16. Influence of ambient temperature: ≤ 0.15% of full scale/10 deg K of temperature change

17. Provide isolation valve and pulsation dampener.

2.012 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT DEVICES

A. Discharge Temperature Gauge/Switch

1. Provide discharge temperature gauge and switch on the discharge of each blower.


2. Manufacturer and Model:

a. Jumo panel‐mounted combination gauge/switch

b. Engineer‐approved equal

3. Process temperature range, minimum: 50 to 500 deg F

4. Ambient temperature: 0 to 160 deg F

5. Protection/enclosure: IP65/NEMA 4

6. Display case material: Stainless steel


8. Window: Shatterproof glass or polycarbonate

9. Display: Aluminum, white background, black figures and graduations

10. Mounting: Direct or bayonet connection

11. Stem material: 316 stainless steel

12. Output: Two (2) (dual) SPDT switches, 15A or 5A, 125/250 Vac

13. Accuracy: ± 1.0% of full scale

14. Accessories: 316 stainless steel thermowell

2.013 TERMINAL STRIP

A. The switches, transducer transmitters, and motor thermostat shall be prewired to a labeled terminal junction box inside the blower enclosure.

2.014 ACOUSTICAL SOUND ENCLOSURE

A. Each package shall be supplied with a sound enclosure covering the entire blower package.

B. The enclosure shall be designed so as to be able to install the blowers side‐by‐side with all maintenance performed from the front or back of the package.

C. Panels shall be made of galvanized steel sheet, powder coated. The skid shall be the same color as the sheet.

D. Sound enclosure acoustic material shall comply with UL94‐HF1 for fire‐retardant, self‐extinguishing, non‐dripping materials.


E. The enclosure and the blower package must be both mounted on a skid. Fork lift channels shall be included to allow for easy transportation and installation.

F. A grounding strap shall be installed between the blower base and the package skid to bypass any vibration isolating mounts.

G. Quick release panels, each less than 40 pounds, must provide easy and quick access for routine maintenance of the blower and the package components.

H. A high efficiency ventilation fan shall provide ventilation and cooling integral to the sound enclosure. Cooling fan shall be sized for sufficient heat removal from the sound enclosure, even when the blower is operated with a variable frequency drive. The cooling fan shall be independently powered separately to continue to cool the blower, even if the main blower motor is not running.

I. Electrical components, instrumentation and instrument connections shall not be mounted or interface with moving panels of the sound enclosure.

J. Blower oil sumps shall be piped to fill and drain, located at the front of the package for easy maintenance. Oil level indicator(s) shall be mounted on the outside of the enclosure, which gives an accurate oil level indication while the blower is in operation. All oil lines shall be hydraulic hose with fittings. No plastic tubing with compression fittings are allowed.

K. Blower system, including silencers and sound attenuating housing, shall be designed for operation at noise level not to exceed 80 dB(A) at 3 ft from the blower assembly in any direction in free‐field conditions. If special equipment for cooling and/or noise attenuation is required, it shall be provided by the blower manufacturer.

2.015 COATINGS

A. Coatings shall be per supplier’s standard complying with the following criteria.

B. Excepted for machined sealing and machined mounting surfaces, the package shall be painted.

C. Aluminum, stainless steel, and brass shall not be painted.

D. The supplied motor shall not be over sprayed and will be supplied with the motor manufacturer’s standard protection and paint color.

E. Painted cast iron and carbon steel shall be alkyd resin or epoxy primer and final coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 70 µm. Surface preparation shall be SSPC10 or better.


F. Sound enclosure shall be powder‐coated polyester base total dry film thickness 80 µm with a process to be proven to pass 500‐hour salt spray test satisfactory with no rust evidence.

G. Galvanized components may only be painted with appropriate surface preparation. Equipment shall be touched up in the field as required.

2.016 DATA PLATES

A. All data plates shall be furnished per Section 01 60 00.

2.017 HARDWARE

A. Hardware shall be furnished per Section 01 60 00.

2.018 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish the following spare parts and supplies:

1. One (1) spare set of sheaves

2. One (1) spare set of V‐belts

3. Three (3) spare inlet filter elements

4. One (1) spare set of shaft seals and gaskets

5. Two (2) gallons manufacturer’s standard synthetic oil. Each blower shall receive it initial oil filling at the factory.

6. Other manufacturer recommended spare parts.

B. Spare parts shall be packaged in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTS

A. Each blower stage shall be factory tested in accordance with ISO 1217 to verify flow and brake horsepower at the specified blower maximum operating conditions. Performance shall be within +/‐ 5% of specified operating conditions.

B. A package mechanical run test at the specified maximum speed and pressure shall be performed for a minimum of three (3) hours on each blower to document that the blower has achieved the specified performance.


C. A noise test shall be performed in accordance with ISO 2151‐2004, sound pressure level only, with +/‐ 3 dBa tolerance. The measurements shall be calculated to a free field environment.

D. Motor shall be factory tested in accordance with Section 40 05 93.

E. Manufacturer shall submit certified curves and certified copies of the factory test reports to the Engineer prior to shipment per Section 01 33 00.


A. The equipment specified herein shall be packaged and shipped in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Installing Contractor shall install the equipment specified herein in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect the installation as specified in Specification Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning and as specified herein.

C. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 8 hours for installation inspection.

D. Manufacturer’s installation inspection shall at minimum consist of verifying the following:

1. Installation is in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation checklist and recommendations.

2. Blower and motor nameplate data matches approved submittal.

3. Concrete foundation is even and base alignment has been checked and leveled with alignment plates.

4. Base is properly anchored (and grouted if required).

5. The enclosure and base frame are properly grounded.

6. Blower and motor alignment is checked and adjusted as required.

7. Pipes and equipment are properly supported and secured.

8. Valves are properly installed. Check valve flap moves freely. Pressure relief valve is properly set.


9. Flexible couplings are provided in piping where required.

10. Piping is properly cleaned and pressure tested.

11. Oil levels in sight glass and at the blower are at proper levels.

12. Blower rotational direction is correct.

13. V‐belt tension is within the recommended range and v‐belt guard is installed.

14. Insulation strips are installed at the exhaust duct and the foam mat is placed in the acoustic hood, as required.

15. The fan for the acoustic hood moves freely.

16. Instrumentation is properly installed, secured, and wired to control system. Pulsation dampeners, isolation valves, and thermowells are installed where required.

17. Motor is properly installed in accordance with Section 40 05 93 and motor manufacturer’s instructions.

3.04 FIELD TESTING

A. On‐site field testing shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning. Testing shall also include:

1. Testing the emergency stop switch for automatic shutdown.

2. Testing the inlet high vacuum and discharge high pressure switches for automatic shutdown.

3. Testing the discharge high temperature switch contacts.

4. Verifying that the discharge pressure transmitter signals correspond with gauge readings.

5. Testing the motor thermostat contacts.

6. Testing the motor current overload setting for automatic shutdown.

7. Testing the discharge pressure relief valve for the proper setting.

8. Measuring the speed, inlet vacuum, discharge pressure, air flow, temperature, rotor speed, noise level, motor current, and voltage at a minimum of four speeds within the blower performance range, including


the minimum and maximum specified operating conditions. Noise levels shall be measured with a sound level meter that is properly calibrated and complies with the accuracy requirements of OSHA’s noise standard, 29 CFR 1910.95. Each blower shall be operated a minimum of 4 hours during the testing.

9. Measuring the vibration of the blower and motor at the minimum and maximum specified operating conditions.

10. Documenting Manufacturer’s recommended variable frequency drive settings including the minimum speed setting, current overload setting, and motor acceleration and deceleration intervals.

B. Motor field testing shall comply with Section 40 05 93.

C. Noise test: Noise attenuation provisions shall be tested in the field by the Manufacturer’s qualified service representative. Engineer shall witness test. Unsatisfactory compliance shall be corrected.

D. Manufacturer’s service representative shall certify the installation and field testing in accordance with Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning Procedures, and shall submit the completed Certificate of Installation and Field Testing Form at the end of this Section.

E. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 12 hours of on‐site testing of the blowers – 4 hours per blower.

3.05 TRAINING

A. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of training of the Owner’s staff in the operation and maintenance of the equipment specified herein.

B. Training shall meet the requirements of 01 79 00, Training.



FORM 43 11 33‐1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF BLOWERS MANUFACTURER NAME: PROJECT NAME:

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NO.: NAME OF EQUIPMENT:

LOCATION/SERVICE: SPECIFICATION SECTION:

MANUFACTURER: DISCHARGE SIZE (INCHES):

MODEL NUMBER: SERIAL NO.:

AIR FLOW (CFM): DELTA PRESSURE (PSI): BLOWER RPM: GEAR SIZE (INCHES):

MOTOR HP: VOLTS: HERTZ: PHASE:

FLA: MOTOR RPM: SERVICE FACTOR: MOTOR EFFICIENCY:

INSTALLATION INSPECTION (CHECK IF VERIFIED)

PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: PIPE CLEANED: PIPE PRESSURE TESTED/ TEST PRESSURE:

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SETTING

BASE ANCHORED/ GROUTED/LEVEL:

PRESSURE/TEMP GAUGES: EXPANSION COUPLINGS: CHECK VALVE:

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: LUBRICATION: PROPER ROTATION: V‐BELT TENSION:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: MOTOR/ENCLOSURE GROUNDING:

GUARDS/SAFETY: ENCLOSURE INTEGRITY/ VENTILATION:

PERFORMANCE TEST

SPEED

INLET PRESSURE (PSI/IN.)

DISCHARGE PRESSURE (GAUGE) (PSI/IN.)

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

(TRANSDUCER) (PSI/IN.)

DISCHARGE AIR FLOW (CFM)

DISCHARGE TEMP. (DEG. F)

BLOWER SPEED (RPM)

NOISE (DBA)

CURRENT (AMPS)

VOLTAGE (VOLTS)

0% (STATIC) 0 0

0

MIN.

50% /30 HZ

75% /45 HZ

100%/60 HZ VIBRATION TESTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES VFD SETTINGS

BLOWER MAX. VIBRATION (IN/S RMS): VFD MINIMUM SPEED SETTING (HZ):

MOTOR MAX. VIBRATION (IN/S RMS): VFD OVERLOAD SETTING (AMPS):

E‐STOP SWITCH TAG NO.: VFD TIME TO ACCELERATION SETTING (S):

E‐STOP SWITCH SHUT OFF/ALARM CHECK: VFD TIME TO DECELERATION SETTING (S):

DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH TAG. NO. DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SWITCH TAG. NO.:

PRESSURE SWITCH SHUT OFF/ALARM CHECK: TEMPERATURE SWITCH SHUT OFF/ALARM CHECK

SELLER/MANUFACTURER

CHECK OFF INSTALLER CHECK OFF WITNESS CHECK OFF

NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

STV-43 25 00 Submersible Screw Centrifugal Pumps.doc 43 25 00 - 1

SECTION 43 25 00 SUBMERSIBLE SCREW CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer shall furnish three (3) wet pit screw centrifugal pumps, with motors, discharge elbows, sliding guide brackets, discharge flanges, and lifting chain/cables and all appurtenances as specified herein.

B. The work shall include fabrication, factory testing, delivery, installation inspection, field testing, certification of installation and field testing, and training.

1.02 RELATED WORK



C. Section 40 05 93 - Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment


A. American Iron and Steel Institute/Society of Automotive Engineers (AISI/SAE)

1. AISI/SAE 316 (UNS S31600) – 316 Stainless Steel

2. AISI/SAE 316L (UNS S31603) – 316L Stainless Steel

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings

2. ASTM A532 / A532M - Standard Specification for Abrasion-Resistant Cast Irons

D. Hydraulic Institute (HI/ANSI)

1. HI/ANSI 9.6.4 - Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Analysis and Allowable Values


2. HI/ANSI 14.6 - Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests

3. HIC - Hydraulic Institute Test Code

E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

1. SSPC-SP 10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures and including:


2. Performance curves showing capacity in gallons per minute (GPM), net positive suction head (NPSH), total dynamic head, and pump horsepower from 0 GPM to 110 percent of design capacity.

3. Product data on all accessories including discharge elbows, sliding guide brackets, discharge flanges, access frames and guides.

4. Submittal data on motors as required in Section 40 05 93, Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment.



D. Manufacturer's warranties as specified herein.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 00, Close-Out Submittals.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS



C. Manufacturer shall have a qualified factory-trained representative and service center qualified in repair of the pumps permanently located within a 300-mile radius of the project site.


1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant the materials and equipment specified herein to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of two (2) years from the Date of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Field Testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Hayward Gordon, Ontario, Canada, XCS Series Immersible

B. Hidrostal Pumps, Aurora, IL, E5K Series Immersible

C. Engineer-approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for approval.

2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Provide pumps as specified herein and shown on the drawings:

1. Pump Schedule Number P-A-MLR-1,-2,-3

2. Capacity at TDH, GPM 883

3. Total Dynamic Head, feet 30

4. Suction and Discharge Size, inches 6

5. Impeller Speed, RPM, maximum 1,500

6. Motor Horsepower, minimum 10

7. Power 3 Phase, 60 Cycle, 480 Volt

8. Minimum B-10 Bearing Life, hours 100,000

2.03 DESIGN

A. Pumps shall be heavy-duty construction for continuous operation.

B. Type: single passage, clog free pump, screw centrifugal impeller.

C. Solids: Passes 3-inch solids, conveys rags or other fibrous material without clogging.


D. The leading edge of the impeller vane shall blend into the impeller body in such a way that any rag or other fibrous material caught on the leading edge and folded over both sides of the vane will be unfolded and released as the textile follows the flow-stream through the pump.

E. The impeller flange or impeller shall contain a spiral groove on the rear face so that any solids in the pumped media are discharged from the space between the backplate and the rear of the impeller.

F. Geometry of the impeller and suction piece shall be conical.

G. Suction and discharge flanges: ANSI Class 125-lb.

H. Sealing. All mating surfaces in pump casing and in motor housing shall be machined and fitted with nitrile O-rings for watertight seal.

2.04 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Pump volute, backplate and suction piece housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48 Class 30.

B. Impeller: High chrome iron, ASTM A532 Class III Type A1, minimum 450 Brinell hardness.

C. Liner: Replaceable, High chrome iron, ASTM A532 Class III Type A1, minimum 450 Brinell hardness, externally adjustable by stainless steel regulating screws or shims.

2.05 IMMERSIBLE MOTOR

A. Explosion-proof design, approved by Factory Mutual for uses in Class I, Groups C&D, hazardous locations.

B. Type: Immersible, inverter duty

C. Service: Full-load, continuous operation either completely dry or fully submerged in the pumped liquid of up to 65-foot depths.

D. Motor housing: "Air-filled", watertight

E. Cooling system: Heat-exchanger with a shaft-mounted cooling pump circulating oil from a jacket surrounding the stator housing to a heat-exchanger surface cast into the pump backplate. The circulating oil shall transfer excess motor heat directly to the pumped media inside the pump volute, without the need of submergence for motor cooling. The circulating oil shall provide adequate motor cooling at any continuous power output up to and including rated powers in an ambient temperature of up to 40 degrees C.


F. Alternately, motors shall dissipate heat directly by convection from the exposed stator housing to surrounding ambient air, without the need of submergence. The motor surface shall be sized for adequate motor cooling at any continuous power output up to and including rated power in an ambient temperature of up to 40 degrees C.

G. Motor stator windings and leads shall be insulated with moisture-resistant Class F insulation for operation at temperatures up to 155 degrees Celsius.

H. Motors shall have the stator varnish applied by the "vacuum-pressure impregnation" method to ensure thorough and complete varnish penetration. The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the stator housing.

I. Motor cable-entry sealing assembly shall consist of the following five components to ensure a positive, redundantly watertight seal:

1. The sealing components shall be mechanically isolated from cable strains by a two-piece restraining clamp, which will securely grip the cable above the moisture-sealing components and bear any mechanical forces applied to the cable.

2. The cable moisture seal shall consist of an elastomer grommet, prevented from extruding past the cable by stainless-steel retaining washers on either side. The grommet shall be compressed tightly against the cable outside diameter (and the entry assembly inner diameter) by a screwed follower gland.

3. Each individual conductor shall be interrupted by a solid-copper isolation dam to prevent wicking of moisture through the conductor strands.

4. The cable insulation shall be sealed by an epoxy poured into the cable entry and totally encapsulating the stripped-back insulation and the individual copper dams. This poured epoxy seal shall also function as a redundant seal for the cable outside diameter.

5. The cable free end shall be sealed from moisture-entry during shipping, storage, and prior to connection to the control panel by a plastic sleeve securely clamped over the cable end.

J. Shaft sealing shall be by independently-mounted, tandem mechanical seals contained in an oil chamber that is formed as an intrinsic part of the motor frame and allows the seals to be completely submerged in and lubricated by the oil bath.

1. The mechanical seal nearest the bearing shall utilize carbon/ceramic faces, and shall isolate the seal cooling oil from the motor frame.


2. The mechanical seal nearest the impeller shall be a stainless steel or rubber bellows-type construction firmly attached to the rotating face and clamped to the shaft, to prevent contaminants from contacting the stainless-steel spring which loads the seal face. The seal faces shall be a solid tungsten-carbide rotating face running against a solid silicon-carbide stationary face.

3. The mechanical seal nearest the impeller shall be contained in a seal chamber formed by the impeller flange and a recess cast into the motor frame. To prevent debris from entering the chamber and to prolong the mechanical seal life, a flush port shall be provided so that an optional external water flush can be supplied directly into the seal chamber.

4. The mechanical seal nearest the impeller shall be isolated from contaminants in the pumped media by a labyrinth-fit between the backside of the impeller and the backplate, as well as by pump-out grooves cast into the impeller back shroud and into the backplate, to minimize debris reaching the shaft seal.

K. The thrust bearings shall be designed to take the full axial load of the impeller.

L. Motors shall comply with Section 40 05 93.

M. Protection Devices:

1. Three thermistor type thermal sensors embedded in the stator windings, wired in parallel to an external relay.

2. Conductivity probe to monitor the moisture content of the oil in the chamber between the outer and the inner mechanical seals wired to a separate protective circuit.

2.06 MOUNTING AND RETRIEVAL

A. Fast Out: Pump cantilevered from discharge flange above floor and supported with:

1. 316 stainless steel base and anchor bolts.

2. 90-degree cast iron elbow with ANSI Class 125-pound flange.

3. Mounts for two stainless steel rails of schedule 40 pipe (provided by others), which will guide the pump into position.

4. Metal-to-metal interlocking guide shoe flange sealed by a leakproof nitrile rubber ring.


B. Each pump shall be fitted with a minimum of 30 feet of stainless steel lifting chain or cable. The working load of the lifting system shall be 50 percent greater than the pump unit weight.

2.07 COATING

A. Exposed cast iron components shall receive surface preparation per SSPC-SP-10 followed by:

1. Primer, open recoat window, Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane Primer, 2.5 - 3.5 mils dry film thickness.

2. First coating: Moisture cure urethane, Tnemec Series 446 PermaShield MCU, 7.0 - 10.0 mils dry film thickness.

3. Second coating: Moisture cure urethane, Tnemec Series 446 PermaShield MCU, 7.0 - 10.0 mils dry film thickness.

B. Alternate coating systems of equivalent performance and thickness may be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2.08 DATA PLATES


2.09 HARDWARE

A. Hardware shall comply with Section 01 60 00 where applicable. All exposed hardware shall be AISI 316/316L stainless steel.

2.010 SPARE PARTS

A. One (1) set of Manufacturer’s standard spare parts shall be furnished.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTS

A. The pumps and motors shall be given an operational and factory performance test in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standard HI/ANSI 14.6.

B. Motor shall be factory tested in accordance with Section 40 05 93.

C. Manufacturer shall submit certified curves and certified copies of the factory test reports to the Engineer prior to shipment per Section 01 33 00.




3.03 INSTALLATION


B. Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect the installation as specified in Specification Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning and shall also verify:

1. Pump base and discharge elbow are properly installed, grouted, secure, and anchor bolts tightened.

2. Discharge piping is properly supported separate from pump.


3.04 FIELD TESTING

A. On-site field testing shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning. Testing shall also include:

1. Testing the motor thermistor and conductivity probe contacts.


3. Testing the high and low level switches for shut off and alarm indication.

4. Measuring the speed, discharge pressure, flow, motor current, and voltage at a minimum of four speeds within the pump performance range, including the minimum and maximum specified operating conditions.

5. Documenting Manufacturer’s recommended variable frequency drive settings including the minimum speed setting, current overload setting, and motor acceleration and deceleration intervals.


C. Manufacturer’s service representative shall certify the installation and field testing in accordance with Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning Procedures, and shall submit the completed Certificate of Installation and Field Testing Form at the end of this Section.


D. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site testing of the pumps.

3.05 TRAINING


B. Training shall meet the requirements of Section 01 79 00, Training.



FORM 43 25 00-1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF SUBMERSIBLE SCREW CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

SELLER NAME: PROJECT NAME:



MANUFACTURER: SUCTION/DISCHARGE SIZE (INCHES):


DESIGN FLOW (GPM): TDH (FEET/PSI): PUMP RPM: IMPELLER SIZE (INCHES):



INSTALLATION INSPECTION (CHECK IF VERIFIED) PIPE SUPPORTS: PIPE FLUSHED: PRESSURE TEST: TEST PRESSURE: BASE ANCHORED/ GROUTED: PRESSURE GAUGES: ISOLATION/CHECK VALVES: PROPER ROTATION:

LUBRICATION: PUMP DISCHARGE SHOE FLANGE SEALED:

PUMP DISCHARGE FLANGE AND GUIDERAILS SECURE:

CONDUCTIVITY PROBE:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: MOTOR GROUNDING: MOTOR THERMISTOR: OTHER:

MISSING OR DAMAGED PARTS/TOOLS (LIST):

PERFORMANCE TEST

SPEED

INLET PRESSURE

GAUGE (PSI/FT)

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

GAUGE (PSI/FT)

DISCHARGE FLOW (GPM)

PUMP SPEED (RPM)

VFD OUTPUT

CURRENT (AMPS)

VFD OUTPUT

VOLTAGE (VOLTS)

0% (STATIC) N/A 0 0 0 0

MIN. N/A

50% / 30 HZ N/A

75% / 45 HZ N/A

100% / 60 HZ N/A PUMP/MOTOR VIBRATION TEST VFD SETTINGS

HIGH LEVEL SWITCH TAG NO.: VFD MINIMUM SPEED SETTING (HZ):

SWITCH SHUT OFF/ALARM CHECK: VFD OVERLOAD SETTING (AMPS):

LOW LEVEL SWITCH TAG NO.: VFD TIME TO ACCELERATION SETTING (S):

SWITCH SHUT OFF/ALARM CHECK: VFD TIME TO DECELERATION SETTING (S):

As the Manufacturer’s Representative, I certify that I have inspected the installation of the equipment, the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, I have witnessed all applicable field tests, all proper adjustments have been made, the equipment meets the performance requirements of the Contract Specifications, and the equipment is ready for plant commissioning and operation.

MANUFACTURER’S REP CHECK OFF CONTRACTOR CHECK OFF WITNESS CHECK OFF

NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

STV‐46 21 33 In‐Channel Rotary Drum Screen.doc 46 21 33 ‐ 1

SECTION 46 21 33 IN‐CHANNEL ROTARY DRUM SCREEN

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer shall furnish one (1) in‐channel rotary drum screen.


1.02 RELATED WORK





A. The work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable provisions of the following standards:

B. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA)

C. AISI/SAE – American Iron and Steel Institute/Society of Automotive Engineers



D. ASTM ‐ American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM A193 ‐ Standard Specification for Alloy‐Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

2. ASTM A276 ‐ Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

3. ASTM A312 / A312M ‐ Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes


4. ASTM A351 ‐ Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure‐Containing Parts

5. ASTM A403 / A403M ‐ Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

6. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold‐Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar

7. ASTM A967 ‐ Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1 ‐ Structural Welding Code

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. NEMA 250 ‐ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures, and including:


2. Certification that the torque and thrust rating for speed reducer are in accordance with AGMA standards.

3. AWS welding inspector certifications in accordance with paragraph 2.013G.

4. Hydraulic performance curves showing the relationship of headloss versus the full range of downstream liquid depths for the maximum and average hydraulic capacity noted in paragraph 2.02.

5. Data from three (3) separate tests proving compliance of the screen with the "Paint Filter Test" as described in EPA Publication SW 846 Method 9095B.

6. Submittal data on motors as required in Section 40 05 93.


B. Certified Factory Test Report as specified herein.





1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Manufacturer shall be of established good reputation regularly engaged in the fabrication of such equipment.


C. Manufacturer shall have a representative permanently located within a 300‐ mile radius of the project site, and a factory‐trained representative and service center qualified in the repair of the equipment specified herein permanently located within the continental United States.

1.06 WARRANTY



A. Lakeside Raptor Rotating Drum Screen Model 42RDS by Lakeside Corporation, Bartlett, IL

B. Huber Rotamat Rotating Screen Model 1000 by Huber Technology, Huntersville, NC

C. Engineer‐approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for approval.

2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


A. Each unit shall consist of a rotating screen basket, concentric screw conveyor, dewatering and compaction section, drive assembly, pivoting support structure, spray wash systems, screenings bagger attachment, weather protection system, spare parts, and electrical control panel, and level sensing system.

B. Screens other than rotating cylindrical screens will not be considered for this

project.

C. Design Criteria

1. Number of Rotating Screens: 1

2. Average Flow per Screen, MGD: 0.3

3. Maximum Hydraulic Capacity per Screen, MGD: 3.3

4. Maximum Upstream Liquid Level, inches: 30

5. Maximum Clean Water Headloss, inches: 23

6. Nominal Screening Basket Diameter, inches: 41

7. Screen Basket Type: Perforated Plate

8. Orifice Diameter, inches: 0.12 (3 mm)

9. Screening Channel Width, inches: 42

10. Nominal Screw Conveyor Diameter, inches: 10

11. Minimum Screen Invert to Discharge Height, inches : 110

12. Speed Reducer Minimum Service Factor: 1.63

13. Speed Reducer Minimum Torque Rating, in.‐lb: 26,900

14. Speed Reducer Minimum Thrust Rating, lbf: 8,400

15. Drive Motor Size, hp: 2

16. Electrical Power Characteristics, VAC‐Phase‐Hertz: 460/3/60

17. Motor and Solenoid Valve Electrical Classification: Class I, Div 1 – Group D Explosion‐proof)

18. Maximum Spray Wash System Flow Rate, gal/min: 20


19. Minimum Spray Wash System Pressure, psig: 80

20. Liquid Level Sensing System Type: Float switch

21. Electrical Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X SS

22. Channel Depth: 54 inches (excluding grout for screen)

2.03 PERFORMANCE

A. The drum screen shall be designed to handle the maximum hydraulic capacity noted in paragraph 2.02 with the maximum upstream liquid level noted in paragraph 2.02. This maximum upstream liquid depth includes the maximum allowable clean water headloss noted in paragraph 2.02.

B. The screen basket type shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02 with screen openings as noted in paragraph 2.02.

C. The average screen flow through velocity shall not exceed 3.3 ft/sec (1.0 m/sec) under any flow condition up to the maximum hydraulic capacity noted in paragraph 2.02. The screen design shall minimize solids deposition in the channel.

D. The rotating drum screen shall include a rotating cylindrical drum with an integral screw conveyor and press. The rotating drum screen shall use a single drive for screening, conveying, dewatering, and compressing screening material.

E. The operation of the rotating drum screen shall be automatically initiated at a preset high liquid level. Screens that operate continuously or via timer only will not be acceptable. The rotating drum screen shall remove solids from the wastewater flow and shall deposit them into the concentric screw conveyor trough. The screenings shall be transported up the screw conveyor and through a compression chamber.

F. The screening equipment shall produce dewatered screenings capable of passing the EPA Paint Filter Test as described in method 9095B of EPA Publication SW‐486.

G. The control system shall be designed so that the cleaning characteristics of the screen and spray wash systems can be changed via the programmable logic controller. Systems that do not offer this feature will not be considered for this project.

2.04 SCREENINGS WASHING


A. Each screen shall be furnished with a dual screenings spray wash system to flush organic material from the screenings prior to compaction and dewatering. The dual screenings washing systems shall be designed to minimize the amount of organic material in the screenings and to maximize solids dryness after compaction and dewatering. The dual screenings washing systems shall include:

1. Lower basket wash system shall be located on the outside of the basket with a minimum of one (1) spray wash header with multiple nozzles to remove collected screenings from the inside of the basket into the screenings collection trough. This wash system shall pre‐wash the screenings to remove fecal material and to prevent material.

2. Screenings wash system shall be located just prior to the beginning of the compaction zone after maximum maceration of the screenings by the screenings transport screw conveyor. At the maximum wash water flow rate noted in paragraph 2.02, the screw conveyor shall be designed to prevent screenings from being washed down the screenings transport tube to the basket.

2.05 ODOR CONTROL

A. To minimize odors and nuisance insect populations, the rotating drum screen transport system and compaction/dewatering system shall be completely enclosed.

B. The spray wash systems shall be completely enclosed to prevent spray, aerosols, and leakage from coming in contact with the operating floor.

2.06 MATERIALS QUALITY

A. All fabricated components of the screen shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel including the screen basket, screw conveyor, outer screw conveyor housing and support structure. Materials thicknesses identified are the minimum requirements for this project. Materials with increased thicknesses are acceptable.

B. All fabricated components shall be manufactured in the United States.

2.07 ROTATING DRUM SCREEN

A. Screen

1. The rotating drum screen shall be designed and built to withstand maximum possible static and hydraulic forces exerted by the liquid to the screen. All structural and functional parts shall be sized for the loads encountered during the screening, conveying and pressing operations.


All submerged components and all components of the rotating drum screen in contact with the screened solids shall be of stainless steel construction.

2. The screen basket shall be of a cylindrical shape and installed in the channel parallel to the direction of liquid flow.

3. The diameter of the screening basket shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02.

4. The basket diameter shall be matched with a sufficient screen opening size and spacing to ensure the maximum hydraulic capacity flow rate noted in paragraph 2.02 is achieved and to provide less than the maximum headloss noted in paragraph 2.02.

5. The screen basket shall be fabricated of material as noted in paragraph 2.02. The basket shall have perforated plate openings with the size as listed in paragraph 2.02 and having a minimum thickness of 11 gauge and a centerline‐to‐centerline perforated hole spacing of 3/16‐inch with staggered centers. The basket screen material shall be bolted to 1‐inch thick minimum upper and lower stainless steel support rings with a sufficient number of bolted stainless steel strengthening spokes to allow for field replacement of the basket. Stainless steel lifting vanes shall be welded to the inside of the basket to lift the screenings out of the flow and to deposit them into the screenings collection hopper. Lifting vanes shall be fabricated from 10‐gauge thick minimum stainless steel.

6. The width of the screening chamber shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02.

7. A seal plate shall be provided to enclose the circular screen and the rectangular concrete channel. The side seal plate shall be fabricated of 10 gauge minimum stainless steel and shall be of sufficient height to prevent bypassing of flow around the screen at the maximum hydraulic capacity flow rate noted in paragraph 2.02.

8. The screen shall be provided with a pivoting support stand allowing for easy removal of the screen basket from the channel for maintenance purposes. To ensure operator safety during servicing of the screen, supports and support stand shall be fabricated from 1/4 inch minimum stainless steel shapes and plates.

9. A stainless steel lower screen basket support fabricated of 1/4‐inch sections shall be provided to support the basket in the channel. Support shall allow vertical adjustment of the screen basket so that it does not rest on the channel floor.


B. Screenings Conveyor and Screenings Dewatering Press

1. The screenings screw conveyor transport tube nominal diameter shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02 with a minimum Schedule 10S pipe wall thickness. A minimum of three (3) anti rotation bars with 1/4 inch minimum thickness shall be welded to the inside of the transport tube along the longitudinal axis from the compaction zone to the beginning of the screenings collection trough. The screenings screw conveyor shall not depend on support from the anti‐rotation bars during normal operation.

2. A basket support plate flange shall be a minimum of 3/4‐inch and shall be welded to the lower end of the screenings transport tube complete with strengthening gussets to attach the screen basket and to provide for attachment of the screenings collection hopper. A 1/2‐inch minimum thick drive support flange shall be welded to the upper end of the screenings transport tube for attachment of the drive assembly. After all welding of components to the screenings transport tube have been completed the fabrication shall be placed in a lathe to machine the face of the upper drive flange, to machine the face of the lower basket support plate flange for mating the basket and to machine the lower bearing housing in accordance with paragraph 2.013F. A 1/2‐inch thick minimum drive assembly adaptor stainless steel flange shall be provided to bolt to the upper drive support flange.

3. The dewatering screw shall be designed to transport and dewater the screened material. Screw flights shall be stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 3/16‐inch with increased 3/8‐inch thick minimum thickness in the screenings collection trough and in the compaction and dewatering zone. Flight pitch distance shall be a maximum in the screenings collection hopper and shall be reduced along the length of the screenings transport tube to a minimum pitch distance in the compaction zone. Constant pitch screenings screw conveyor designs will not be acceptable for this project.

4. The upper and lower screenings conveyor torque tube shall be fitted with a solid stainless steel stub shaft. The shafts and screenings screw conveyor torque tube shall be accurately machined in accordance with paragraph 2.013F to allow a shrink‐fit and welded design for the upper drive end stub shaft and lower tail bearing stub shaft. Bolting the stub shafts to the screening transport screw conveyor torque tube will not be acceptable for this project.

5. The lower end of the screenings conveyor and rotating drum screen shall be supported by a sealed, self‐lubricated lower polymeric composite


sleeve bearing with stainless steel wear sleeve. Metallic‐based lower bearings will not be acceptable for this project. The lower bearing shall not take any thrust load from the screw conveyor. The stainless steel bearing housing shall be field replaceable and shall be machined in accordance with paragraph 2.013F to mate with the screenings collection housing by a bolted connection. Designs in which the bearing housing is welded directly to the screen body will not be acceptable for this project. A seal plate shall be furnished to mate between the stationary lower bearing support and the rotating drum to prevent material intrusion into the bearing seals.

6. The upper end of the rotating drum screen basket shall be supported by a minimum of four (4) polymide cast nylon roller assemblies. Each roller assembly shall be a minimum 4‐inch diameter and shall be mounted to the main upper support flange to provide smooth operation of the rotating drum screen basket.

7. The screen basket assembly shall be provided with a support frame to allow for easy removal of the screen basket and deflection plate from the channel for maintenance purposes.

8. The deflection plate shall have a guide assembly that aligns the deflector plate seal with the rotating drum screen basket. The guide shall incorporate a self‐lubricated UHMW bearing at the screen’s lower shaft to maintain the position of the deflector plate. The guide assembly shall be field replaceable by a bolted connection.

9. Drainage holes shall be provided along the entire length of the screenings collection trough invert to allow for gravity drainage of washwater without flushing screenings out of the trough. The width of the drainage section shall be based upon a minimum 65‐degree arc. The drainage section perforated plate material shall be fabricated from 11 gauge minimum thick stainless steel and shall have a minimum 50% open area for free water drainage.

10. A compaction zone shall be an integral part of the screenings screw conveyor and transport tube design. The compaction zone shall be designed to form a screenings plug of material and to return water released from the screened material back to the wastewater channel through circular holes that are machined into the screenings transport tube. Compaction zone shall be fabricated from 12‐gauge minimum thick stainless steel welded to the screenings transport tube to provide a watertight screenings pressate collection chamber. Compaction zone housings that are non‐metallic and which require seals to prevent leakage around the screenings transport tube will not be acceptable for


this project. Compaction zone housing shall be furnished with a hinged and sealed access cover held in place with stainless steel latches as well as a removable dewatering section panel inside the dewatering chamber to allow direct access to the screw conveyor should the compaction zone ever become plugged. Designs that require removal of the drive assembly, discharge head or screw conveyor to gain access to the compaction zone will not be acceptable for this project.

11. Water that is released from the screenings shall be returned via a reinforced rubber hose attached to the dewatering section. Drain design shall allow for removal and cleaning of the drain hose should it ever become plugged without removing the drive, discharge head or screw conveyor.

12. Screen minimum invert to discharge height shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02.

C. Drive Assembly

1. The rake mechanism and transport screw shall be driven by a direct‐connected cycloidal‐helical hollow‐shaft high‐thrust in‐line speed reduc‐er. The cyclo element of the speed reducer shall be designed to take a 500 percent shock load without damage. The speed reducer manufacturer shall be a member of AGMA. The speed reducer shall have a minimum torque rating as noted in paragraph 2.02 and a minimum thrust rating as noted in paragraph 2.02.

2. The speed reducer shall be bolted to the drive adaptor flange at upper end of the screenings transport tube.

3. The speed reducer shall be driven by a field replaceable NEMA C‐flanged, 1,800 rev/min, ball bearing, continuous‐duty, totally enclosed, fan‐cooled motor with leads to a large conduit box for outdoor operation.

4. Motor size shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02, shall be rated for electrical power characteristics as noted in paragraph 2.02 and shall be rated for an environment as noted in paragraph 2.02. Explosion‐proof motors shall be furnished with thermostats in the motor windings shall be rated T3C for cutout at 160 deg C.

5. Chain‐drives, belt drives, hydraulic drives or a separate upper bearing for the transport screw will not be acceptable for this project.

D. Spray Wash Systems


1. Three (3) spray systems shall be provided. Each spray wash system shall be furnished with a control solenoid valve, stainless steel piping and fittings, flexible reinforced PVC hose and nozzles. Piping, fittings and valves shall be 3/4‐inch diameter minimum. A plant water strainer shall be provided for the incoming plant water supply. The wash water flow requirements shall be as noted in paragraph 2.02 with a minimum pressure at piping connection to the screen and during screen operation as noted in paragraph 2.02. The three (3) spray wash systems shall include:

a. Lower spray wash system shall be located on the outside of the screen basket and shall include a minimum of one (1) stainless steel header assembly that shall span the full length of the basket. Each lower spray wash system header shall have multiple spray nozzles. Lower spray wash bars without replaceable spray nozzles will not be acceptable. A 12‐gauge thick minimum stainless steel spray wash header cover shall be provided for each spray header.

b. Screenings spray wash system shall be located in the upper section of the transport tube no more than 17 inches from the beginning of the compaction zone to break up and return organic materials to the flow stream and to ensure maximum screenings washing. A minimum of one (1) spray nozzle shall be provided. The screenings spray wash system and screenings screw conveyor shall be designed to prevent washing screenings down the center of the screw conveyor.

c. The dewatering chamber flush water system shall periodically clean the compaction and dewatering zone via a stainless steel wash nozzle located in the compaction/dewatering chamber. The dewatering chamber flush water system shall not be a substitute for the screenings washing systems described in paragraphs 2.02 and 2.02.

2. The three (3) wash system solenoid valves shall be 3/4 inch minimum, brass body suitable for 120 VAC operation with a rating as noted in paragraph 2.02. Solenoid valves shall be normally closed and rated for up to 150 psig. Solenoid valves shall be slow close type to minimize water hammer.

3. Solenoid valves shall be factory installed to a piping manifold to ensure even pressure distribution to each spray wash system. The solenoid valve wiring shall be factory installed to a common junction box on the spray wash manifold for wire nut connection to external power. Conduit and fittings shall be factory installed between the solenoid valves and


junction boxes. Junction box, conduit and fittings shall be rated NEMA 4/7/9 for an explosion‐proof environment as noted in paragraph 2.02.

4. Water strainer shall be provided suitable for a 3/4‐inch connection and a maximum flow rate as noted in paragraph 2.02 and suitable for a maximum pressure as noted in paragraph 2.02. Water filter shall be a stacked filter element design with washable 80‐mesh (200 micron) polyethylene or polypropylene disc elements, polypropylene head and bowl and Buna N gaskets. Y‐type strainers will not be acceptable for this project.

2.08 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. All controls necessary for the fully automatic operation of the screen shall be provided in accordance with NEMA standards.

B. The electrical control system shall provide for automatic control of the screen via a high liquid level using a liquid level control system in connection with an adjustable time clock. The screen shall operate at a high liquid level and or a pre‐determined time sequence to provide a variable time between cleaning operations.

C. The float switches shall be a hermetically sealed, axially non‐position sensitive type, mercury‐switch activated and enclosed in a polypropylene housing. The switches shall operate over a narrow switching angle and have a minimum rating of 1 amp at 120 volts. A 20 ft PVC jacketed power cable, weight, grip cord, and stainless steel mounting bracket shall be furnished as part of the switch assembly. The level switching circuit shall be rated intrinsically safe by inclusion of a UL approved switch isolator with relay output. The switch isolator shall be rated for 120‐volt service with output contacts rated for 2 amps minimum. A second high‐level float switch shall be included for alarm indication.

D. A local‐mounted panel suitable for wall mounting shall contain the following items:

1. Door interlocked fused disconnect.

2. Process controller complete with LCD operator interface panel providing field settable/adjustable/access to process parameters and for providing specific indications of each type of fault that may occur. Controller ram shall be backed up with non‐volatile memory which will load automatically if ram is corrupted.

3. Variable frequency drive (VFD) with line reactor for the screen.


4. Control power transformer fused primary and secondary with 120VAC transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS)

5. Full voltage LED pilot lights for the following:

a. Control power on (White)

b. Multifunctional overload shutdown/screen fault (Red)

c. High level (Amber)

6. E‐stop push button (Red)

7. Re‐set push button (Black)

8. Hand‐Off‐Auto selector switches for the following:

a. Screen drive

b. Common wash system solenoid valves

9. Forward‐Off‐Reverse selector switch (spring return to center) for screen drive

10. Door‐mounted elapsed time meter

11. Remote dry contact outputs for the following:

a. Screen Running

b. Malfunction alarm

c. High water level alarm

12. Weather protection system heat tracing circuit breaker

13. Plant water heat tracing (250 WATTS MAX BY CONTRACTOR) circuit breaker

14. Flashing alarm light

15. Set spare fuses

16. White phenolic nameplates with black lettering

17. 600 VAC terminal block

18. U.L. panel label per the application


19. Electrical enclosure shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 2.02.

E. SCREENINGS BAGGER

1. The discharge chute shall be furnished with a bagging device to contain and encase dewatered screenings.

2. The bagging device shall be fabricated of 12‐gauge minimum stainless steel.

3. The screenings bagger shall be designed to be fitted with a continuous hose cassette. Bagger shall be supplied with two continuous hose cassettes.

2.09 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION

A. The screenings discharge transport tube shall be furnished with a heat tracing system for outdoor weather protection that shall completely enclose the screenings transport tube, compaction and dewatering zone, screenings discharge drop chute and all spray wash piping and solenoid valves.

B. The cold weather protection system shall include heat tracing, adjustable thermostat, insulation and a protective jacket. Heat tracing shall be suitable for an electrical environment as noted in paragraph 2.02.

C. The heat tracing system shall be suitable for operation down to a minimum temperature of ‐25oC (‐13oF) and shall be powered from the main control panel.

D. Weather protection system protective cover shall be molded fiberglass reinforced polyester laminate, or a custom fit, coated fiberglass cloth jacket. Fabricated metallic or plastic covers that are bolted or riveted together will not be acceptable for this project.

E. The molded fiberglass reinforced polyester laminate, shall have the exterior surface gel coated for ultraviolet radiation protection. Fiberglass shall have a glass content of not less than 30%, a tensile strength of not less than 22,000 psi, a flexural strength of not less than 25,000 psi and Barcol hardness of not less than 40. Finished fiberglass must withstand a temperature of 200oF without blistering, pinholes, warping or other defects. Gel coat shall be provided with impregnated pigment for exterior light gray color. The weather protection package cover shall be designed to support a wind load of 30 lb per square foot.

F. The weather protection package fiberglass cover sections shall be split into two sections when mounted axially along the transport tube. Weather protection system fiberglass cover sections shall extend from the discharge chute over the compaction and dewatering zone and down to the main basket support flange


gussets. Each split fiberglass cover section shall be connected via fiberglass flanges and no more than six (6) stainless steel thumb screws for ease of operator access. Each fiberglass cover section shall be designed so that the insulation is completely encapsulated within the fiberglass to prevent water intrusion and damage. Designs utilizing loose fiberglass or foam insulation that are not encapsulated in FRP will not be acceptable for this project. Each fiberglass half section shall be approximately 2 feet long with molded fiberglass flanges. Individual sections shall be connected via fiberglass flanges and a stainless steel V‐ring captive clamping system for easy installation and removal.

G. Where the wash water supply and electrical wiring conduit penetrates the fiberglass cover, bulkhead adapters shall be provided.

H. All fasteners to assemble the fiberglass cover components shall be stainless steel.

I. The custom fit, coated fiberglass cloth jacket shall be removable and replaceable. The inner and outer jacketing and the side gussets shall be fabricated from a minimum of 18 oz/sq yd Teflon coated fiberglass cloth containing a minimum of 1‐inch thick insulation core of Type E fiberglass mat. Seam closures shall be Teflon coated fiberglass thread and fasteners shall be Teflon straps with stainless steel D‐rings. Weather flaps of Teflon cloth shall cover seams and slits and will be fastened with Velcro hook and loop closures. 3‐inch wide Teflon cloth terminal end flaps with Nomex drawstrings sewn into the sides of the jacket shall be provided. Identification tags in AISI Type 316 stainless steel with embossed lettering shall be provided.

J. A fabricated composite weather enclosure shall be provided for the water strainer specified herein. Enclosure shall be provided with a removable cover.

K. The plant water supply system piping to the screen and the water strainer specified herein shall be provided with heat tracing and insulation by the Contractor. The Manufacturer’s control panel shall be provided with sufficient low voltage power to handle up to an additional 250 Watts from the Contractor supplied plant water heat tracing system.

L. A stainless steel weather spray protection housing shall be provided to cover the top of the screen basket to eliminate misting in the screen basket area (and to minimize wind chill effects for outdoor installations). The housing sides and top shall be fabricated of 14‐gauge minimum stainless steel. The top of the housing cover shall be designed with two (2) sliding cover sections that have been reinforced. Each cover section shall be provided with four (4) 1‐1/2 inch minimum diameter wheels that shall roll in a 14‐gauge minimum thick stainless steel wheel track. Each cover shall be provided with a handle for opening and closing the enclosure. The housing cover shall be designed to work with the FRP


screenings transport screw weather protection system specified herein. Where the screenings transport screw exits the housing, a split cover shall be provided to allow the entire weather protection cover to be removed without complete disassembly.

2.010 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish all anchor bolts of ample size and strength required to securely anchor each item of equipment. Bolts, washers and hex nuts shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Anchor bolts shall be drilled‐in wedge or epoxy‐type.

B. Anchor bolts shall be set by the Contractor. Equipment shall be placed on the

foundations, leveled, shimmed, bolted down, and grouted with a non‐shrinking grout.

2.011 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts shall be provided:

1. One (1) complete solenoid valve assembly

2. One (1) lower bearing assembly with wear sleeve and seals

3. Three (3) spare fuse sets of each size and type


2.012 SHOP SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING

A. Electric motors, speed reducers, and other self‐contained or enclosed components shall have manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

B. All external non‐wetted stainless steel shall be cleaned to a uniform finish by glass bead blasting and chemically treating with Citrisurf 2210 or 2050. No hazardous wastes shall be produced during fabrication because Citrisurf is a citric acid‐based product that is non‐toxic. The rotating drum screen manufacturer shall clearly identify the passivation procedure methodology and shall certify that no hazardous wastes are produced.

2.013 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. All structural stainless steel components shall be fabricated in the United States and shall conform to the requirements of "Specifications for the Design,


Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" published by the American Institute of Steel Construction.

B. All parts and assemblies shall be fabricated from sheets and plates of AISI Type 316 stainless steel with a finish conforming to AISI 316 and ASTM A666, unless noted otherwise. All rolled or extruded shapes shall be fabricated to conform to ASTM A276. All tubular products and fittings shall be fabricated to conform to ASTM A312, A351 and A403.

C. All welding in the factory shall use shielded arc, inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Add filler wire to all welds to provide for a cross section equal to or greater than the parent metal does. All butt welds shall be full penetration type to the interior surface. Provide gas shielding to interior and exterior of the joint.

D. Welding of the screen components shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the American Welding Society (AWS) standards. Field welding of stainless steel will not be permitted.

E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be AISI 316 stainless steel furnished in accordance with ASTM A193.

F. All surfaces that are specified to be machined shall be designed and fabricated to provide a runout of not more than 0.005 inches and a concentricity to within 0.005 inches.

G. Design and fabrication of structural steel members shall be in accordance with AISC and AWS Standards. The manufacturer shall comply with the American Welding Society (AWS) and the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) most current listed standards and qualifications in 2004 D1.1, the criteria per the requirements of Section 6 ‐ Inspection ‐ Structural Welding Code. Evidence of such AWS and AISC compliance shall be submitted with shop drawing submittals as follows:

1. AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (minimum 2 on staff) shall conform to all standards, current or previous as listed in section 6.1.4 AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors.

2. AWS Non‐Destructive Testing Inspectors (Level I, II, III) for Magnetic Particle and Ultra‐Sonic testing (minimum 2 on staff) shall conform to all standards, current or previous as listed in and in conformance with The American Society for Non‐Destructive Testing (ASNT‐TC‐1A).


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTING

A. Prior to shipment of the equipment the screen shall be operated for a minimum of four (4) hours at the fabrication location with the specific drive motor that will be furnished for the project at the actual operating angle of the screen for the project.

B. During the shop test the following parameters shall be recorded:

1. Motor nameplate data

2. Amperage draw at start‐up, after two hours and after four hours during forward operation

3. Amperage draw during reverse operation

C. A certified factory test report shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment per Section 01 33 00.



3.03 INSTALLATION




2. Channel is grouted as required.

3. Screen is properly supported and supports anchored.

4. Exposed, non‐stainless steel metal components finish coated as required.

5. All stainless steel bolts and nut threads coated with a non‐seizing compound.

6. Wash water piping is properly installed and pressure tested.


7. Lubricants are applied as required.

8. Screen rotational direction is correct.

9. Float switches are properly installed, secured, and wired to control panel.

10. Motor nameplate data matches approved submittal.

11. Motor is properly installed in accordance with Section 40 05 93 and motor manufacturer’s instructions.

12. Control panel is properly wired and grounded, and I/O tested.

13. Heat tracing installed and wired to control panel and insulation installed.


3.04 FIELD TESTING



2. Testing the float switches for automatic operation and alarm indication.

3. Testing screen and solenoid valves in manual and automatic operation.

4. Verifying heat tracing operation.

5. Three (3) tests conducted according to the EPA Paint Filter Test as described in method 9095B of EPA Publication SW 846.



D. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 8 hours of on‐site testing of the equipment specified herein.

3.05 TRAINING


FORM 46 21 33‐1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF IN‐CHANNEL ROTARY SCREEN

MANUFACTURER NAME: PROJECT NAME:



MANUFACTURER: SIZE (INCHES):





MFR CHECKLIST SUBMITTED: MOTOR GROUNDED: FLOAT SWITCHES SET: PANEL I/O TEST:

CHANNEL GROUTED: PIPE/CHANNEL CLEANED: PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: PIPE PRESSURE TESTED/NO LEAKS:

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: LUBRICATION: PROPER ROTATION: GUARDS/SAFETY:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: HEAT TRACING/INSULATION: STRAINER ON WATER SUPPLY:

OTHER:


FIELD TEST (CHECK IF VERIFIED)

HIGH LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH TAG: TIMER RUN IN AUTO:

HIGH HIGH LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH TAG: EMERGENCY STOP:

MANUAL RUN IN HAND: HIGH LEVEL ALARM:

RUN STATUS INDICATION: MOTOR OT STATUS ALARM:

FORWARD‐REVERSE OPERATION: WASHWATER SOLENOIDS OPERATION IN HAND/AUTO:

HIGH LEVEL RUN IN AUTO: HEAT TRACING IN AUTO:

COMMENTS:


SELLER/MANUFACTURER


NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

STV‐46 23 00 Grit Removal Equipment.doc 46 23 00 ‐ 1

SECTION 46 23 00 GRIT REMOVAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer shall furnish a grit removal system with a grit mechanism, grit pump, grit concentrator, grit washer, vacuum prime panel (if required), and all required appurtenances for a complete system.


1.02 RELATED WORK





A. The work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable provisions of the following standards:

B. Anti‐Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)

C. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA)

D. American Iron and Steel Institute/Society of Automotive Engineers (AISI/SAE)



E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A967 ‐ Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts

G. American Welding Society (AWS)


H. National Electric Code (NEC)

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

J. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

1. SSPC‐SP 6 ‐ Commercial Blast Cleaning.

K. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures, and including:

1. Five (5) grit removal efficiency tests from installations where similar equipment by the Manufacturer is currently in similar service.

2. Calculations and supporting information to demonstrate sizing of the grit chamber based on particle size, peak flow, and chamber diameter. Units sized on Surface Overflow Rate (SOR) shall not be allowed.

3. Submittal data on motors as required in Section 40 05 93.

B. Certified factory test report.





1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Manufacturer shall be of established good reputation regularly engaged in the fabrication of such equipment.



C. Manufacturer shall have a representative permanently located within a 300‐ mile radius of the project site, and a factory‐trained representative and service center qualified in the repair of the equipment specified herein permanently located within the continental United States.

1.06 WARRANTY



A. Smith & Loveless Pista 4.0 Vortex Grit Chamber Smith & Loveless, Lenexa, KS

B. Lakeside Equipment Corporation SpiraGrit™ Vortex Grit Chamber, Bartlett, IL

C. Engineer‐approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for approval.


A. Design each grit chamber for following hydraulic condition.

1. Minimum Flow: 0.3 MGD.

2. Maximum Flow While Maintaining Below Removal Efficiency: 4.0 MGD

B. Construct suitable for extremely humid installation and splash resistant.

C. Limit headloss through grit chamber to 6 inches or less at 4.0 MGD.

D. Grit removal (% by weight) with specific gravity of 2.65 from screened raw wastewater into and out of grit chamber.

1. 95% greater than 50‐mesh (297‐micron) particle size



E. Wearing parts readily accessible for inspection, repairs, and replacement.

F. Replacement parts easily duplicated and attainable.


G. No moving parts subject to wear or stoppage below water surface.

H. No bends or elbows on underwater or inaccessible grit piping.

I. Provide drives, lubrication, and support equipment bearings accessible from operating floor level.

J. No loss of grit removal efficiency for flows with inlet velocity less than 3.5 ft/s.

K. Provide inlet ramp to enhance coanda effect and direct grit downward to separation chamber.

L. Grit removal system shall fit in grit tank shown on Drawings.

M. Storage hopper to have 60‐degree sloped bottom with a maximum diameter of 3’‐0” and a minimum depth of 5’‐0”.

2.03 GRIT CHAMBER EQUIPMENT

A. Paddles

1. Upward or downward adjustable grit scouring intensity.

2. Four blades.

3. Material: 316 stainless steel

B. Drive Tube

1. Driven by large, totally enclosed spur gear and turntable bearing.

2. Diameter: 10‐3/4 inches minimum.

3. Material: 316 stainless steel

C. Propeller Drive Unit (Gear Motor and Gear Head)

1. Motor

a. Helical gear type.

b. 1 HP, 230/460 Volt, 3‐phae, 60 Hz (NEC Class I, Division 1, Group D, explosion proof).

c. Steel housing and frame.

d. Service Factor: 2.0 or greater on reducer, 1.15 on motor.


e. Thermostats for motor winding protection.

f. Conform to requirements of Section 40 05 93.

2. Gears

a. Alloy steel, heat treated, and hardened.

b. Teeth: Hobbed and flame hardened.

c. Helical Gears: Oil lubricated.

d. Spur Tooth Bull Gear: Large, driven by pinion mounted on output shaft of helical gear motor, enclosed in cast iron or steel case.

e. Spur Gear Pinion: Cut from heat‐treated steel.

f. Bull Gear: Rotate with ±21‐inch diameter turntable bearing.

g. Service Factor for Pinion and Bull Gear: 5 or greater at standard operating speeds.

3. Bull Gear Box

a. Specifically designed for this service.

b. Provide opening for propeller drive table.

c. Seal with air bell at bottom opening around drive tube.

d. Provide bolted flanged connection at top for grit pump suction.

4. General Requirements

a. Maximum Drive Output Speed: 21 rpm.

b. Suitable for continuous (24 hrs/day year‐round) service.

c. Bearings shall have minimum B‐10 bearing life of 100,000 hours, except 21‐inch diameter turntable bearing which shall have minimum B‐10 life of 20 years.

5. Grit Well Cover Plates

a. Maximum 3" opening between cover plate and propeller drive tube.

b. Two‐piece with lifting loops.


c. Stationary, not part of rotating assembly.

d. Material: 316 stainless steel.

D. Flow Control

1. Flow control shall consist of:

a. Inlet baffle to direct flow across the bottom of the upper chamber and beneath the horizontal perimeter baffle.

b. Horizontal perimeter baffle to prevent short‐circuiting and rollover.

2. Material: 316 stainless steel.

3. Fabricate to dimensions as shown on approved Shop Drawings.

4. It shall be designed to direct the inlet flow into the chamber in a manner ensuring the proper vortex flow and to prevent short‐circuiting.

2.04 GRIT PUMP

A. Pump:

1. Centrifugal, vertical with vacuum priming panel or self‐priming, horizontal, centrifugal.

2. Self‐priming pump (if used) shall be Gorman‐Rupp Super Series T with replaceable wear plate.

3. Ni‐Hard impeller.

4. Shaft: 4130 alloy steel or stainless steel

5. Mechanical seal.

6. Size: 4” suction, 4” discharge.

7. Capable of passing 3” sphere.

8. Capacity: 250 GPM at 30 feet TDH.

B. Motor:

1. 7.5 HP (minimum), 1760 RPM, 230/460 Volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz (NEC Class I, Division 1, Group D, explosion‐proof).


2. Class F insulation, Class B temperature rise, 1.15 service factor.

3. Thermostats for motor winding protection.

4. Conform to requirements of Section 40 05 93.

2.05 CENTRIFUGAL GRIT CONCENTRATOR (CYCLONE)

A. Mounted on grit washer/dewatering screw with supports by Manufacturer.

B. Capacity: 250 GPM

C. Operates on the constant rate vortex principle.

D. Purpose: Removes water and organics from grit mixture pumped by grit pump to grit dewatering screw.

E. Flow Pattern:

1. Pumped flow enters tangentially through side.

2. Grit and small volume of water exit out bottom into hopper of dewatering screw.

3. Organic material and rest of water exit out top to drain.

4. Minimum 93% removal of influent water and 95% removal influent organics.

5. Less than 5% putrescible material in recovered grit from underflow.

F. Material: Minimum 1/2" Ni‐Hard, high nickel iron coated with minimum 6 mil dry film thickness epoxy resin or equally abrasion‐resistant material as approved by the Engineer.

G. No moving parts.

2.06 GRIT WASHER/DEWATERING SCREW CONVEYOR

A. General:

1. Provide inlet hopper to receive mixture of grit and water at 250 GPM, sufficiently large to allow grit to settle out of water.

2. Provide 4” overflow in inlet hopper.


3. Provide unit as freestanding with support legs to hold conveyor at 16 or 22 angle from horizontal.

4. Drive screw conveyor with gear motor mounted on discharge end.

5. Provide heated jacket for grit hopper and screw trough.

B. Construction

1. Screw

a. Diameter: 9 to 12 inches

b. Length: 9 to 15 feet

c. Material: 316 stainless steel

d. Shaftless screws not allowed due to wear or loss of grit.

2. Screw Bearings

a. Outlet End: Anti‐friction type.

b. Inlet End: Greaseable bronze bushing mounted to outside end.

3. Screw Trough

a. Material: 316 stainless steel

b. Open minimum 3/16” thick steel formed, U‐shaped.

c. Provide 2” diameter drain at inlet end.

d. Provide 8” outlet.

4. Inlet Hopper

a. Material: 316 stainless steel.

b. Overflow: Full‐length, double‐sided outlet weir trough with 4‐in. flange.

c. Slope three sides of hopper at least 50 degrees to horizontal.

d. Projected Surface Area: 17 square feet, minimum.

e. Parallel plates to improve retention of fine grit, and to comply with surface area for settling as required.


5. Drive

a. Provide belt‐driven shaft‐mounted helical gear reducer or direct‐connected cycloidal‐helical speed reducer.

b. Mount on plate bolted to flanges of screw trough at discharge end.

6. Motor

a. 3 HP, 230/460 Volt, 3‐phase, 60 hertz. (NEC Class I, Division 1, Group D, explosion proof).

b. Thermostats for motor winding protection.

c. Provide in accordance with Section 40 05 93.

7. Cover

a. Material: 316 stainless steel

b. Solid split cover to prevent heat loss during the winter, and provided with hinges and handles for access.

c. Opening under concentrator not covered to allow incoming flow to enter unit.

8. Wash Water Requirements:

a. 20 GPM at 60 psig of plant effluent.

b. Intermittent.

2.07 VACUUM PRIMING PANEL (IF REQUIRED FOR GRIT PUMP)

A. Panel

1. Suitable for outdoor use and NEC Class I, Division 2, Group D area classification, unless suitable non‐classified location (at least 10‐feet from grit chamber) is recommended by Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

2. Mounted on paddle drive unit, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

B. Panel Mounted Devices


1. Vacuum Pump:

a. Corrosion resistant internal components.

b. Sized to prime pump and piping in less than 60 seconds.

2. Air Compressor:

a. Oil‐less

C. Priming System

1. Consists of vacuum pump, vacuum control solenoid valve, prime level sensing probe, and float operated check valve.

2. Positive lubrication of mechanical seal.

3. Minimum passageway equivalent to 2‐1/2" opening.

4. Prime from low‐pressure area of pump.

5. Provide heated jacket for vacuum priming dome and priming sensor.

D. Pinch Valve

1. On pump discharge line.

2. In vertical piping.

3. 4" diameter.

4. Pneumatically controlled.

5. Provide heated jacket for pinch valve.

2.08 SHOP PAINTING

A. Surface Preparation

1. All non‐stainless structural steel surfaces shot blasted with steel grit.

2. Weld splatter and surface roughness removed by grinding.

3. Comply with SSPC‐SP6 specifications.

B. Coating ‐ Grit Mechanism, Concentrator, and Conveyor


1. Primer: open recoat window, Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane Primer, 2.5 ‐ 3.5 mils dry film thickness.

2. First coating: Epoxy Polyamidoamine Primer, Tnemec Series N69 Hi‐Build Epoxoline II, 3.0 ‐ 5.0 mils dry film thickness.

3. Second coating: Epoxy Polyamidoamine Primer, Tnemec Series N69 Hi‐Build Epoxoline II, 3.0 ‐ 5.0 mils dry film thickness.

4. Finish coating: Polyurethane Finish, Tnemec Series 73, Endura‐Shield

5. An equivalent VERSAPOX® epoxy resin coating system may be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2.09 DATA PLATES


2.010 HARDWARE

A. Manufacturer shall furnish all required hardware and anchor bolts per Section 01 60 00. All exposed hardware shall be AISI 316/316L stainless steel.

2.011 SPARE PARTS

A. One (1) set of Manufacturer’s standard spare parts shall be furnished.

B. One (1) complete spare pump rotating assembly (volute, impeller, shaft, speed reducer (if used), bearings, seals, and motor).

C. Spare parts shall be packaged in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTING

A. The equipment specified herein shall be factory assembles and tested prior to shipment.

B. A certified factory test report shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment per Section 01 33 00.




3.03 INSTALLATION




2. Grit chamber is grouted as required.

3. Equipment is properly supported and supports anchored.

4. Exposed, non‐stainless steel metal components finish coated as required.

5. Wash water piping is properly installed and pressure tested.


7. Grit paddle, pump, and grit conveyor rotational direction are correct.

8. Motor nameplate data matches approved submittals.

9. Motors are properly installed in accordance with Section 40 05 93 and motor manufacturer’s instructions.

10. Vacuum priming panel is properly wired and grounded, and wiring tested, as applicable.

11. Vacuum priming air tubing and pinch valve are properly installed, as applicable.

12. Heat tracing installed and wired and insulation installed.


3.04 FIELD TESTING


1. Testing the vacuum priming system for automatic operation and status indication, as applicable.


2. Testing the entire the grit removal system in manual and automatic operation.

3. Verifying heat tracing operation.



D. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 12 hours of on‐site testing of the equipment specified herein.

3.05 TRAINING





FORM 46 23 00‐1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF GRIT REMOVAL EQUIPMENT




MANUFACTURER: SIZE OF CHAMBER:


PADDLE MOTOR HP: VOLTS: HERTZ: PHASE:


PUMP MOTOR HP: VOLTS: HERTZ: PHASE:


WASHER MOTOR HP: VOLTS: HERTZ: PHASE:



MFR CHECKLIST SUBMITTED: MOTOR GROUNDED: VACUUM TUBING INSTALLED: VACUUM PANEL WIRED:

CHAMBER GROUTED: CHAMBER CLEANED: PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: PIPE PRESSURE TESTED:

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: LUBRICATION: PROPER ROTATION: GUARDS/SAFETY:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: HEAT TRACING/INSULATION: PINCH VALVE TESTED: OTHER:


FIELD TEST

PADDLE RUN IN HAND: SYSTEM RUN IN AUTO:

RUN STATUS INDICATION: PADDLE EMERGENCY STOP:

PUMP AND VACUUM PANEL IN HAND: WASHER EMERGENCY STOP:

RUN STATUS INDICATION: MOTOR OT STATUS ALARMS:

WASHER RUN IN HAND: WASHWATER SOLENOIDS OPERATION IN HAND/AUTO:

RUN STATUS INDICATION: HEAT TRACING IN AUTO:

COMMENTS:


SELLER/MANUFACTURER


NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

STV-46 41 34 Vertical Turbine Mixers.doc 46 41 34 - 1

SECTION 46 41 34 VERTICAL TURBINE MIXERS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Manufacturer shall furnish two (2) heavy duty vertical-shaft axial-type mixers.

B. The work shall include fabrication, factory-testing, delivery, installation inspection, field testing, certification of installation and field testing, and training.

1.02 RELATED WORK



C. Section 40 05 93 - Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment


A. AFBMA - Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association

1. AFBMA Standard 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

B. AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association

1. AGMA 390.03 - Gear Handbook Volume 1: Gear Classification, Materials and Measuring Methods for Unassembled Gears.

2. AGMA 299.01 - Sound Manual.

C. AGMA 6010.E88 - Spur, Helical, Herringbone and Bevel Enclosed Drives.

D. AIChE - American Institute of Chemical Engineers

1. Method for Evaluating Mixing Equipment, Impeller Type; 2nd. Edition.

E. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

F. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel


2. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

3. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

4. ASTM A314 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Billets and Bars for Forging

5. ASTM A967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts

G. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators

H. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR 29)

I. SAE International - Society of Automotive Engineers

1. SAE J431 - Automotive Gray Iron Castings

2. SAE 316 (UNS S31600) – 316 Stainless Steel

3. SAE 316L (UNS S31603) – 316L Stainless Steel

J. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures and including:

1. Drawings showing complete dimensional data of the proposed mixer design including the mixer outline dimensions, mixer drive, output coupling, and impeller assembly data and mounting details.

2. The weight of the complete mixer assembly and each component; motor, gearbox, shafting and impellers.

3. Details of the coupling-shaft sleeve arrangement and axial and torque load calculations.

4. Description of surface preparation of all components and shop priming and finish painting of components requiring coating.


5. Mixer design calculations and process design calculations.

6. Design thrust, torque, and bending moment loads.

7. Certified test data demonstrating the specified pumping rate, power, tip speed and velocity gradient. Testing shall be in accordance with the A.I.Ch.E procedure, Method for Evaluating Mixing Equipment, Impeller Type; 2nd. Edition.

8. Warranty as specified herein.

9. Motor data as required in Section 43 05 93.





F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 00, Close-Out Submittals.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS



C. Manufacturer shall have a qualified factory-trained representative and service center qualified in repair of the mixers permanently located within a 300-mile radius of the project site.

1.06 WARRANTY




A. ANCO Mixers Series 3000 by Enviropax, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah.

B. Lightnin Mixers Series 10 by SPX Flow Technology, Rochester, New York.

C. Engineer-approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for approval.

2.02 GENERAL

A. The mixers shall be complete assemblies including but not limited to the gear reducers, motors, shafting, impellers, couplings, mounting bases, anchor bolts, and other appurtenant equipment necessary to be complete and operable in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. All submerged parts including the mixer shaft and impeller shall be constructed of SAE type 316/316L stainless steel.

B. All fasteners required for assembly of submerged parts shall be SAE type 316/316L stainless steel.

C. The minimum material thickness for impeller fabrication is 3/16 inch.

2.04 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Equipment Schedule Number: Q-A-1, -2

B. Basins:

1. Number of basins: 2

2. Width: 15’-0”

3. Length: 17’-0”

4. Side water depth (SWD), maximum: 18’-3”

5. Side water depth (SWD), minimum: 17’-9”

6. Freeboard @ maximum SWD: 2’-9”


7. Mounting height above bottom, feet: 21’-0”

8. Volume at maximum SWD, gallons, each: 34,810

9. Flow to each basin, minimum: 0.5 MGD (both basins in service at start-up flow + 100% RAS + 300% MLR)

10. Flow to each basin, maximum: 3 MGD (2 basins in service at peak design flow + 100% RAS + 300% MLR of maximum month design flow)

11. Detention time per basin, maximum: 100 minutes at minimum flow and minimum level

12. Detention time per basin, minimum: 16.7 minutes at maximum flow and level

13. Design water temperature: 10 to 20 deg C (50 to 68 deg F)

14. Design ambient temperature: -35 deg F to 100 deg F

C. Impeller

1. Type: Axial – high efficiency

2. Number per Shaft: 1

3. Number of blades, min.: 3 ea.

4. Diameter, min.: 76”

5. Speed, max.: 19.3 RPM

6. Speed, min.: 1.9 RPM (with Variable Speed Drive)

7. Tip speed (ft/sec), max.: 6.4

8. Tip speed (ft/sec), min.: 0.6

9. Submergence: 147”

10. Impeller centerline distance from bottom, max.: 72 inches

11. Turnover rate, minimum: 0.63 times per minute

12. Pumping rate at maximum speed, min.: 21,983 GPM

D. Shaft


1. Shaft diameter, min.: 2.0”

2. % critical speed, maximum: 40%

E. Support

1. Mechanism weight, maximum: 1,100 lbs

2. Torque at motor HP, maximum: 8,550 in-lb

3. Bending moment, maximum: 15,000 in-lb

4. Supports shall be sized for minimum 2.5 times the weight, torque, and bending moment.

2.05 DRIVE ASSEMBLY

A. Mixer drive mounting:

1. Speed reducer and motor factory-mounted to a common open type factory manufactured extended pedestal base that provides access to the low speed impeller shaft coupling above the mounting platform.

2. Base material: ASTM A36 carbon steel.

B. Speed reducer: Vertical, all helical gear design.

1. Gearbox: AGMA Class II 24-hour continuous service under moderate shock conditions in an outdoor environment.

2. Reducer case: High strength grey cast iron or ductile iron, SAE Class 30.

3. Gears:

a. Carburized to a hardness of 58-62 Rockwell C. b. Finish ground to a minimum AGMA Class 10 quality level. c. Gearbox efficiency, min.: 95 percent d. Gearing shall be designed to withstand normal and shock loads

transmitted from lower shaft and impeller.

4. Lifting lugs: Speed reducer shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting the complete mixing unit. If lifting lugs are not able to be supplied, Manufacturer shall recommend and submit alternate method for lifting speed reducer.

5. Speed reducer thermal rating shall exceed the mechanical rating to eliminate the need for external coolers.


6. Speed reducer service factor, minimum: AGMA 3.0 based on the motor nameplate horsepower rating.

7. AGMA nameplate shall be required for speed reducer.

8. Full load operating noise level:

a. Per OSHA occupational noise standards or AGMA 299.01.

b. Less than 85 dBA at a distance of 3-feet.

C. Lubrication system:

1. All-weather starting and operation of the unit without external heaters or primers.

2. Dipstick or sight glass to observe oil levels.

3. Oil drain at low point of reducer.

4. Normally accessible fill and drain lines.

5. Oil change frequency: < 8,000-hour intervals.

6. Low speed shaft seals:

a. One internal spring-loaded double lip seal, or equivalent sealing method.

b. Dual external spring-loaded double lip seals and a dry cavity between the seals which shall contain the lower grease lubricated output shaft bearings.

7. Speed reducer breather: located above possible oil foam level.

8. Motor changes and oil changes: shall not require the removal of the speed reducer from its foundation.

9. Drives to be shipped with oil filled to the proper level for operation or filled in the field by the Manufacturer’s Representative.

10. Dry Well: The low-speed shaft design shall incorporate a dry well to prevent oil leakage along the drive output shaft. The top surface of the dry well shall be sufficiently above the dynamic oil level of the gear drive.

D. Bearings:


1. Type: roller, anti-friction, oil-lubricated

2. Mixer drive gearbox bearings: minimum AFBMA L10 life of 100,000 hours.

3. Output bearings: minimum AFBMA L10 life of 300,000 hours.

2.06 MOTOR

A. Motors shall meet the requirements of Section 40 05 93.

B. Motors shall have the following characteristics:

1. Motor horsepower, minimum: 1

2. Duty: Severe duty (CISD), continuous operation

3. Enclosure: TEFC

4. Nominal synchronous (60 hertz speed): 1,800 RPM

5. Voltage: 460 volts

6. Phase: 3

7. Nominal frequency: 60 hertz

8. Efficiency: Premium efficient per NEMA MG 1 Table 12-12

9. Inverter-duty per NEMA MG1

10. Insulation: Class F

11. Motor protection: Imbedded thermostats, one (1) per winding (normally closed)

C. The electric drive motor shall be connected to the speed reducer through a flexible coupling.

2.07 LOW SPEED COUPLING

A. Gearbox Output Shaft and Vertical Impeller Shaft Connection

1. Type 1: Flanged

a. The upper coupling half shall keyed on the speed reducer output shaft and shall be held in place by a retainer washer and bolt in the end of the gearbox output shaft.


b. The lower mixer shaft coupling half shall be welded to the mixer shaft, or by an alternate connection approved by the Engineer.

2. Type 2: Split Coupling

a. The mixer shaft shall be connected to the output shaft of the speed reducer by means of a split removable coupling accessible from outside the tank and located above the reducer.

B. Coupling halves

1. Material: Solid round bar of 316 stainless steel

2. Machining: Couplings shall be turned and faced to provide a precision machined register fit, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

3. The coupling halves shall be bolted together through the flanges with plated bolts, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

C. Loads: The coupling assembly shall be designed to transmit 200 percent of the full torque and 150 percent of the axial load on the coupling.

2.08 IMPELLER SHAFT

A. Material: Solid round bar of 316 stainless steel

B. Sizing:

1. The impeller shaft shall be sized so the maximum operating speed of the impeller and shaft assembly does not exceed 40% of the first natural critical speed. The weight of both the shaft and the impeller assembly shall be taken into account in calculating the critical speed.

2. The shaft diameter shall be determined by an analysis of shaft stresses caused by torque and bending moments as well as critical speed but shall in no case be less than indicated herein.

3. The combined shaft stress shall not exceed 8,000 psi.

C. Straightening: to within ¼ inch for every ten feet of length.

2.09 IMPELLER ASSEMBLY

A. The impellers shall be of the axial flow type designed with a contoured blade for high efficiency.


B. The impellers shall produce the specified pumping rate with a minimum of turbulence as characterized by a relatively uniform velocity profile across the entire diameter of the impeller.

C. The assembly shall be made up of an impeller hub with the blades being bolted onto the hub.

D. The hub shall have not less than 3 blades evenly spaced on the hub having a minimum outside diameter specified herein.

E. The blades shall be set at an angle close to, but not exceeding, the point at which flow separation occurs.

F. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed. Sharp corners, cuts or sheared edges shall by dulled by a power grinder or file.

G. The assembled impeller shall be attached to the shaft using a hook-key design to transmit the torque and support the weight of the impeller.

H. The design of the hook-key feature shall be such that with the impeller hub set screw loosened, the impeller cannot slide down the impeller shaft during installation.

I. An extended keyway shall be provided of sufficient length to permit adjustment of the axial position 18 inches up in three-inch increments from the design location.

J. The impeller shall be of such design, and operate at such rotational speed that dynamic balancing is not required to prevent damaging vibration.

2.010 COATINGS

A. Exposed cast iron or (non-stainless) steel components shall receive surface preparation per SSPC-SP6 followed by:

1. Primer: open recoat window, Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane Primer, 2.5 - 3.5 mils dry film thickness.

2. First coating: Epoxy Polyamidoamine Primer, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II, 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness.

3. Second coating: Epoxy Polyamidoamine Primer, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II, 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness.

4. Finish coating: Polyurethane Finish, Tnemec Series 73, Endura-Shield


B. Exterior portions of the steel shaft and the motor coupling shall be protected with a waxy film, moisture-excluding coating.

2.011 DATA PLATES


2.012 HARDWARE AND ANCHORS

A. Hardware shall be furnished per Section 01 60 00.

B. Manufacturer shall furnish all required 316 stainless steel anchors.


A. Manufacturer shall furnish one (1) set of standard spare parts and special tools.

1. All spare parts for one year’s normal operation and maintenance of the equipment, including lubricants.

2. As minimum, one spare set of seals and gaskets shall be included for each size of drive.

3. Special tools required for the proper servicing of mixers.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING

A. Each drive shall be completely shop assembled and factory tested to assure proper fit-up, and acceptable limits of vibration, shaft run out and motor power draw, prior to shipment.

B. A certified factory test report shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment per Section 01 33 00.



B. All gears and bearings shall be protected from rusting during storage by the application of a shop applied protective coating.


3.03 INSTALLATION




2. Basin is cleared of debris.

3. Drive base is level, anchored, and grouted.

4. Anchor bolts tightened and applied with anti-seize compound.

5. Exposed, non-stainless steel metal components finish-coated as required.


7. Impeller shaft properly aligned.

8. Impeller rotational direction is correct.

9. Motor nameplate data matches approved submittals.

10. Motors are properly installed and grounded in accordance with Section 40 05 93 and motor manufacturer’s instructions.


3.04 FIELD TESTING

A. On-site field testing shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning. Testing shall also include:

1. Vibration testing to determine that the mixers do not exceed acceptable field vibration limits throughout the mixer operating range.

2. Testing the motor thermostat contacts.

3. Measuring the motor current and voltage at maximum and minimum operating speeds at the specified operating conditions.




D. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 6 hours of on-site testing of the equipment specified herein.

3.05 TRAINING

A. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 2 hours of training of the Owner’s staff for operation and maintenance of the equipment specified herein.




FORM 46 41 34-1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF VERTICAL TURBINE MIXER




MANUFACTURER: IMPELLER SIZE (INCHES):





MFR CHECKLIST SUBMITTED: BASIN CLEANED/LEAK TESTED:

BASE LEVEL/ANCHORED: BASE GROUTED:

BOLTS TIGHTENED/ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND:

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: LUBRICATION: PROPER ROTATION:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: MOTOR GROUNDED: GUARDS/SAFETY: OTHER:


FIELD TEST

MANUAL RUN IN HAND: VOLTAGE AT 60 HZ

AUTO RUN IN REMOTE: AMPERAGE AT 60 HZ

RUN STATUS INDICATION: VIBRATION AT 60 HZ

AUTO STATUS INDICATION: VFD MIN SPEED, (10 HZ DEFAULT), HZ

LOCAL STATUS INDICATION: VOLTAGE AT MINIMUM SPEED

MOTOR OT STATUS ALARM INDICATION: AMPERAGE AT MINIMUM SPEED

VFD COMMON ALARM INDICATION: VIBRATION AT MINIMUM SPEED

COMMENTS:


SELLER/MANUFACTURER


NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

STV‐46 51 33 Fine Bubble Diffusers.doc 46 51 33 ‐ 1

SECTION 46 51 33 FINE BUBBLE DIFFUSERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer shall furnish a flexible membrane disc diffuser aeration system in the new aeration basin and a separate flexible membrane disc diffuser aeration system in the existing oxidation ditch as specified herein, complete.

B. The scope of work shall include fabrication, factory testing, delivery, installation inspection, field testing, certification of installation and field testing, and training.

C. The diffuser aeration system to be furnished for the new aeration basin per Paragraph 1.05B shall be the Base Bid and the diffuser aeration system for the oxidation ditch per Paragraph 1.05C shall be the additive alternate.

1.02 RELATED WORK




A. Equipment and materials specified in this section shall comply with the following reference standards as applicable:

B. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials):

1. ASTM A‐240/A240M‐15a Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium‐Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

2. ASTM A276/A276M‐15 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

3. ASTM A380/A380M‐13 Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems

4. ASTM A554‐15a Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing


5. ASTM A774/A774M‐14 Standard Specification for As‐Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures

6. ASTM A778/A778M‐15 Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products

7. ASTM D412‐06a Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension

8. ASTM D573‐04 Standard Test Method for Rubber ‐ Deterioration in an Air Oven

9. ASTM D1171‐99 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration ‐ Surface Ozone Cracking Outdoors or Chamber (Triangular Specimens)

10. ASTM D1784‐11 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

11. ASTM D1785‐15 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

12. ASTM D2240‐05 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property ‐ Durometer Hardness

13. ASTM D2466‐15 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

14. ASTM D2665‐14 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

15. ASTM D2467‐15 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

16. ASTM D3034‐14a Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

17. ASTM D3915‐06 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Pressure Applications

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI B16.1 ‐ Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings


D. Military Standard

1. MIL‐STD‐105E: Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes

E. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1. ASCE Standard for the Measurement of Oxygen Transfer in Clean Water (2‐06)

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall also include the following:

a. General arrangement drawings showing plan views and cross sections of the equipment as installed in the aeration tanks.

b. Detail drawings of standard system components including diffuser assemblies, gaskets, retainer rings, supports, joints, and blow‐off/moisture assemblies.

c. Fabrication drawings showing details of distribution laterals, drop‐legs, manifolds, and pipe joints and couplings.

d. Detail drawings of pipe supports and hardware.

e. Detailed layouts of anchor bolt locations and anchor bolt technical information.

2. Product Data: Product Data Submittal shall include the following:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog information.

b. Manufacturer’s specifications for materials and manufacturing.

c. Detailed information for all ancillary items such as hardware and supports, etc.

3. Design calculations and performance curves demonstrating compliance with all performance requirements specified in Paragraphs 1.05B and 1.05C, such as:

a. Calculations determining the volumetric air flow rate per diffuser, number of diffusers, diffuser density, diffuser submergence, to comply with the specified Standard Oxygen Transfer Rate (SOTR).


b. Performance curve of SOTE versus SCFM per diffuser.

c. Calculations determining the entire pressure loss through aeration system including the pressure losses through the drop leg, manifold, air distribution laterals, and diffusers.

d. Calculations demonstrating that the system design will provide uniform air distribution within 10% variation through lateral piping and diffuser assemblies.

e. Performance curve of diffuser pressure loss in inches water column versus air flow rate per diffuser in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM at 20 deg C, 14.7 PSIA, and 36% relative humidity).

4. Certified oxygen transfer test report from factory oxygen transfer tests or procedures for performance testing in accordance with Paragraph 1.05D.

5. A list of successful operating aeration systems and evidence of adequate oxygen transfer test data indicating compliance with the specified experience and testing requirements in Paragraph 1.06.

B. Calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer demonstrating that the specified pipe support and expansion/contraction requirements are met including determining the following:

1. Uplift forces due to buoyancy.

2. Downward forces due to weight.

3. Pipe support load capacity.

4. Support anchor bolt uplift force.

5. Support anchor bolt load capacity.

6. Support anchor pullout safety factor.

7. Pipe support band clamp friction force.

8. Pipe maximum thermal expansion and contraction.

9. Pipe allowable thermal expansion and contraction.

10. Pipe expansion force due to thermal expansion.

11. Support rod stress due to pipe expansion and band clamp friction force, and support rod yield strength.


12. Pipe support band clamp stress and yield strength.

C. Certified test report verifying membrane longevity as required in Paragraph 2.03E. In lieu of providing the certified test report verifying membrane longevity, Manufacturer may provide a three (3) year warranty (instead of two (2) year) per Paragraph 1.07A and testing on the installed diffusers per Paragraph 2.03E.

D. Calculations determining the minimum submerged stainless steel pipe length required for air cooling in accordance with Paragraph 2.04D.

E. Procedures for product quality control testing, as required in Paragraph 3.01, including membrane durometer, tensile strength, modulus of elasticity, specific gravity, dynamic wet pressure, and air flow uniformity.

F. Certified Factory Test Reports as specified in Paragraph 3.01.

G. Bill of Materials per Section 01 33 00.

H. Field erection requirements per Section 01 33 00.

I. Manufacturer's warranty as specified in Paragraph 1.07.

J. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 00, Close‐Out Submittals.


A. Overall Layout and Design

1. Diffuser aeration systems shall be installed in accordance with the tank dimensions listed herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Air piping shall enter the basins as shown on the Contract Drawings and Manufacturer shall be responsible for proper connection at the location shown.

3. Manufacturer shall be responsible for design and fabrication of entire aeration system from drop leg connection at top of tank wall.

4. System shall be designed for uniform air release over the entire diffuser coverage area and over the specified volumetric air flow range.

5. Air distributors shall be designed with centerline spacing to maximize oxygen transfer efficiency and mixing efficiency and to minimize solids deposition between air distributors.


6. Air piping shall be adequately sized to meet the specified oxygen transfer and pressure loss requirements plus 10%. Manifolds or air distributors shall be upsized as required to meet the additional total system pressure drop.

B. Design Conditions – New Aeration Basin

1. Design

a. Number of Cells: 2

b. Basin Dimensions

1) Length, feet: 75

2) Width, feet: 15

c. Minimum Side Water Depth (SWD), feet: 18

d. Volume of Each Cell at SWD, each, gallons: 151,470

e. Volume of Basin, total, gallons: 302,940

2. Site Elevation

a. Tank Bottom Elevation, MSL, feet: 78.0

b. Minimum Side Water Depth, MSL, feet: 96.0

c. Tank Top of Wall Elevation, MSL, feet: 99.0

3. Basin Liquid Temperature

a. Minimum Temperature, deg C: 10

b. Maximum Temperature, deg C: 25

4. Aeration system oxygen transfer rate of not less than the following pounds of oxygen per day in clean water at 14.7 PSI, 20 deg. C, and zero dissolved oxygen at the specified submergence, air rate, and pressure.

a. Maximum Standard O2 Transfer Rate (SOTR) (lb/hour) Per Basin: 730

b. Maximum Volumetric Air Flow (SCFM) Per Basin: 2,200 (oxidation ditch out of service)


c. Minimum Volumetric Air Flow (SCFM) Per Basin: 370

d. Maximum Pressure Loss through Manifold, Distribution Pipes, and Diffusers, PSI: 1.5

e. Minimum Diffuser Submergence (ft): 16.5

f. Maximum Diffuser Height above floor (ft): 1.5

5. Minimum Standard Oxygen Transfer Efficiency (SOTE) at design Maximum SOTR and diffuser submergence: 31.4%

6. Maximum Volumetric Air Rate per effective membrane surface area of 7.32 SCFM/SQFT (3 SCFM per 9‐inch disc).

7. Minimum Volumetric Flow Rate per tank upper area required for mixing: 0.12 SCFM/SQFT (0.5 SCFM per 9‐inch disc).

C. Design Conditions – Existing Oxidation Ditch

1. Design

a. Number of Cells: 1

b. Basin Area, sqft: ±3,420

c. Minimum Side Water Depth (SWD), feet: 11.72

d. Volume of Basin, total, gallons: 300,000

2. Site Elevation

a. Tank Bottom Elevation, MSL, feet: 83.4

b. Minimum Side Water Depth, MSL, feet: 95.12

c. Tank Top of Wall Elevation, MSL, feet: 97.5

3. Basin Liquid Temperature

a. Minimum Temperature, deg C: 10

b. Maximum Temperature, deg C: 25

4. Aeration system oxygen transfer rate of not less than the following pounds of oxygen per day in clean water at 14.7 PSI, 20 deg. C, and zero dissolved oxygen at the specified submergence, air rate, and pressure.


a. Maximum Standard O2 Transfer Rate (SOTR) (lb/hour) Per Basin: 730

b. Maximum Volumetric Air Flow (SCFM) Per Basin: 3,600

c. Minimum Volumetric Air Flow (SCFM) Per Basin: 600

d. Maximum Pressure Loss through Manifold, Distribution Pipes, and Diffusers, PSI: 1.5

e. Minimum Diffuser Submergence (ft): 10.22

f. Maximum Diffuser Height above floor (ft): 1.5

5. Minimum Standard Oxygen Transfer Efficiency (SOTE) at design Maximum SOTR and diffuser submergence: 19.4%

6. Maximum Volumetric Air Rate per effective membrane surface area of 7.32 SCFM/SQFT (3 SCFM per 9‐inch disc).

7. Minimum Volumetric Flow Rate per tank upper area required for mixing: 0.12 SCFM/SQFT (0.5 SCFM per 9‐inch disc).

D. Performance Testing: Performance of the fine bubble aeration system shall be verified by factory oxygen transfer test conducted in clean water. Factory tests shall be based on the following criteria:

1. A minimum of 3 tests for each specified condition in complete accordance with the ASCE Standard for the Measurement of Oxygen Transfer in Clean Water (latest edition).

2. Conduct tests in a full‐scale aeration test tank (minimum of 300 ft²) at the specified submergence and water depth with a diffuser density equivalent to the specified tank configuration. Diffuser density is defined as the ratio of the total tank surface area to the total active diffuser surface area.

3. Conduct factory test with air rate and mass rate of oxygen transfer directly proportional to the ratio of the factory test tank volume and the design tank volume.

4. Plot of pounds oxygen per day per 1000 cubic feet of tank volume versus air per 1000 cubic feet of tank volume in tap water at 14.7 psia, 20°C and zero dissolved oxygen at the specified submergence.


5. Test SOTE results shall be normalized to a TDS concentration of 1000 mg/l.

6. Certify and stamp all tests by a Professional Engineer.

7. Include all costs for testing in the Bid price.

8. Submit all test data from oxygen transfer tests for approval by the Engineer prior to manufacturing equipment.

9. In lieu of a factory test, certified results from previous testing at a minimum of three (3) other locations under similar conditions to that anticipated at this site may be provided.

a. Certified tests must be acceptable to the Engineer.

b. Data provided shall be from previous testing conducted in accordance with ASCE Standard for the Measurement of Oxygen Transfer in Clean Water.

c. Diffuser density, submergence and air rate per diffuser shall be within ±20% of those specified for this project.

d. Data shall be presented, normalized to TDS, certified, and submitted as required in the above paragraphs D.4 through 8.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Equipment shall be provided by a company experienced and qualified in the design, manufacture, and field testing of fine bubble membrane aeration systems.

B. Provide evidence of previous experience by submitting a list of at least 50 installations in the United States of similar fine bubble aeration systems in continuous successful operation for a period of not less than 10 years.

C. Submit list of installations, including project name, diffuser type and model, names and phone numbers of key contacts with the product data submittal.

D. Provide evidence of experience and description of adequate facilities to perform factory oxygen transfer tests. Submit certified copies of previous oxygen transfer test reports conducted in accordance with the ASCE Standard for the Measurement of Oxygen Transfer in Clean Water that meets the requirements of Paragraph 1.05.C.9 and details of the factory oxygen transfer test facility.

1.07 WARRANTY



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Aquarius Technologies Inc., Port Washington, WI

B. Environmental Dynamics International, Inc., Columbia, MO

C. Sanitaire Division of Xylem Inc., Brown Deer, WI

D. Engineer‐approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for approval.

E. All Manufacturers listed above must comply with all of the performance and qualification requirements specified herein for the model of diffuser proposed.

2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Droplegs

B. Manifolds

C. Air distributors with diffuser holders or diffuser saddle mounts

D. Air distributor and manifold connection joints

E. Pipe supports and anchors

F. Diffuser assemblies

G. Moisture blow‐off assemblies

H. All needed gaskets including coupling and flange gaskets and “O” rings, etc.

I. All needed hardware including bolts, nuts, and washers.

2.03 MATERIALS, FABRICATION AND FINISHING

A. Stainless Steel – Pipe, Fittings, Supports, and Hardware

1. Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of 304L (for drop pipe only) and 316L stainless steel with a 2D finish conforming to ASTM A240, A554, A774, and A778.


2. Fabricate non‐welded parts and flanges from sheets, plates or bars of 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240 or ASTM A276.

3. Welds & Welding Procedure

a. Weld in the factory with ER 316L filler wire using MIG, TIG or plasma‐arc inert gas welding processes. Provide a cross section equal to or greater than the parent metal.

b. Provide full penetration butt welds to the interior surface with gas shielding of interior and exterior of joint.

c. Continuously weld both sides of face rings and flanges to eliminate potential for crevice corrosion.

4. Corrosion Protection and Finishing: Clean all welded stainless steel surfaces and welds after fabrication by using the following procedure:

a. Pre‐clean all outside weld areas to remove weld splatter with stainless steel brushes and/or deburring and finish grinding wheels.

b. Finish clean all interior and exterior welds and piping by full immersion pickling and rinse with water to remove all carbon deposits and contaminants to regenerate a uniform corrosion resistant chromium oxide film per ASTM A380 Section 6.2.11, Table A2.1 Annex A2 and Section 8.3.

5. Fasteners, Anchor Bolts, and Hardware: 316 series stainless steel.

B. Natural Rubber

1. Furnish all fixed and expansion joint O‐ring gaskets of natural rubber/SBR with a Shore A durometer of 45 ± 5.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – Pipe and Fittings

1. Produce all PVC pipe and fittings from PVC compound with a minimum tensile strength of 7000 psi.

2. Provide lower drop pipe, manifold and air distribution headers as follows:

a. Size: 4 inch, SDR 33.5 per ASTM D3915 and D3034 or Schedule 40 per ASTM D1784, D1785, D2466

b. Size: 6 inch & larger, Schedule 40 per ASTM D1784, D1785, D2466


3. Design air distributors and manifolds to withstand 125° F mean wall temperature.

4. PVC compounds for manifolds, air distributors, joints and PVC diffuser assembly components shall have minimum 1.5 % by weight of titanium dioxide to minimize ultraviolet light degradation.

5. Factory solvent‐weld all PVC joints and fittings. Field solvent welding will not be permitted.

D. EPDM – Disc Membrane Diffusers and Gaskets

1. Manufacture circular membrane diffuser discs with integral O‐ring of EPDM synthetic rubber compound with precision die formed slits. Thermoplastic materials (i.e. plasticized PVC or polyurethane) are not acceptable.

2. Add carbon black to the material for resistance to ultraviolet light.

3. Design diffuser as one piece injection molded part with a minimum thickness of 0.080 inches for 9 inch diameter unit.

4. Limit the maximum tensile strength of the diffuser to 10 psi when operating at 2.4 SCFM/ft² of material. Furnish proportionately thicker material for larger diameter disc diffusers to limit the maximum tensile stress and to resist stretching.

5. Produce diffusers free of tears, voids, bubbles, creases or other structural defects.

6. EPDM diffuser material shall have the following properties:

a. Base Polymer: EPDM per ASTM D573

b. UV Resistance: Carbon Black

c. Minimum Thickness: 0.080”

d. Specific Gravity: <1.25

e. Shore A Durometer Rating: 58% ± 5% per ASTM D2240

f. Modulus of Elasticity: >500 psi per ASTM D412

g. Ozone Resistance (72 hrs: 40°C pphm): No cracks @ 2X magnification per ASTM D1171 Test A


h. Tensile Strength: >1200 psi per ASTM D412

i. Elongation % Retained 70 hrs @ 100°C: 75% Max per ASTM D573

j. Elongation % Minimum at break: 350% per ASTM D412

k. Dynamic Wet Pressure (max): 16 inches WG @ 3 SCFM/SQFT 33 inches WG @ 8 SCFM/SQFT

E. Membrane Longevity

1. Longevity of the proposed membrane diffusers shall have been demonstrated in a full‐scale municipal installation operating continuously for a minimum of three years.

2. Test reports, prepared and certified by an independent testing agency, shall confirm membrane longevity through compliance with the following maximum allowed (+/‐) change in each membrane property.

a. Property and Maximum Change

1) Durometer: 5%

2) Weight: 5%

3) Permanent Set: 0.5%

4) DWP (clean diffusers): 6.0 in. WG @ 3.5 SCFM/SQFT

5) DWP (clean diffusers): 12.0 in. WG @ 8 SCFM/SQFT

6) SOTE (clean diffusers): 10%

3. Data for a minimum of three diffusers from the installation shall be provided.

2.04 DROPLEGS

A. Provide a stainless steel dropleg from the air main connection near top of tank wall to the dropleg connection on the manifold. Connection shall be as close to the manifold as possible, but not greater than 2‐feet above the manifold.

B. Drop leg pipe shall be sized to provide a headloss of less than 3‐inches of w.c./100 feet of length. This requires two (2) 8‐inch drop legs for the new aeration basin and two 10‐inch drop legs for the existing oxidation ditch.


C. The pipe shall be schedule 10 (minimum wall thickness) 304L or 316L stainless steel. Drop leg configuration shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings unless otherwise approved.

D. Stainless steel drop leg pipe length shall include a minimum length of submerged stainless steel pipe adequate to lower the connecting PVC pipe mean wall temperature to 125 degrees F from an inlet air temperature of 250 degrees F, as calculated by the manufacturer.

E. Provide a flanged 90‐degree bend with a 125‐pound bolt pattern for the top connection.

F. Provide an expansion joint in the drop pipe if necessary to prevent excess pipe strain due to thermal expansion/contraction over the specified temperature range. Submit calculations verifying that the manifold is designed to accommodate expansion/contraction without excess pipe strain.

G. Provide a stainless steel band clamp coupling with gasket for the lower dropleg to manifold connection.

2.05 MANIFOLDS

A. Provide PVC manifolds for connection to the air distribution headers.

B. Fabricate manifolds with fixed threaded union or flanged joints for connection to the air distributors.

C. Design manifold, distributor connections and supports to resist thrust generated by expansion/contraction of the air distributors over a temperature range of 125 deg F.

D. Support manifold with a minimum of two supports.

E. Connect manifolds with fixed flanged joints to prevent rotation or blow apart.

F. Provide expansion joints if necessary to prevent excess pipe strain due to thermal expansion/contraction over the specified temperature range. Submit calculations verifying that the manifold is designed to accommodate expansion/contraction without excess pipe strain.

2.06 AIR DISTRIBUTORS AND DIFFUSER HOLDERS

A. Provide minimum 4‐inch diameter air distributors perpendicular to the air manifold.


B. Fabricate distributors with single diffuser holders solvent welded to the crown of the air distributor for complete air seal and strength. Alternate methods of securing holders may be accepted, only with approval by the Engineer.

C. Provide minimum solvent weld area of 13 square inches.

D. Diffuser holders shall be attached to the pipe with no more than +/‐ 1 degree angular variation from top dead center, and no greater than +/‐ 1/8” lateral spacing variation to insure diffuser uniformity within the grid piping.

E. Design distributors and holders to resist a dead load of 200 lbs applied vertically to the outer edge of the diffuser holder.

F. Provide threaded removable end caps complete with gasket, threaded coupling and end plate for clean out at the end of each distributor.

2.07 AIR DISTRIBUTOR AND MANIFOLD CONNECTION JOINTS

A. Join air distributor sections with positive locking fixed threaded union or flange type joints for all submerged header joints to prevent blow apart and rotation.

B. Design threaded union joints with spigot section connected to one end of the distribution header, a threaded socket section connected to the mating distribution header, an O‐ring gasket and a threaded screw on retainer ring. Solvent welding shall be done in the factory.

C. Fixed joints shall be designed to resist 80 ft‐lb torque without joint movement or failure.

D. Design flanged joints with a 125‐lb drilling angle face ring, follower flange and stainless steel hardware. Flanges shall be provided with full face gaskets.

E. Expansion Joints, if required, shall be Victaulic® “Depond‐O‐Lok” type or equal. Joints shall be fixed to the end of the pipe sections. Gaskets shall be EPDM. Coupling, housing, end rings and closure Type 316L stainless steel. Bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel per ASTM A‐276.

2.08 SUPPORTS

A. Limit maximum support spacing to 8 feet.

B. Design all supports to allow for thermal expansion and contraction forces over a temperature range of 125 deg F and to minimize stress build up in the piping system.

C. Provide a support for every expansion coupling, if coupling is required.


D. Design supports to be adjustable without removing the air distributor from the support.

E. Design supports to allow for complete removal from the tank, less the anchor bolt, to facilitate installation of additional headers and in‐tank maintenance. Support structures which consist of rods epoxied directly into the tank floor are not acceptable.

F. Manifold and Drop Leg Support – 6‐inch diameter and larger.

1. Design supports to include hold down guide straps, support structure and anchor bolts.

2. Design guide straps with a 2‐inch minimum width to eliminate point load on manifold and minimize binding.

3. Design support for 2 inches plus or minus vertical adjustment for leveling of manifold within ¼‐inch of a common plane.

4. Attach supports to tank floor with two stainless steel anchor bolts.

5. Secure drop leg to wall and support lower bend as required.

G. Air Distributor and Manifold Supports – 4‐inch diameter.

1. Provide guide and fixed type supports to allow expansion/contraction.

2. Design supports with hold down straps, support structure and anchor bolt.

3. Design support for 1‐1/2 inch (plus or minus) vertical adjustment for leveling air distributor to within ¼‐inch of a common plane.

4. Guide support

a. Guide straps to have 1‐1/2 inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface with chamfered edges to minimize binding and resistance to movement of air distributor under full buoyant uplift load.

b. Design strap with 1/8‐inch clearance around distributor so strap is self‐limiting and cannot be over tightened.

5. Fixed supports


a. Fixed straps to have 1‐1/2 inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface with punched burrs to positively grip the air distributor when tightened.

b. Design strap to be self‐limiting to prevent stressing the distributor if the clamp is overtightened.

6. Attach supports to tank floor with one stainless steel anchor bolt.

H. Anchor Bolts

1. Provide a mechanical stainless steel expansion type anchor bolt system.

2. Design anchor bolts for embedment in 4000 psi concrete with a minimum pullout safety factor of 4.

2.09 DIFFUSER ASSEMBLIES

A. Disc Diffusers

1. Disc diffuser assemblies shall include diffuser, diffuser gasket, holder, retaining ring and air flow control orifice.

2. Membrane Diffuser

a. Incorporate an integral check valve into the membrane diffuser.

b. Diffuser Support Plate

1) Provide a PVC support plate to form an air plenum under the diffuser and support for the membrane when the air is off.

2) Each baseplate shall incorporate a control orifice sized to give minimum headloss while assuring proper air distribution under the horizontal surface of the diffuser element.

3. Diffuser Holders and Retainer Rings

a. Design holder to provide peripheral support for the diffuser.

b. Design retainer ring to seal the diffuser and o‐ring in the holder to prevent air leakage around gasket and to prevent blow‐off during operation. The threaded retainer ring shall be designed to withstand a load at least 8 times that experienced for proper sealing of the diffuser or gasket.


c. Design retainer ring threads with minimum cross section of 1/8‐inch and allow for one complete turn to engage threads.

d. Diffuser holders may also be attached to the crown of the air distributor pipe by the use of a mechanical saddle, with approval of the Engineer. Saddle attachments shall provide complete air seal and not result in compromise of strength of pipe. Mechanical saddle attachment shall include the air inlet port and positive locking mechanism to locate and lock the assembly to the air distributor piping.

e. If excessive blow‐off of the membranes occurs, manufacturer shall remediate all diffusers with a modified style, such as with a stainless steel retainer ring, designed with a suitable restrainer to prevent such occurrence. Excessive blow‐off is defined as more than one (1) per basin per year. This remediation shall be covered under the warranty specified herein.

2.010 MOISTURE BLOW‐OFF ASSEMBLIES

A. 102BMoisture blow‐off assemblies shall be located to remove all moisture from each grid. Provide at least one (1) moisture blow‐off assembly for each aeration grid. For grids with a central air supply manifold, provide at least one (1) moisture blow‐off assembly on the manifold. Locations of moisture blow‐off assemblies shall be as shown on the Shop Drawing submittal and as approved by the Engineer.

B. The moisture blow‐off piping shall be minimum Schedule 80, 3/4” minimum diameter PVC in accordance with ASTM D‐2467. Fittings shall be solvent welded socket type Schedule 80. Field solvent welding shall be permitted for this item. The vertical piping shall be secured to the tank wall with stainless steel anchors and nylon or stainless steel cable fasteners. Support spacing shall not exceed 5 feet. The vertical piping shall extend to the top of the aeration tank wall.

C. Provide a 3/4” Schedule 80 PVC tee at the top of the vertical blow‐off piping. One outlet of the tee shall have a threaded cap to allow clean out of the blow‐off piping. The other outlet of the tee shall have a 3/4” PVC threaded ball valve. Ball valve shall be easily accessible from the outside of the aeration basin or a walkway. If it is necessary to extend the blow‐off piping for accessibility, it shall have a continuous slope to prevent water accumulation, and shall be adequately supported.

D. The bottom of the vertical moisture purge piping shall connect to a moisture blow‐off tee. The moisture blow‐off tee shall be integral with the aeration


manifold piping and shall be provided with a factory‐welded 3/4" minimum PVC drip tube which shall remove moisture from the invert of the piping.

E. Alternately, a PVC air lift purge system shall be installed to drain the entire piping system for each aeration grid. Each system shall consist of a sump and an eductor line with valve. The bottom of the sump shall be at a lower elevation than the air distribution headers. The eductor line shall be 3/4” minimum diameter Schedule 80 PVC pipe or a 3/4” diameter eductor line located in a 4” PVC SDR 32.5 carrier column. The eductor line must terminate in a PVC ball valve 18 inches above the tank wall but not greater than 5 feet above water level. PVC eductor lines or carrier columns shall be supported by stainless steel supports.


A. Diffuser system manufacturer shall provide the following spare parts:

1. Ten percent (10%) of the number of installed diffuser assemblies, including membrane diffusers and diffuser gasket, diffuser holder and retainer rings, bolts, washers, gaskets, supports, retainer clamps, etc.

2. One (1) primary manifold support including all hardware such as anchor bolts, nuts, and washers.

3. Two (2) air distributor supports or five percent (5%) of the total air distributor supports, whichever is greater, and including all hardware such as anchor bolts, nuts, and washers.

4. Two (2) air distributor laterals or five percent (5%) of the total air distributor laterals, whichever is greater.

5. Two (2) of the total number of expansion fittings (tees and couplings), if required.

B. Package spare parts in a separate container clearly marked as “Spare Parts” and provide inventory list on exterior of the container.

C. Special Tools

1. Diffuser system manufacturer shall provide a tool set for diffuser removal and installation, including wrench for removing and proper installation of diffuser retainers with torque‐limiting device for bolt‐secured diffusers.

2. Tool required for diffuser removal and replacement shall allow one‐person, with minimal training, to change a diffuser membrane in a time period of 5 minutes or less, including removal of membrane and


replacement with a new membrane fully secured in place sufficient that it will not blow out or become dislodged under test or working pressure.

D. Spare parts shall be packaged in accordance with Specification Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TEST

A. Perform factory quality control testing on the membrane diffusers.

1. Quality Control: Test membrane properties in accordance with specified test methods, including membrane durometer, tensile strength, modulas of elasticity, and specific gravity. Sample diffusers using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard 105E.

2. Dynamic Wet Pressure (DWP): Factory test minimum 4% of the diffusers at 2.4 SCFM/SQFT and 2 inches submergence to verify compliance with specifications.

3. Air Flow Visual Uniformity: Visually inspect minimum 1% diffusers for uniform air distribution across the active surface of the diffuser at 2.4 SCFM/SQFT and 2 inches submergence. Active surface is defined as the perforated horizontal projected area of the diffuser.

B. Certified copies of the test reports shall be submitted to Engineer prior to shipment per Section 01 33 00.


A. The diffused aeration systems shall be packaged and shipped in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

B. All PVC fittings and pipe, diffusers, and gaskets shall be carefully packaged to protect the components from dirt and dust and from the effects of ultraviolet light.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSPECTION

A. Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect the installation as specified in Specification Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning.

B. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of:


1. One (1) trip for one (1) 8‐hour day for assistance during installation for the first aeration tank.

2. One (1) trip for one (1) 8‐hour day for assistance during installation for the second aeration tank (oxidation ditch).

3. One (1) trip for two (2) 8‐hour days for final installation inspection and field testing for the first aeration tank.

4. One (1) trip for two (2) 8‐hour days for final installation inspection and field testing for the second aeration tank (oxidation ditch) plus training.

C. Manufacturer’s service representative shall arrive on‐site for each trip within 1‐week of notice from Owner of the time required.

D. Manufacturer’s installation inspection shall consist of:

1. Installation review in accordance with Manufacturer’s Installation Checklist and checking the following:

a. Tank leak tested and cleaned.

b. Layout per approved Shop Drawings.

c. System and components inspected for damage.

d. Gaskets installed where required.

e. Pipe properly plumbed and fittings/connections checked for tightness.

f. Pipe supports at proper locations and properly anchored.

g. Diffusers level and at the proper elevation.

h. Air piping cleaned/flushed and purged of water.

i. Proper air filter on blower inlet.

j. Purge system properly installed.

k. Proper torque applied to all bolts, brackets, clamps, retainer rings.

3.04 FIELD TESTING

A. On‐site field testing shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning.


B. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide on‐site field testing of the equipment during the same trip for final installation inspection for each aeration tank.

C. The following field tests shall be performed by the Manufacturer’s Representative and witnessed by the Owner’s Representative.

1. Upon installation of the supports and prior to the installation of piping, 10% of the supports of each type shall be tested for pullout. The supports to be tested shall be chosen at random by the Owner’s representative who shall witness the tests. Each support chosen for test shall be attached to a lever, which shall be placed on a fulcrum. A static load shall be applied to the opposite end producing a vertical extracting force on the support equal to 5 times the calculated maximum buoyant force to which the support will be subjected in normal operation.

2. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall perform a field leakage test for air manifolds and distribution headers. The procedure shall consist of submerging all piping in clean water, turning the air on at minimum flow and observing and correcting leaks.

3. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall test for proper elevation of diffusers by filling the tank with clean water to the top of the diffusers. Diffusers shall be within ±1/4” of the same elevation.

4. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall test for uniform air distribution. The tank shall be filled with clean water to a depth 1’‐0” above the top of the diffusers. The system shall be operated at an air flow of 2.4 SCFM/SQFT of diffuser, with air flow uniformity being verified by means of visual inspection. The tank will then be filled to the normal operating level and the surface shall be observed for air flow uniformity at maximum air flow per diffuser. Other abnormalities or inactive diffusers will be identified and repaired during testing.

D. Manufacturer’s service representative shall certify the installation and field testing in accordance with Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning Procedures, and shall submit the completed Certificate of Installation and Field Testing Form at the end of this Section.

3.05 TRAINING

A. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of training of the Owner’s staff in the operation and maintenance of the equipment specified herein. Training shall be performed during the same trip as field testing.


FORM 46 51 33‐1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF FINE BUBBLE DIFFUSERS




MANUFACTURER: DIFFUSER MODEL:

DIFFUSER TYPE: DIFFUSER SIZE:


BASIN LEAK TESTED: BASIN CLEANED:

MANUFACTURER’S CHECKLIST SUBMITTED: LAYOUT PER INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:

SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS INSPECTED FOR DAMAGE: GASKETS INSTALLED WHERE REQUIRED:

PIPE CONNECTIONS CHECKED FOR TIGHTNESS: PIPE PROPERLY PLUMBED:

PIPE SUPPORTS PROPERLY ANCHORED: FIXED/GUIDE PIPE SUPPORTS AT PROPER LOCATIONS:

DIFFUSER GRIDS ARE LEVEL: DIFFUSER GRIDS AT THE PROPER ELEVATION:

AIR PIPING CLEANED/FLUSHED: AIR PIPING PURGED OF WATER:

PROPER AIR FILTER ON BLOWER INLET: PURGE SYSTEM PROPERLY INSTALLED:

PROPER TORQUE APPLIED TO ALL BOLTS, BRACKETS, CLAMPS, RETAINER RINGS:

MISSING OR DAMAGED EQUIPMENT/SPARE PARTS (LIST):

FIELD TEST

PULL‐OUT TEST PERFORMED ON 10% OF THE SUPPORTS:

WATER FILLED ABOVE AIR MANIFOLD ‐ DISTRIBUTION LATERALS AND CONNECTIONS CHECKED FOR LEAKS:

WATER FILLED TO TOP OF DIFFUSERS ‐ DIFFUSERS LEVEL CHECKED (±1/4”):

WATER FILLED ABOVE DIFFUSERS ‐ WATER SURFACE CHECKED FOR EVEN DISTRIBUTION AT MINIMUM AIR FLOW:

WATER FILLED TO MAXIMUM LEVEL ‐ WATER SURFACE CHECKED FOR EVEN DISTRIBUTION AT MAXIMUM AIR FLOW:

WATER SURFACE CHECKED FOR INACTIVE DIFFUSERS OR OTHER ABNORMALITIES DURING OPERATION:

PURGE SYSTEM TESTED FOR PROPER OPERATIONS:

Comments: As the Manufacturer’s Representative, I certify that I have inspected the installation of the equipment, the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, I have witnessed all applicable field tests, all proper adjustments have been made, the equipment meets the performance requirements of the Contract Specifications, and the equipment is ready for plant commissioning and operation.

SELLER/MANUFACTURER


NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE

STV-46 66 56 Ultraviolet Disinfection System.doc 46 66 56 - 1

SECTION 46 66 56 ULTRAVIOLET DISINFECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Manufacturer shall furnish a complete open-channel, low-pressure low-intensity ultraviolet (UV) disinfection system as specified herein. The scope of work shall include replacement of the existing UV disinfection bank and associated electrical and controls in the existing UV channel, furnishing a new UV disinfection system with UV banks, system control center, power distribution centers, support racks for both channels, and furnishing a new level control weir for the new channel.

B. The work shall include fabrication, factory-testing, delivery, installation inspection, field testing, certification of installation and field testing, performance testing, and training.

1.02 RELATED WORK




A. AISI/SAE – American Iron and Steel Institute/Society of Automotive Engineers





B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 508A Industrial Control Equipment.

2. All equipment and devices shall be listed by and bear the Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Inc U.L. label or the CSA-C/US label.


D. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

1. Design Manual – Municipal Wastewater Disinfection (EPA/625/1-86/021), October 1986.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures including all the requirements listed therein, and including:

1. Installation list demonstrating compliance with Paragraph 1.05C.

2. Headloss calculations demonstrating compliance with the specified hydraulic characteristics.

3. Independent third-party bioassay validation report justifying the reactor size and lamp arrangement specific to the equipment being supplied shall be provided. The bioassay shall follow protocols described in the US EPA Design Manual – Municipal Wastewater Disinfection (EPA/625/1-86/021). The bioassay shall demonstrate that the proposed UV system design and number of lamps shall deliver the specified dose based on the water quality and operating conditions specified herein.

4. UV dose calculations. Dose calculations shall be based on the bioassay validation report.

5. Independent certification of fouling factor (FF) and end of lamp life (EOLL) aging factor must be submitted. The fouling factor shall be determined on municipal wastewater effluent.

6. Power requirements, including voltage, amperage, KW total for system and per bank, for current and future requirements.

7. Detailed description and equation used for dose-pacing and controlling the number of lamps in operation.

8. Shop drawings showing UV module, ballast enclosure, power distribution centers, system control center, UV module support racks, and water level controller.

9. Electrical and control drawings per Section 01 33 00.

10. Warranties as specified herein.

B. Certified Factory Test Report as specified herein.


C. On-site performance testing plan per Section 01 75 00.

D. On-site Performance Test Report as specified herein.

E. Certificate of Installation and Testing Form per Section 01 75 00 and as specified herein.

F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 00, Close-Out Submittals.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The process design and equipment layout is based upon the following manufacturer:

1. Trojan UV3000B™ as manufactured by Trojan Technologies, London, Ontario, Canada.

2. Engineer-approved equal. Refer to Section 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders Article 10 for procedure for prequalification for Bidding.

B. The above manufacturer has been prequalified to submit bids for this procurement contact based on matching and replacing the existing UV disinfection system. Systems that do not fit within the existing channel configuration and do not have the same electrical and control requirements shall not be approved.

C. All qualified UV disinfection system manufacturers shall:

1. Have at least 50 installations in the United States of the model proposed in satisfactory operation for at least 10 years.

2. Provide an independent third-party bioassay validation report in accordance with Paragraph 1.04A.3.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Mechanical and Electrical Warranty:

1. Manufacturer shall warrant the materials and equipment specified herein to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Field Testing.

B. Ultraviolet Lamp Warranty:


1. UV Lamps to be warranted for a minimum of 12,000 hours, non-prorated. Pro-rated warrantees shall not be accepted. On/off cycles are limited to an average of four (4) per day.

1.07 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Surface Water Discharge Design Criteria: Provide equipment that shall disinfect domestic wastewater that has undergone secondary treatment (activated sludge plus settling) in compliance with the following criteria:

1. Peak Flow: 1.65 MGD per channel, 3.3 MGD both channels

2. Minimum Flow: 0.2 MGD

3. Total Suspended Solids: ≤30 mg/L (maximum 30-day average)

4. Total Suspended Solids: ≤45 mg/L (maximum 7-day average)

5. Ultraviolet Transmittance @ 253.7 nm: ≥65% (30-day average)

6. Effluent Fecal Coliform Bacteria: ≤200 CFU/100 mL (maximum 30-day geometric mean)

7. Effluent Fecal Coliform Bacteria: ≤400 CFU/100 mL (maximum 7-day geometric mean)

8. Dose: Minimum 30 mJ/cm2 at peak flow and minimum UV transmittance with all UV banks in service.

9. Reliability: The system shall be capable of treating 50% (minimum) of the peak flow with one channel out of service.

B. Dose Calculations

1. The system design dose shall be based on third-party bioassay dose calculations incorporating the following criteria:

a. End of lamp life (EOLL) derating factor after 12,000 hours of service.

b. Sleeve fouling derating factor (FF).

2. The end of lamp life derating factor and the sleeve fouling derating factor shall be validated by a third party and submitted per Paragraph 1.04A.5.

C. Headloss


1. Maximum headloss at peak flow: <2”

2. The system shall be designed to automatically maintain water surface within the design constraints of the system proposed at the specified peak and minimum design flows.

D. Operating Conditions:

1. The system shall be designed for an outdoor installation.

2. Effluent Temperature Range: 33 to 85 °F (1 to 30 °C)

3. Ambient Temperature Range: 10.0 to 100.0 °F

E. Channel Configuration

1. Number of channels: 2

2. Channel length ahead of weir, minimum: 13.5 feet

3. Weir length per channel: 22 feet (11 feet in channel length)

4. Channel width: 48 inches

5. Channel height: 48 inches

6. Effluent depth in channel, minimum: 12 inches

F. Equipment Configuration

1. Designation of Banks: Q-U-1 (channel 1), Q-U-2 (channel 2)

2. Number of Banks per Channel: 1

3. Number of UV Modules per Bank: 16

4. Number of Lamps per UV Module: 4

5. Total Number of Lamps: 128

6. Number of System Control Centers: 1

7. Number of UV Sensors: 2 (one per bank)

8. Number of Power Distribution Centers: 2 (one per bank)

9. Number of Level Controllers: 1 existing and 1 new weir



A. The system shall comply with the design criteria and effluent limitations listed in Paragraph 1.07 herein.

B. The third-party validated bioassay UV dose produced by the system shall not be less than the doses specified in Paragraph 1.07 with all UV banks in service, at the specified peak flow and UV transmittance at 253.7 nm, and applying the certified end of lamp life derating factor and fouling factor.

C. The system shall be able to continue providing disinfection while replacing UV lamps, quartz sleeves and ballasts, and while cleaning the sleeves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All metal components in contact with effluent shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.

B. All wiring exposed to UV light shall be TeflonTM-coated.

C. All material exposed to UV light shall be Type 316 stainless steel, Type 214 quartz, or TeflonTM.

D. All wires connecting the lamps to the ballasts shall be enclosed inside the frame of the UV Module and not exposed to the effluent.

2.02 LAMP ARRAY CONFIGURATION

A. The lamp array configuration shall be uniform with all lamps parallel to each other and to the flow direction. The lamps shall be evenly spaced in horizontal and vertical rows with centerline spacing equal in both directions.

B. The single array pattern shall be continuous and symmetrical throughout the reactor.

C. The system shall be designed for complete immersion of the UV lamps including both electrodes and the full length of the lamp tube in the effluent. Both lamp electrodes shall operate at the same temperature and be cooled by the effluent.

2.03 UV MODULE

A. Each UV module shall consist of UV lamps with an electronic ballast enclosure mounted on the Type 316 stainless steel frame.


B. Each lamp shall be enclosed in its individual quartz sleeve, one end of which shall be closed and the other end sealed by a lamp end seal and compressed O-ring.

C. The closed end of the quartz sleeve shall be held in place by means of a retaining O-ring. The quartz sleeve shall not come in contact with any steel in the frame.

D. The ends of the lamp sleeve shall not protrude beyond the stainless steel frame of the UV Module.

E. Lamp wires shall terminate in the electronic ballast enclosure located at the top of the UV Module.

F. The electronic ballast enclosure shall contain the electronic ballasts and L.E.D. lamp status displays visible through a red plexiglass viewing plate.

G. The ballast enclosure shall be anodized aluminum.

H. All wires connecting the lamps to the ballasts shall be enclosed inside the frame of the UV Module and not exposed to the effluent.

I. All lamp to ballast connections shall be made by and tested by the UV Manufacturer.

J. At the point of exit from the UV Module frame the multiconductor cable shall pass through a waterproof strain relief.

K. Each UV Module shall weigh no more than 40 lbs and shall be individually removable without using mechanical lifting devices.

L. Each UV Module shall be connected to a receptacle on the Power Distribution Center by means of a multiconductor cable with a molded connector.

M. Each UV Module shall have a UL rating of Type 6P.

2.04 UV LAMPS

A. Lamps shall be low pressure mercury slimline of the hot cathode instant start design. The coiled filamentary cathodes shall be heated by the arc current.

B. The filament shall be of the clamped design, significantly rugged to withstand shock and vibration.

C. Electrical connections shall be at one end.

D. Each connection shall have only two pins.

E. 90% of UV output shall be within the wavelengths of 233.7 to 273.7 nm.


F. Lamps shall be rated to produce zero levels of ozone.

G. Lamp bases shall be of a metal and ceramic construction resistant to UV and ozone.

H. The lamp base shall incorporate a dielectric barrier or pin isolator. The pin isolator shall consist of a non-conductive divider placed between the lamp pins to prevent direct arcing across the pins in moist conditions.

2.05 LAMP END SEAL AND LAMP HOLDER

A. The open end of the lamp sleeve shall be sealed by means of a Type 316 stainless steel sleeve nut which threads onto a sleeve cup and compresses the sleeve O-ring.

B. The sleeve nut shall have a knurled surface to allow a hand grip for tightening. The sleeve nut shall not require any tools for removal.

C. The lamp shall be held in place by means of a moulded lampholder that shall incorporate two seals. The lampholder shall seal against the inside of the quartz sleeve to act as a second seal in series with the external O-ring seal.

D. The second seal on the lampholder shall isolate and seal the lamp from the module frame and all other lamps in the module.

E. In the event of a quartz sleeve fracture the two seals of the lamp holder shall prevent moisture from entering the lamp module frame and the electrical connections to the other lamps in the module.

F. The lamp holder shall also incorporate a UV resistant plastic stop that shall prevent the lamp sleeve from touching the steel sleeve cup.

2.06 UV LAMP SLEEVES

A. Lamp sleeves shall be Type 214 clear fused quartz circular tubing as manufactured by General Electric or equal.

B. Lamp sleeves shall be domed at one end.

C. The nominal wall thickness shall be 1.5 mm.

2.07 UV LAMP MODULE SUPPORT RACK

A. The module support rack shall be Type 304 stainless steel and be suspended above the effluent in the channel by means of slotted angles allowing


adjustment to the precise height of the channel and requiring no fastening of the individual UV lamp modules.

B. The module support rack shall be designed so that no ultraviolet light shall radiate above the channel when the UV lamp modules are energized and fully immersed in the effluent.

2.08 LEVEL CONTROL WEIR

A. The level control weir shall be located at the discharge end of the UV channel.

B. The level control weir shall be designed to maintain a minimum channel effluent level as required to keep the lamps submerged.

C. The level control weir shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.

2.09 ELECTRICAL

A. General:

1. Each UV module shall be powered from the Power Distribution Center through a bus bar and shall include a relay board and watertight connectors.

2. Each ballast shall drive two lamps.

3. Maximum power consumption shall be no greater than 11.2 kW.

4. Electrical supply to each System Control Center shall be 120 Volts, single phase, 2 wire (plus ground), 12.5 Amps.

5. Electrical supply to each Power Distribution Center shall be no greater than 208 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire (plus ground), 6.1 kVA.

B. Power Distribution Center

1. Power distribution shall be through bus bars to environmentally sealed receptacles to allow for local connection of UV Modules.

2. Fusing of each UV module circuit shall be located inside the Power Distribution Center.

3. Enclosure material shall be Type 304 Stainless Steel.

4. Enclosure shall be waterproof.


5. The PDC shall be 8 inches high by 8 inches wide and span the complete channel width.

6. All Power Distribution Centers to be CSA approved with a rating of Type 4X.

7. One separate sealed Power Distribution Center shall be provided per bank of lamps to ensure complete electrical independence.

C. Control and Instrumentation

1. System Control Center – Touch Smart Controller

a. The operation is managed at the SCC by a Microprocessor which continuously monitors and controls the system functions.

b. The operator interface display screen shall be menu driven with automatic fault message windows appearing upon alarm conditions. The operator interface shall be a 7” color screen display

c. Alarms shall be provided to indicate that maintenance attention is required or to indicate an extreme alarm condition in which the disinfection performance may be jeopardized. The alarms shall include but not be limited to:

i. Bank Status

ii. Common Alarm – Major, Minor

iii. Low UV Intensity

d. A major alarm shall automatically result in all available lamps being energized, as required to meet the minimum dose at all times.

e. The 100 most recent alarms shall be recorded in an alarm history register and displayed when prompted

f. Elapsed time of each bank shall be recorded and displayed on the display screen when prompted.

g. Digital I/O modules shall be provided to remotely indicate status and alarms such as:

i. Alarm conditions (major alarm, low UV intensity alarm)


ii. Bank Status (one for each UV bank supplied)

h. Analog input module for external flow signal.

i. SCADA communication shall be through Modbus Ethernet.

j. Panel shall be UL approved, rated Type 4X, and be 20 inches or 50.8 cm high by 20 inches or 50.8 cm wide by 9 inches or 22.9 cm deep. Panel shall be wall or rack mounted.

D. UV Intensity Sensors

1. The UV reactor shall have a minimum of one UV intensity sensor per bank.

2. The sensor shall not degrade after prolonged exposure to the UV light or effluent.

3. The sensor shall measure only the germicidal portion of the light emitted by the UV lamps at 254 nm, and shall have sensitivity at 254 nm of greater than 95%.

4. UV sensor shall be factory-calibrated to US National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

E. Flow Pacing

1. A flow pacing system shall be supplied to turn the UV banks on and off in relationship to a 4-20 mA signal from an effluent flow meter (by others).

2. Bank status shall be capable of being placed either in Manual, Off or Auto mode.

3. Banks shall be cycled for equal wear and timed off to minimize bank cycling.

F. Cleaning Rack

1. A moveable cleaning rack of Type 304 stainless steel shall be provided.

2.010 SPARE PARTS AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT

A. The UV Manufacturer shall furnish as part of the system the following spare parts and safety equipment:

1. 8 - UV Lamps


2. 8 - Lamp Sleeves

3. 8 - Lamp Holder Seals

4. 1 - Operators kit including face shield, gloves.

5. 1 - Spare fuses for control panel (all types)

B. All spare parts and safety equipment shall be packaged in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

C. Spare parts shall be inspected on site by UV System Manufacturer’s representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TEST

A. Perform factory tests of all control panels prior to shipment in accordance with Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning.

B. Certified Factory Test Reports shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to shipment in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.


A. The equipment shall be packaged and shipped in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Installing Contractor shall install the equipment specified herein in accordance with the UV System Manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings.

B. UV System Manufacturer’s qualified representative shall inspect the installation as specified in Specification Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning Procedures.

C. UV System Manufacturer’s representative shall provide a minimum of 1/2 day of on-site installation inspection and assistance, on-site field instrument calibration, and control panel testing. Inspection shall verify the following at minimum:

1. Power distribution and grounding testing complete.


2. Control panel input/output and field instrument terminations testing complete.

3. Instruments calibrated.

4. HMI screens display required information including the correct flow, UV intensity, operational dose, and bank and lamp status.

3.04 FIELD TESTING

A. On-site field testing shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning Procedures and as specified herein.

B. UV System Manufacturer's representative shall provide a minimum of 2 days of on-site field testing of the equipment and initial lamp burn-in.

C. Field Testing:

1. Proposed field-testing procedure shall be developed by the UV System Manufacturer and submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to scheduling and performing the field testing

2. Field testing shall demonstrate that the UV equipment and related control system operate in accordance with the specifications including all operating, monitoring, shutdown, and alarm functions.

3. Tested functions shall include but not be limited to:

a. Manual control of banks/lamps.

b. Automatic flow pacing of system.

c. Power loss and return functions.

d. Communications loss and return functions.

e. Remote access through Modbus Ethernet and plant SCADA.

f. All other control and alarm functions.

D. Performance Testing:

1. UV System Manufacturer's representative shall provide a minimum of 2 days of on-site performance testing of the UV Disinfection System.

2. Performance testing shall be performed to determine the actual system operating conditions and verify that the system meets the guaranteed


design criteria as specified herein, including hydraulic and disinfection performance.

3. The disinfection performance acceptance test shall be conducted by the UV Disinfection System Manufacturer’s representative after approval of the on-site field testing by the Engineer.

4. During the performance testing, the Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall start up and operate the UV disinfection system continuously for a minimum of 1 day for each channel to demonstrate the required guaranteed treatment performance.

5. Four (4) grab samples of the influent and four (4) grab samples of the effluent of each UV disinfection channel shall be collected by the UV System Manufacturer’s representative and analyzed for fecal coliform. Samples shall be collected on 2-hour intervals. The UV dose applied during the testing shall be as specified in Paragraph 1.07A or as close as practical at the available flows. Manufacturer’s representative shall deliver samples to third-party laboratory for analysis.

6. Sample analysis shall be performed by the third-party laboratory in accordance with Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, American Public Health Association (APHA), the American Water Works Association (AWWA), and the Water Environment Federation (WEF), latest edition.

7. Inlet and outlet level and flow shall be recorded during a simulated peak flow event through each train. The headloss shall be calculated and verified to against the hydraulic model for the train to determine if the system complies with the specified hydraulic performance requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall certify the installation and on-site testing in accordance with Section 01 75 00, Testing and Commissioning Procedures and shall submit the completed Certificate of Installation and Field Testing Form at the end of this Section.

F. Manufacturer shall submit a Performance Test Report to the Engineer within 14 days of leaving the site in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. Performance Test Report shall document the results of the field and performance testing and document compliance with the specifications.

3.05 TRAINING


A. Manufacturer’s qualified service representative shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of training of the Owner’s staff on the operation and maintenance of the equipment as specified in Section 01 79 00, Training.

B. Training shall meet the requirements of 01 79 00, Training.



FORM 46 66 56-1 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF UV DISINFECTION EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER NAME: PROJECT NAME:

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE/TAG NO.: MODEL NUMBER:

LOCATION/SERVICE: SERIAL NO.:

SYSTEM NAMEPLATE FLA: VOLTS: HERTZ: PHASE:


UV BANK SUPPORT RACKS INSTALLED/ANCHORED:

GROUNDING TESTED: CONTROL PANEL I/O TESTED: FIELD CONTROL WIRING TESTED:

LEVEL CONTROL WEIR INSTALLED/ANCHORED

POWER SUPPLY TESTED: POWER DISTRIBUTION TESTED:

UV SENSORS TESTED:

FLOW DISPLAY: DOSE DISPLAY: INTENSITY DISPLAYS TRAIN 1: INTENSITY DISPLAYS TRAIN 2:


FIELD TEST (CHECK IF VERIFIED)

MANUAL CONTROL: BANK 1/LAMP STATUS: MAJOR ALARMS: POWER LOSS/RETURN:

FLOW PACING: BANK 2/LAMP STATUS: MINOR ALARMS: COMMUNICATIONS LOSS/RETURN:

ETHERNET CONNECTION DATA:

OTHER: OTHER: OTHER:

COMMENTS:


MANUFACTURER/SELLER

CHECK OFF INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR

CHECK OFF WITNESS

CHECK OFF

NAME

SIGNATURE

DATE